alcatel-lucent 1830 photonic service switch 1 … · title page alcatel-lucent1830 photonic service...

Title page

Alcatel-Lucent 1830

PHOTONIC SERVICE SWITCH 1 (PSS-1) | Release 1.7.0

MD4H EDGE DEVICE USER GUIDE

8DG60418MAAA

Issue 3 | November 2012

Legal notice

Legal notice

Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective

owners.

The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.

Copyright © 2012 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.

Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective

owners.

The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.

Copyright © 2009 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.

Conformance statements

Interference Information: Part 15 of FCC Rules

Security statement

In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network through the use of remote access features. In such an event,

applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Alcatel-Lucent cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any

allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.

Limited warranty

For terms and conditions of sale, contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account Team.

Ordering Information

For more ordering information, refer to "How to order" in the section titled "About this document."

Contents

About this document

Purpose ........................................................................................................................................................................................... xxixxi

Reason for reissue ...................................................................................................................................................................... xxixxi

Intended audience ..................................................................................................................................................................... xxiixxii

How to use this information product ................................................................................................................................. xxiixxii

Safety information ................................................................................................................................................................... xxiiixxiii

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Part 15 Class A .............................................................................. xxiiixxiii

Conventions used ..................................................................................................................................................................... xxivxxiv

Related information ................................................................................................................................................................ xxivxxiv

User interface to system ......................................................................................................................................................... xxvxxv

Using procedures ....................................................................................................................................................................... xxvxxv

Information product support ................................................................................................................................................ xxvixxvi

Technical support ..................................................................................................................................................................... xxvixxvi

How to order .............................................................................................................................................................................. xxvixxvi

Training ....................................................................................................................................................................................... xxvixxvi

Packaging collection and recovery requirements ....................................................................................................... xxviixxvii

Recycling/take-back/disposal of product ....................................................................................................................... xxviixxvii

How to comment ................................................................................................................................................................... xxviiixxviii

1 Safety

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-11-1

Structure of safety statements ............................................................................................................................................... 1-21-2

General notes on safety ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-41-4

Laser safety ................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-61-6

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H

8DG60418MAAA Release 1.7.0

Issue 3 November 2012

iii

Electrostatic discharge .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-111-11

Save these safety instructions ............................................................................................................................................ 1-131-13

2 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-12-1

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-22-2

Hardware design and layout .................................................................................................................................................. 2-42-4

Features ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-122-12

Multiservice muxponder ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-182-18

Configurations ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-222-22

Topologies ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-272-27

CWDM Bidirectional Topology Management ............................................................................................................ 2-302-30

Protection .................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-332-33

Loopbacks ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-382-38

Performance Monitoring ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-412-41

Status Retrieval ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2-452-45

System access .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-462-46

Synchronization ...................................................................................................................................................................... 2-472-47

Reliability program ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-492-49

Ordering ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-632-63

Technical specifications ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-772-77

3 Installation and System turn up

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-13-1

Before you begin ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-33-3

Procedure 3-1: Vertical installation of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device ............................................................ 3-63-6

Procedure 3-2: Rack installation of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device ............................................................... 3-113-11

Procedure 3-3: Powering and provisioning an 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device .......................................... 3-123-12

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

iv Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H



Procedure 3-4: SFP module extraction ........................................................................................................................... 3-203-20

Procedure 3-5: LC fiber removal ...................................................................................................................................... 3-223-22

Procedure 3-6: Verify installation and seat packs ....................................................................................................... 3-233-23

Procedure 3-7: Connect to the NE and initialize database ...................................................................................... 3-243-24

Procedure 3-8: Connect to the NE for CLI access ..................................................................................................... 3-293-29

Procedure 3-9: Configure the software environment and load; commit the software ................................... 3-313-31

Procedure 3-10: Set the NE to operate in SDH mode ............................................................................................... 3-373-37

Procedure 3-11: Set the loopback IP address ............................................................................................................... 3-383-38

Procedure 3-12: Configure the LAN1 Ethernet port ................................................................................................. 3-393-39

Procedure 3-13: Set the network element date and time .......................................................................................... 3-403-40

Procedure 3-14: Update firmware on all circuit packs ............................................................................................. 3-413-41

Procedure 3-15: Configure additional system properties ........................................................................................ 3-423-42

Procedure 3-16: Configure GNE for management system access ........................................................................ 3-433-43

Procedure 3-17: Configure topological links ............................................................................................................... 3-503-50

Procedure 3-18: Verify system provisioning ................................................................................................................ 3-513-51

Procedure 3-19: Example configuration of FTP server ............................................................................................ 3-523-52

4 User Operations Procedures

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-14-1

Procedure 4-1: Connect to Network Element through Web user interface (WebUI) or CLI ......................... 4-24-2

Procedure 4-2: Personal computer requirements and provisioning ........................................................................ 4-44-4

Procedure 4-3: Software installation .................................................................................................................................. 4-54-5

Procedure 4-4: Electrical Sub-Network Connection Protection (E-SNCP) Provision .................................... 4-64-6

Procedure 4-5: Port Provisioning ........................................................................................................................................ 4-94-9

Procedure 4-6: GCC network setup ................................................................................................................................ 4-114-11

Procedure 4-7: TCA profiles .............................................................................................................................................. 4-124-12

Procedure 4-8: Provisioning for ETR operation ......................................................................................................... 4-144-14

Procedure 4-9: Cleaning optical connectors ................................................................................................................. 4-154-15

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




v

Procedure 4-10: Inspecting optical connectors ............................................................................................................ 4-184-18

Procedure 4-11: Cleaning other optical components ................................................................................................. 4-194-19

Procedure 4-12: In-service fan replacement ................................................................................................................. 4-204-20

Procedure 4-13: Fan air filter replacement .................................................................................................................... 4-234-23

5 Security administration

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-15-1

User accounts and privileges ................................................................................................................................................ 5-25-2

Configuring user accounts ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-65-6

Procedure 5-1: Procedures to configure user accounts ............................................................................................ 5-105-10

Login sessions ......................................................................................................................................................................... 5-135-13

System security features ...................................................................................................................................................... 5-155-15

Procedure 5-2: View security log procedure ................................................................................................................ 5-195-19

Authentication ......................................................................................................................................................................... 5-205-20

Procedure 5-3: RADIUS server procedures ................................................................................................................. 5-245-24

Procedure 5-4: SNMP procedures .................................................................................................................................... 5-265-26

6 Alarm List

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-16-1

BDI ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-46-4

BDIODU ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-56-5

CARDINIT .................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-66-6

CONTCOM ................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-76-7

DATAFLT .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-86-8

DBFL ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-96-9

DBFT .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-106-10

DBINVALID ............................................................................................................................................................................ 6-116-11

DEG ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-126-12

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

vi Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H



EQPT .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-136-13

ETR-MISMATCH (card) ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-146-14

FACTERM-DEV .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-156-15

FELANLOS ............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-166-16

FELANLSS .............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-176-17

FELOS ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-186-18

FEPORTMISMATCH .......................................................................................................................................................... 6-196-19

FRCDWKSWBK ................................................................................................................................................................... 6-206-20

FRCDWKSWPR .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-216-21

INTTEMP [over] .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-226-22

INTTEMP [under] .................................................................................................................................................................. 6-236-23

LANLOS ................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-246-24

LANLSS .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-256-25

LCK ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-266-26

LFD ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-276-27

LINKDOWN ............................................................................................................................................................................ 6-286-28

LOCKOUTOFPR ................................................................................................................................................................... 6-296-29

LOF ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-306-30

LOFEGR .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-326-32

LOM ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-336-33

LOS ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-346-34

LOS-P ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-356-35

LPBKLINE ............................................................................................................................................................................... 6-366-36

LPBKTERM ............................................................................................................................................................................ 6-376-37

MAN ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-386-38

MANWKSWBK ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6-406-40

MANWKSWPR ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6-416-41

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




vii

MISMATCH ............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-426-42

NET ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-436-43

OCI .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-446-44

PLM ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-456-45

PRCDRERR-TOPO .............................................................................................................................................................. 6-466-46

PWR ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-476-47

REPLUNITMISS ................................................................................................................................................................... 6-486-48

REPLUNITMISSMOD ........................................................................................................................................................ 6-496-49

SSF ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-506-50

SSFODU .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-516-51

SWFTDWN .............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-526-52

SWUPGFAIL ........................................................................................................................................................................... 6-536-53

TIM .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-546-54

TIMODU ................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-556-55

TRMT ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-566-56

UNKNOWN ............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-576-57

UPM ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-596-59

USALS ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-606-60

VOLTAGE[high] .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-616-61

VOLTAGE[low] ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6-626-62

WKSWPR ................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-636-63

7 Alarm Clearing Procedures

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-17-1

BDI ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-47-4

BDIODU ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-57-5

CARDINIT .................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-67-6

CONTCOM ................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-77-7

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

viii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H



DATAFLT .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-97-9

DBFL .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-117-11

DBFT .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-127-12

DBINVALID ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-137-13

DEG ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-157-15

EQPT .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-177-17

ETR-MISMATCH (card) ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-197-19

FACTERM-DEV .................................................................................................................................................................... 7-217-21

FELANLOS ............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-237-23

FELANLSS .............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-247-24

FELOS ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-257-25

FEPORTMISMATCH .......................................................................................................................................................... 7-267-26

FRCDWKSWBK ................................................................................................................................................................... 7-277-27

FRCDWKSWPR .................................................................................................................................................................... 7-287-28

INTEMP [over] ....................................................................................................................................................................... 7-297-29

INTEMP [under] ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-317-31

LANLOS ................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-327-32

LANLSS .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-337-33

LCK ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-347-34

LFD ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-357-35

LINKDOWN ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-367-36

LOCKOUTOFPR ................................................................................................................................................................... 7-397-39

LOF ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-417-41

LOFEGR .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-457-45

LOM ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-467-46

LOS ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-487-48

LOS-P ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-547-54

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




ix

LPBKLINE ............................................................................................................................................................................... 7-567-56

LPBKTERM ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-577-57

MAN ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-587-58

MANWKSWBK ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-607-60

MANWKSWPR ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-617-61

MISMATCH ............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-627-62

NET ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-647-64

OCI .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-657-65

PLM ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-667-66

PRCDRERR-TOPO .............................................................................................................................................................. 7-677-67

PWR ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-697-69

REPLUNTMISS ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-717-71

REPLUNITMISSMOD ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-737-73

SSF ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-757-75

SSFODU .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-777-77

SWFTDWN .............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-797-79

SWUPGFAIL ........................................................................................................................................................................... 7-807-80

TIM .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-857-85

TIMODU ................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-887-88

TRMT ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-907-90

UNKNOWN ............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-927-92

UPM ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-957-95

USALS ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-967-96

VOLTAGE[high] .................................................................................................................................................................... 7-987-98

VOLTAGE[low] ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-997-99

WKSWPR ............................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1007-100

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

x Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H



8 Supporting Procedures

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-18-1

Determining the far end of a service .................................................................................................................................. 8-28-2

Performing loopbacks ............................................................................................................................................................. 8-38-3

Path power trace ........................................................................................................................................................................ 8-48-4

Glossary

Index

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




xi

Contents

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H



List of tables

1 Chapter contents ....................................................................................................................................................... xxiixxii

2-1 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device SFPs supported ...................................................................................... 2-142-14

2-2 Client signal time slot requirements ................................................................................................................. 2-192-19

2-3 Supported loopbacks .............................................................................................................................................. 2-382-38

2-4 OTN Performance Monitoring ........................................................................................................................... 2-412-41

2-5 PCS PM parameter definitions ........................................................................................................................... 2-422-42

2-6 Failure Rates and MTBFs for 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device in a controlled environment .. 2-502-50

2-7 Failure Rates and MTBFs for 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device in an uncontrolled environment

............................................................................................................................................................................ 2-532-532-53

2-8 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 NE CD-ROMs and License Point Fees ....................................................... 2-632-63

2-9 PSS-1 MD4H SFPs ................................................................................................................................................ 2-642-64

2-10 1830 PSS-1 MD4H common equipment ........................................................................................................ 2-722-72

2-11 1830 PSS-1 MD4H installation kits ................................................................................................................. 2-732-73

2-12 1830 PSS-1 MD4H kit: customer-replaceable items ................................................................................. 2-742-74

2-13 1830 PSS-1 MD4H miscellaneous equipment ............................................................................................. 2-742-74

2-14 Power filter input specifications ........................................................................................................................ 2-772-77

2-15 SFP specifications ................................................................................................................................................... 2-782-78

2-16 SFC1 Optical Insertion Loss ............................................................................................................................... 2-882-88




3-1 Office power connection and cable color ....................................................................................................... 3-143-14

3-2 Test and expected results ...................................................................................................................................... 3-153-15

3-3 Power connection test and Results .................................................................................................................... 3-173-17

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




xiii

3-4 Shelf ID and Settings ............................................................................................................................................. 3-183-18

4-1 PC and software requirements .............................................................................................................................. 4-44-4

4-2 Tools for cleaning optical fiber connectors ................................................................................................... 4-154-15

5-1 User privilege levels ................................................................................................................................................. 5-35-3

7-1 Software upgrade status and actions ................................................................................................................ 7-807-80

List of tables

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xiv Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H



List of figures

2-1 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device showing Dimensions ............................................................................. 2-62-6

2-2 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device with the Cover .......................................................................................... 2-72-7

2-3 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device- Descriptive View ................................................................................... 2-82-8

2-4 PSS-1 MD4H physical layout ............................................................................................................................... 2-82-8

2-5 PSS-1 MD4H logical slot numbers .................................................................................................................. 2-102-10

2-6 Add/Drop operational mode ................................................................................................................................ 2-182-18

2-7 CROSSREGEN operational mode .................................................................................................................... 2-192-19

2-8 PSS1MD4 Client signal mapping examples ................................................................................................. 2-212-21

2-9 4 channel terminal node ........................................................................................................................................ 2-222-22

2-10 CWDM bus node ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-222-22

2-11 (E)SFC-2A bidirectional fiber connections ................................................................................................... 2-242-24

2-12 (E)SFC-4A bidirectional fiber connections ................................................................................................... 2-242-24

2-13 (E)SFC-8 bidirectional fiber connections ...................................................................................................... 2-252-25

2-14 PSS-1 bidirectional 2-degree OADM .............................................................................................................. 2-262-26

2-15 Single Fiber CWDM-DWDM regeneration .................................................................................................. 2-262-26

2-16 Single channel point-to-point (OTU-1 capacity) ........................................................................................ 2-272-27

2-17 CWDM point-to-point (up to 21.6Gb capacity with 8 OTU-1 channels) .......................................... 2-272-27

2-18 Bidirectional single fiber linear nodes ............................................................................................................. 2-282-28

2-19 Single channel Metro Access ring sub-tending a DWDM Metro Core network for multiservice

back hauling. .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-292-29

2-20 Unprotected and Protected E-SNCP example .............................................................................................. 2-342-34

2-21 E-SNCP on PSS1MD4 OT .................................................................................................................................. 2-352-35

2-22 Loopback access points ........................................................................................................................................ 2-402-40

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




xv

2-23 Recommended 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Circuit Pack and Unit Sparing Levels - 30 Day

Lead Time for packs in a controlled environment ................................................................................... 2-572-57


Lead Time for packs in an uncontrolled environment ............................................................................ 2-582-58


Lead Time for packs in a controlled environment ................................................................................... 2-592-59


Lead Time for packs in an uncontrolled environment ............................................................................ 2-602-60


Lead Time for circuit packs in a controlled environment ..................................................................... 2-612-61


Lead Time for circuit packs in an uncontrolled environment .............................................................. 2-622-62

3-1 Showing compliance and safety warnings ....................................................................................................... 3-53-5

3-2 Marking initial mounting screw location .......................................................................................................... 3-73-7

3-3 Initial mounting screw placement ........................................................................................................................ 3-73-7

3-4 Hanging vertical mounting bracket for alignment ......................................................................................... 3-83-8

3-5 Marking screw placement for vertical mounting bracket ........................................................................... 3-83-8

3-6 Securing all mounting screws ............................................................................................................................... 3-93-9

3-7 Placement of unit in vertical mounting bracket .............................................................................................. 3-93-9

3-8 Securing unit in vertical mounting bracket .................................................................................................... 3-103-10

3-9 Bay frame bracket installation ............................................................................................................................ 3-113-11

3-10 Rear ground attachment points ........................................................................................................................... 3-133-13

3-11 Power Cable .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-153-15

3-12 Power cables installed ........................................................................................................................................... 3-163-16

3-13 Half size pack adapter ........................................................................................................................................... 3-163-16

3-14 Filter pack installed ................................................................................................................................................ 3-173-17

3-15 Shelf ID ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3-183-18

3-16 Fibers ........................................................................................................................................................................... 3-193-19

3-17 Push in wedge ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-203-20

List of figures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xvi Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H



3-18 Pull out SFP .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-213-21

3-19 LC fiber tool .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-223-22

3-20 PC command window ........................................................................................................................................... 3-253-25

3-21 Login Screen ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-263-26

3-22 WebUI uninitialized database warning ............................................................................................................ 3-273-27

3-23 WebUI NE name prompt ...................................................................................................................................... 3-283-28

3-24 WebUI NE restart progress window ................................................................................................................. 3-283-28

3-25 Windows Firewall settings ................................................................................................................................... 3-323-32

3-26 WebUI Lan1 port provisioning .......................................................................................................................... 3-443-44

3-27 WebUI IP routes menu .......................................................................................................................................... 3-453-45

3-28 WebUI IP routes window ..................................................................................................................................... 3-463-46

3-29 WebUI Create IP route window ......................................................................................................................... 3-473-47

3-30 WebUI IP routes window with new route ...................................................................................................... 3-483-48

3-31 FileZilla connect to server screen ..................................................................................................................... 3-533-53

3-32 FileZilla server screen ........................................................................................................................................... 3-543-54

3-33 FileZilla groups menu ........................................................................................................................................... 3-553-55

3-34 FileZilla add group screen ................................................................................................................................... 3-563-56

3-35 FileZilla groups shared folders screen ............................................................................................................. 3-573-57

3-36 FileZilla browse folder screen ............................................................................................................................ 3-583-58

3-37 FileZilla users menu ............................................................................................................................................... 3-593-59

3-38 FileZilla users screen ............................................................................................................................................. 3-603-60

3-39 FileZilla add user screen ....................................................................................................................................... 3-613-61

3-40 FileZilla users shared folders screen ................................................................................................................ 3-623-62

3-41 FileZilla browse folder window ......................................................................................................................... 3-633-63

List of figures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




xvii

List of figures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xviii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H



List of procedures

3 Installation and System turn up

3-1 Vertical installation of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device ........................................................................... 3-63-6

3-2 Rack installation of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device .............................................................................. 3-113-11

3-3 Powering and provisioning an 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device ......................................................... 3-123-12

3-4 SFP module extraction .......................................................................................................................................... 3-203-20

3-5 LC fiber removal ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-223-22

3-6 Verify installation and seat packs ...................................................................................................................... 3-233-23

3-7 Connect to the NE and initialize database ...................................................................................................... 3-243-24

3-8 Connect to the NE for CLI access ..................................................................................................................... 3-293-29

3-9 Configure the software environment and load; commit the software .................................................. 3-313-31

3-10 Set the NE to operate in SDH mode ................................................................................................................. 3-373-37

3-11 Set the loopback IP address ................................................................................................................................. 3-383-38

3-12 Configure the LAN1 Ethernet port ................................................................................................................... 3-393-39

3-13 Set the network element date and time ............................................................................................................ 3-403-40

3-14 Update firmware on all circuit packs ............................................................................................................... 3-413-41

3-15 Configure additional system properties .......................................................................................................... 3-423-42

3-16 Configure GNE for management system access ......................................................................................... 3-433-43

3-17 Configure topological links ................................................................................................................................. 3-503-50

3-18 Verify system provisioning .................................................................................................................................. 3-513-51

3-19 Example configuration of FTP server .............................................................................................................. 3-523-52

4 User Operations Procedures

4-1 Connect to Network Element through Web user interface (WebUI) or CLI ........................................ 4-24-2

4-2 Personal computer requirements and provisioning ....................................................................................... 4-44-4

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




xix

4-3 Software installation ................................................................................................................................................. 4-54-5

4-4 Electrical Sub-Network Connection Protection (E-SNCP) Provision ................................................... 4-64-6

4-5 Port Provisioning ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-94-9

4-6 GCC network setup ............................................................................................................................................... 4-114-11

4-7 TCA profiles .............................................................................................................................................................. 4-124-12

4-8 Provisioning for ETR operation ......................................................................................................................... 4-144-14

4-9 Cleaning optical connectors ................................................................................................................................ 4-154-15

4-10 Inspecting optical connectors ............................................................................................................................. 4-184-18

4-11 Cleaning other optical components .................................................................................................................. 4-194-19

4-12 In-service fan replacement ................................................................................................................................... 4-204-20

4-13 Fan air filter replacement ..................................................................................................................................... 4-234-23

5 Security administration

5-1 Procedures to configure user accounts ........................................................................................................... 5-105-10

5-2 View security log procedure ................................................................................................................................ 5-195-19

5-3 RADIUS server procedures ................................................................................................................................. 5-245-24

5-4 SNMP procedures ................................................................................................................................................... 5-265-26

List of procedures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xx Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H



About this documentAbout this document

Purpose

This User Guide provides information for the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device. This

“hardened” device is engineered to operate in environments that experience extended

temperature ranges (-25°C to +65°C).

Included in this guide is information on hardware, features, applications, and ordering as

well as detailed procedural information and commands for installation, maintenance,

trouble clearing, and turn-up of the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device.

Reason for reissue

This document is being revised to include information about the new features in Release

1.7.

New Features for PSS-1 MD4H Release 1.7.0

Release 1.7.0 of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device includes the following new features:

• Threshold Crossing Alarm:

Threshold crossing alarms are implemented as standing conditions (ETSI Model)

• Provisionable GCC0 encapsulation mode:

Provisionable support is provided for legacy ITU-T G.7712 non-compliant GCC

processing, and G.7712 compliant GCC processing, to ensure interworking between

PSS-1 MD4H and 1830 PSS OTs.

• Support of G.823 wander specification for STM1/4 signal transport for

synchronization distribution across STM-1/4

• Secure Socket Layer (SSL) support on WEBUI, using SSL v3, based on the Advanced

Encryption Standard (AES)

This document is reissued as Issue 3 to include updates to the XFP/SFP supported list in

the Ordering and Technical Specifications section of Chapter 2, 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge

Device.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




xxi

Intended audience

This document is intended for the following users of the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device

documentation library:

• Network planners

• Administrators

• Operators

• Maintenance personnel

1830 PSS Edge Device products are meant to be installed, operated, and maintained by

personnel who have the knowledge, training, and qualifications required to safely perform

the tasks assigned to them. The information, processes, and procedures contained in the

1830 PSS Edge Device product documentation are intended for use by trained and

qualified personnel.

How to use this information product

This User Guide includes installation, procedures, and supporting information , such as

Safety instructions, Product overview, Installation and Provisioning, User Operations

Procedures , Glossary, and Index.

Assumptions

This document assumes that users have an understanding of the following:

• Basic principles of telecommunication transmission

• Common telecommunication and system terminology (a glossary is provided in this

manual to assist you)

• Test sets and tools used in the telecommunication industry

• Local operations and functional procedures of your company

• Personal computer (PC) operation, and common PC terminologies.

Chapter contents

Table 1 Chapter contents

Chapter Contents

Chapter 1, Safety This chapter provides important safety

instructions for 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge

Device

Chapter 2, 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device This chapter provides details about the

features in 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge

Device including applications, physical

descriptions, maintenance and loopbacks,

cross-connection information, technical

specifications, and ordering information.

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xxii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H



Table 1 Chapter contents (continued)

Chapter 3, Installation and Provisioning This chapter provides details about the

installation for 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge

Device, physical mounting, cabling,

powering, and provisioning.

Chapter 4, User Operations Procedures This chapter provides procedures to

provision features in 1830 PSS-1 MD4H

Edge Device

Chapter 5, Alarm List This chapter provides alarms and alarm

description

Chapter 6, Alarm Clearing Procedures This chapter contains the trouble-clearing

procedures required to clear the conditions

for the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device

Chapter 7, Supporting Procedures This chapter lists the troubleshooting

procedures for the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H

Edge Device that are used in more than one

trouble-clearing procedure.

Glossary Defines terms used throughout the 1830

PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device documentation.

Index Provides detailed access to the contents of

this document.

Safety information

For your safety, this document contains safety statements. Safety statements are given at

points where risks of damage to personnel, equipment, and operation may exist. Failure to

follow the directions in a safety statement may result in serious consequences.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Part 15 Class A

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital

device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide

reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a

commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency

energy, and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may

cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a

residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be

required to correct the interference at the user's expense.

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




xxiii

Conventions used

The following typographical conventions are used throughout this document:

• Bold is used to identify CIT menu selections and button selections.

• Italic is used to identify NE messages

• Computer voice is used to identify system message text displayed by the CIT

Related information

The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device User Guide is part of a set of

documents that support the 1830 PSS-32 system. The following items are available:

Document Number Document Title

8DG60418 AAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 32/16

(PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 3.0.0 Product Information and

Planning Guide

8DG60418 BAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 32/16

(PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 3.0.0 User Provisioning Guide

8DG60418 CAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 32/16

(PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 3.0.0 Maintenance and

Trouble-Clearing Guide

8DG60418 FAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release

3.0.0 Command Line Interface Guide

8DG60418 EAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release

3.0.0 TL1 Commands and Messages Guide

8DG60418 DAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 32/16

(PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 3.0.0 Installation and System Turn-Up

Guide

8DG60418 HAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release

3.0.0 Safety Guide

8DG60418 GAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release

3.0.0 Engineering and Planning Tool User Guide

3AL61305 AAAA 1354 RM-PhM Release 8.0 Photonic Manager EMS Reference

Guide

8DG60148 KAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 1 (PSS-1) Release

1.0 MSAH Edge Device User Guide

8DG60418 LAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 1 (PSS-1) Release

2.7.0 GBEH Edge Device User Guide

8DG60386 JAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 1 (PSS-1) Release

1.0 AHP Amplifier User Guide

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xxiv Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H



Document Number Document Title

8DG60013 MAAA Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 RAMAN Amplifier and EDFA

Release 2.0.0 User Guide

8DG60420 AAAA 1830 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Product Family

Release 3.0.0 CD-ROM1

Notes:

1. This CD does not include the EPT User Guide. This is published on separate media.

User interface to system

Users interact with 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device using a Personal Computer (PC),

which permits users to perform system operations such as administration, provisioning,

fault management, and more.

Using the PC interface

Procedures presented in this document expect users to be familiar with the PC and

navigating through the screens of information relating to a particular operation. The

screens are designed to be straightforward and to contain all information relating to a

particular operation. The procedures presented in this document rely on the information

provided in the screen displays. Therefore, it is imperative that users read all the

information provided in a screen before continuing an operational function.

Using procedures

To find instructions for performing a specific job, find the procedure in the chapter

Contents table.

Procedures contain step-by-step instructions to accomplish a distinct user function.

Supporting procedures are referenced from multiple procedures to support a job function

you are performing. Go to a supporting procedure only when it is referred to by another

procedure. Supporting procedures are not to be accessed directly except by very

experienced personnel.

Important! Perform all steps in a procedure sequentially, unless that step sends you to

another step or procedure.

Unless otherwise instructed, if one procedure sends you to another procedure, you

must return to the first procedure after you complete the second. After you have

completed the first procedure, you have finished.

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




xxv

If/Then statements in a procedure

If / Then ... columns in a procedure contain only one condition that is true in a table cell

under the If ... column. You perform the action in the related table cell under the Then ...

column. You then continue to the next sequential step or as directed by the action under

the Then ... column.

Verifying actions

Sometimes you will be asked to verify that actions have occurred. This may take the form

of a formal statement of the expected response. At other times, the instructions will

merely state that the user should verify an action or response to an action. If the expected

response is not observed and a specific trouble-clearing reference is not made, you should

reference Chapter 7, “Alarm Clearing Procedures” to start trouble clearing.

Information product support

Alcatel-Lucent provides a referral telephone number for document support. Use this

number to report errors or to ask questions about the document. This is a nontechnical

number. The referral number is 1 (888) 727 3615 (continental United States) or +1 (630)

713 5000 (for all countries).

Technical support

Login to OnLine Customer Support (OLCS) at http://support.alcatel-lucent.com and

select your country from the pulldown menu under "Product Technical Support - Phone

and Email Contact Information".

How to order

Contact your local sales representative, or login to OLCS at http://support.alcatel-lucent.

com and select your product from the pulldown menu under "Technical Content for".

Training

This document expects a user to be familiar with the basic functions of the system before

performing procedures that could damage the system, affect system operations, or impede

communication traffic within the system. Understanding the descriptive material provided

in this manual should allow you to perform the procedures necessary to operate and

maintain 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device.

Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent Training web-site training.alcatel-lucent.com for descriptions

of training courses available.

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xxvi Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H



support.alcatel-lucent.com



https://training.lucent.com

Packaging collection and recovery requirements

Countries, states, localities, or other jurisdictions may require that systems be established

for the return and/or collection of packaging waste from the consumer, or other end user,

or from the waste stream. Additionally, reuse, recovery, and/or recycling targets for the

return and/or collection of the packaging waste may be established.

For more information regarding collection and recovery of packaging and packaging

waste within specific jurisdictions, please contact the Alcatel-Lucent Field

Services/Installation - Environmental Health and Safety organization.

Recycling/take-back/disposal of product

Electronic products bearing or referencing the symbol shown below, when put on the

market within the European Union (EU), shall be collected and treated at the end of their

useful life in compliance with applicable EU and local legislation. They shall not be

disposed of as part of unsorted municipal waste. Due to materials that may be contained

in the product, such as heavy metals or batteries, the environment and human health may

be negatively impacted as a result of inappropriate disposal.

Note: In the EU, a solid bar under the crossed-out wheeled bin indicates that the

product was put on the market after 13 August 2005.

Moreover, in compliance with legal requirements and contractual agreements, where

applicable, Alcatel-Lucent will offer to provide for the collection and treatment of

Alcatel-Lucent products at the end of their useful life. Alcatel-Lucent will also offer to

provide for the collection and treatment of existing products displaced by Alcatel-Lucent

equipment.

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




xxvii

For information regarding take-back of equipment by Alcatel-Lucent, or for more

information regarding the requirements for recycling/disposal of product, please contact

your Alcatel-Lucent Account Manager or Alcatel-Lucent Take-Back Support

([email protected]).

How to comment

To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://infodoc.alcatel-

lucent.com/comments/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline

([email protected]).

About this document

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xxviii Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H



[email protected]

[email protected]

http://infodoc.alcatel-lucent.com/comments/



mailto:[email protected]

mailto:[email protected]

1 1Safety

Overview

Purpose

This chapter provides important safety instructions for the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge

Device.

Contents

Structure of safety statements 1-2

General notes on safety 1-4

Laser safety 1-6

Electrostatic discharge 1-11

Save these safety instructions 1-13

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




1-1

Structure of safety statements

Overview

This topic describes the components of safety statements that appear in this document.

General structure

Safety statements include the following structural elements:

Item Structure element Purpose

1 Safety alert symbol Indicates the potential for personal injury

(optional)

2 Safety symbol Indicates hazard type (optional)

3 Signal word Indicates the severity of the hazard

4 Hazard type Describes the source of the risk of damage or

injury

5 Safety message Consequences if protective measures fail

6 Avoidance message Protective measures to take to avoid the hazard

7 Identifier The reference ID of the safety statement

(optional)

SAMPLEB C D

E F

G

H

Lifting this equipment by yourself can result in injurydue to the size and weight of the equipment.

Always use three people or a lifting device to transportand position this equipment. [ABC123]

CAUTION

Lifting hazard

Safety Structure of safety statements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-2 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H



Signal words

The signal words identify the hazard severity levels as follows:

Signal word Meaning

DANGER Indicates an extremely hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will

result in death or serious injury.

WARNING Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in

death or serious injury.

CAUTION Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in

minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE Indicates a hazardous situation not related to personal injury.

Safety Structure of safety statements

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




1-3

General notes on safety

Overview

All responsible technical personnel must read this chapter before servicing the system.

Always keep the most recent issue of this document close to the equipment.

In addition to the general safety instructions in this chapter, users must also observe the

specific safety instructions in the individual chapters.

The equipment complies with the current national and international safety requirements.

It is provided with a high degree of operational safety resulting from many years of

development experience and continuous stringent quality checks.

Potential sources of danger

The equipment is safe in normal operation. However, some potential sources of danger

cannot be completely eliminated. In particular, these may arise during the following

operations:

• Opening of housings or equipment covers

• Manipulation of any kind within the equipment, even if it has been disconnected from

the power supply

• Disconnection of optical or electrical connections

• Through possible contact with live pairs, laser light, hot surfaces, sharp edges, or

components sensitive to electrostatic discharge

Special safety instructions

Laser safety and handling components sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD) are

vitally important to the equipment. For special safety instructions concerning laser safety

and electrostatic discharge, refer to the section, “Electrostatic discharge” (p. 1-11).

General safety requirements

In order to keep the technically unavoidable residual risk to a minimum, it is imperative

to observe the following rules.

• Transport, storage, and operation of the unit/system must be under the permissible

conditions only.

See accompanying documentation and information on the unit/system.

• Installation, configuration, and disassembly must be performed only by expert

personnel referring to the respective documentation.

Due to the complexity of the unit/system, the personnel performing installation,

configuration, and disassembly require special training.

• Expert and authorized users are required to operate the unit/system.

Safety General notes on safety

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Operate the unit/system only after having read and understood the chapter on safety

and the parts of the documentation relevant to operation. For complex systems,

additional training is recommended. Any obligatory training for operating and service

personnel must be carried out and documented.

• Do not operate the unit/system unless it is in perfect working order.

Immediately report any faults or errors that might affect safety.

• Operate the unit/system with the proper connections and under the environmental

conditions as described in the documentation.

• Only qualified Alcatel-Lucent personnel or expert personnel authorized by

Alcatel-Lucent are permitted to perform conversions or changes to the system or parts

of the system (including the software).

All changes performed by other persons lead to a complete exemption from liability.

Do not use components or spare parts that are not recommended by the manufacturer

and those not listed in the procurement documents.

• Only specially qualified personnel are permitted to remove or disable safety facilities,

clear faults and errors, and maintain the equipment.

Strictly observe the respective parts of the documentation, and consult the

documentation during the selection of measuring and test equipment.

• Document and archive all work related to calibrations, special tests after repairs, and

regular safety checks.

• Use non-system software at your own risk. The use/installation of non-system

software can adversely affect the normal functioning of the unit/system.

Safety General notes on safety

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




1-5

Laser safety

Compliance

The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS product line complies with the following laser safety

regulations and standards:

• International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 60825-2: 2004 rules classify 1830

PSS as a Class 1M laser product

• International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 60825-2: 2004 rules classify

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS products as Class 1 laser devices

• Food and Drug Administration's Center for Devices and Radiological Health

(FDA/CDRH) 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 rules classify 1830 PSS as a Class IIIb

laser product

• Food and Drug Administration's Center for Devices and Radiological Health

(FDA/CDRH) 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 rules classify 1830 PSS as a Class I laser

product

General laser information

Optical fiber telecommunication systems, their associated test sets, and similar operating

systems use semiconductor laser transmitters that emit infrared (IR) light at wavelengths

between approximately 800 nanometers (nm) and 1600 nm. The emitted light is above the

red end of the visible spectrum, which is normally not visible to the human eye. Although

radiant energy at near-IR wavelengths is officially designated invisible, some people can

see the shorter wavelength energy even at power levels several orders of magnitude below

any that have been shown to cause injury to the eye.

Conventional lasers can produce an intense beam of monochromatic light.

Monochromatic light is a single wavelength output of pure color that may be visible or

invisible to the eye. A conventional laser produces a small-sized beam of light, and

because the beam size is small, the power density (also called irradiance) is very high.

Consequently, lasers and laser products are subject to federal and applicable state

regulations as well as international standards for their safe operation.

A conventional laser beam expands very little over distance, or is said to be very well

collimated. Thus, conventional laser irradiance remains relatively constant over distance.

However, lasers used in lightwave systems have a large beam divergence, typically 10 to

20 degrees. Here, irradiance obeys the inverse square law (doubling the distance reduces

the irradiance by a factor of four) and rapidly decreases over distance.

Safety Laser safety

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Lasers and eye damage

The optical energy emitted by laser and high-radiance LEDs in the 400 to 1400-nm range

may cause eye damage if absorbed by the retina. When a beam of light enters the eye, the

eye magnifies and focuses the energy on the retina magnifying the irradiance. The

irradiance of the energy that reaches the retina is approximately 105 (or 100,000 times

more than at the cornea) and, if sufficiently intense, may cause a retinal burn.

The damage mechanism at wavelengths used in optical fiber telecommunications is

thermal in origin; for example, damage caused by heating. Therefore, a specific amount

of energy is required for a definite time to heat an area of retinal tissue. Damage to the

retina occurs only when one looks at the light sufficiently long that the product of the

retinal irradiance and the viewing time exceeds the damage threshold. Optical energies

above 1400 nm cause corneal and skin burns, but these optical energies do not affect the

retina. The thresholds for injury at wavelengths greater than 1400 nm are significantly

higher than that for wavelengths in the retinal hazard region.

Classification of lasers

Manufacturers of lasers and laser products in the United States are regulated by the Food

and Drug Administration's Center for Devices and Radiological Health (FDA/CDRH)

under 21 CFR 1040. These regulations require manufacturers to certify each laser or laser

product as belonging to one of four major classes: I, II, IIa, IIIa, IIIb, or IV.

The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international standards body

that writes laser safety standards under IEC-60825. Classification schemes are similar and

divided into Classes 1, 1M, 2, 2M, 3B, 3R, and 4. Lasers are classified according to the

accessible emission limits and their potential for causing injury.

Optical fiber telecommunication systems are generally classified as Class I/1, because,

under normal operating conditions, all energized laser transmitting circuit packs are

terminated on optical fibers which enclose the laser energy with the fiber sheath forming

a protective housing. Also, a protective housing/access panel is typically installed in front

of the laser circuit pack shelves. The circuit packs themselves, however, may be

FDA/CDRH Class I, IIIb, or IV or IEC Class 1, 1M, 3B, 3R, or 4. State-of-the-art Raman

and EDFA optical amplifiers have now extended into the Class IV/4 designations.

Laser safety precautions for optical fiber telecommunications systems

In its normal operating mode, an optical fiber telecommunication system is totally

enclosed and presents no risk of eye injury. It is a Class I/1 system under the FDA/CDRH

and IEC classifications.

The fiber optic cables that interconnect various components of an optical fiber

telecommunication system can disconnect or break and may expose people to lightwave

emission. Also, certain measures and maintenance procedures may expose the technician

to emission from the semiconductor laser during installation and servicing. Unlike more

Safety Laser safety

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




1-7

familiar laser devices, such as solid-state and gas lasers, the emission pattern of a

semiconductor laser results in a highly divergent beam. In a divergent beam, the

irradiance (power density) decreases rapidly with distance. The greater the distance, the

less energy will enter the eye and the less potential risk for eye injury. If you inadvertently

view an unterminated fiber or damaged fiber with the unaided eye at distances greater

than 5 to 6 inches, normally, it will not cause eye injury provided that the power in the

fiber is less than a few milliwatts at the near IR wavelengths and a few tens of milliwatts

at the far IR wavelengths. However, damage may occur if you use an optical instrument

such as a microscope, magnifying glass, or eye loupe to stare at the energized fiber end.

Laser Radiation

CAUTION

Laser hazard

Use of controls, adjustments, and procedures other than those specified herein may result

in hazardous laser radiation exposure.

Use controls, adjustments, and procedures specified in this document to avoid hazardous

laser radiation exposure.

Laser safety precautions for enclosed systems

Under normal operating conditions, optical fiber telecommunication systems are

completely enclosed. Observe the following laser safety precautions for enclosed

systems:

• Because of the potential for eye damage, do not stare into optical connectors or

broken fibers.

• Do not under any circumstances perform laser/fiber optic operations before

satisfactorily completing laser safety training.

• Since viewing lightwave emission directly in excess of Class I/1 limits with an optical

instrument such as an eye loupe greatly increases the risk of eye damage,

observe/follow laser safety labels. Appropriate labels must appear in plain view, in

close proximity to the optical port on the protective housing/access panel of the

terminal equipment.

Safety Laser safety

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Laser safety precautions for unenclosed systems

During service, maintenance, or restoration, an optical fiber telecommunication system is

considered unenclosed. Observe the following laser safety precautions for unenclosed

systems:

• Only authorized, trained personnel shall be permitted to do service, maintenance, and

restoration. Avoid exposing the eye to emissions from unterminated, energized optical

connectors at close distances. Laser modules associated with the optical ports of laser

circuit packs are typically recessed, which limits the exposure distance. Optical port

shutters, automatic power reduction (APR), and automatic power shutdown (APSD)

are engineering controls that are also used to limit the emissions. However, do not

stare or look directly into the optical port with optical instruments or magnifying

lenses when removing or replacing laser circuit packs. (Normal eye wear or indirect

viewing instruments, such as a Find-R-Scopes, are not considered magnifying lenses

or optical instruments.)

• Only authorized, trained personnel shall use the optical test equipment during

installation or servicing since this equipment contains semiconductor lasers. (Some

examples of optical test equipment are Optical Time Domain Reflectometers

[OTDRs] and Hand-Held Loss Test Sets.)

• Do not, under any circumstance, scan a fiber with an optical test set without verifying

that all laser sources on the fiber are turned off.

• Only authorized personnel are permitted in the immediate area of the optical fiber

telecommunication systems during installation and service.

For guidance on the safe use of optical fiber optic communication systems in the

workplace, consult ANSI Z136.2, American National Standard for Safe Use of Optical

Fiber Communication Systems Utilizing Laser Diodes and LED Sources in the United

States or outside the United States, IEC-60825, Part 2.

Laser warning labels

The following figure shows the different types of laser warning labels:

Safety Laser safety

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




1-9

Legend

1. Laser symbol

2. Laser classification labels (This label may show only the laser class or both the laser

class and the maximum output power.)

Safety Laser safety

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Electrostatic discharge

Overview

ESD (for example, caused by touching with the hand) can destroy semiconductor

components. The correct operation of the complete system is then no longer assured.

Compliance

The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device complies with ANSI T1.308-1996,

the Central Office Equipment - Electrostatic Discharge Immunity Requirements, 1996.

ESD warning

NOTICE

ESD hazard

ESD can destroy electronic components.

Always keep circuit packs in antistatic covers. Use the original packaging if possible. Use

a static ground wrist strap whenever handling circuit packs or working on the system to

prevent ESD damage to sensitive components.

All semiconductor components are basically sensitive to ESD. The ESD can also affect

the components indirectly.

ESD considerations

This section describes the precautions required to prevent ESD damage.

Circuit pack handling precautions

Industry experience has shown that all integrated circuit packs can be damaged by static

electricity that builds up on work surfaces and personnel. The static charges are produced

by various charging effects of movement and contact with other objects. Dry air allows

greater static charges to accumulate. Higher potentials are measured in areas with low

relative humidity, but potentials high enough to cause damage can occur anywhere.

Observe the following precautions when handling circuit packs/units to prevent ESD

damage.

• Assume all circuit packs contain solid-state electronic components that can be

damaged by ESD.

• When handling circuit packs (for example storing, installing, and removing) or when

working on the backplane, always wear a grounded wrist strap or wear a heel strap

and stand on a grounded, static-dissipating floor mat.

• Wear working garment made of 100% cotton to avoid ESD.

Safety Electrostatic discharge

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




1-11

• Handle all circuit packs by the faceplate or latch and by the top and bottom outermost

edges. Never touch the components, conductors, or connector pins.

• Store and ship circuit packs and components in their shipping packing. Circuit packs

and components must be packed and unpacked only at workplaces suitably protected

against static charge buildup.

• Observe all warning labels on bags and cartons. Whenever possible, do not remove

circuit packs from antistatic packaging until ready to insert them into slots.

• If possible, open all circuit packs at a static-safe work position, using properly

grounded wrist straps and static-dissipating table mats.

• Always store and transport circuit packs in static-safe packaging. Shielding is not

required unless specified.

• Keep all static-generating materials such as food wrappers, plastics, and Styrofoam®

containers away from all circuit packs. When removing circuit packs from a shelf,

immediately place the circuit packs in static-safe packages.

• Whenever possible, maintain relative humidity above 20 percent.

Important! Ensure that any connectors on the shelf interconnection panel that are not

cabled are fitted with a plastic dust cap to provide ESD protection.

Static control wrist straps

To reduce the possibility of ESD damage, the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device shelf is

equipped with an ESD grounding jack to enable personnel to ground themselves using

wrist straps, while handling circuit packs or working on the shelf. Check the wrist straps

periodically with a wrist strap tester to ensure that they are working properly.

Important! The grounding jack is located on the front of the shelf, on the lower-right

corner. Another grounding jack is also located on the rear panel.

Barred-hand symbol

Circuit packs containing components that are especially sensitive to ESD are identified by

warning labels bearing the barred-hand symbol. The following figure shows the

barred-hand symbol.

Safety Electrostatic discharge

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Save these safety instructions

READ AND UNDERSTAND ALL INSTRUCTIONS.

When installing this product, basic safety precautions should always be followed to

reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons, including the following:

1. Follow all instructions provided with this unit.

2. Installation and maintenance procedures must be followed and performed by trained

personnel only.

3. This equipment is intended to be provided with appropriate 15 A (Max) branch circuit

protection on both the A and B -48/-60 V dc input feeds.

4. Opening or removing covers or sheet metal parts may present exposure to high

current or electrical energy levels or to other risks.

5. Use only Alcatel-Lucent manufactured circuit packs designed for use with this

equipment.

6. For information on proper mounting instructions, consult the Alcatel-Lucent 1830

PSS-1 Installation Instructions.

7. This equipment must be provided with a readily accessible disconnect device as part

of the building installation. (Such as a main power disconnect switch or external

circuit breaker).

8. Use only Alcatel-Lucent Power Cable Assembly provided with this equipment when

connecting to -48/-60 A/B V dc power sources.

9. Connect this product only to the type of power source indicated on the marking label.

10. This equipment is to be powered only by Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) or

Telecommunication Network Voltage 2 (TNV2) type sources.

11. Installation must include an independent frame ground drop to the building ground.

Refer to the Installation Instructions.

12. Use caution when installing or modifying telecommunication lines.

13. Never install telecommunication wiring during a lightning storm.

14. Never install telecommunication connections in wet locations.

15. Never touch uninsulated telecommunication wires or terminals unless the

telecommunication line has been disconnected at the interface.

16. Slots and openings in this product are provided for ventilation. To protect it from

overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. This product should not

be placed in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided.

17. Never push objects of any kind into slots or openings in this product as they may

touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or

electrical shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.

18. DANGER: Invisible laser radiation when open and fiber optic cable disconnected.

Avoid Direct Exposure to Beam.

Safety Save these safety instructions

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




1-13

19. CAUTION: This unit has up to two (2) -48/-60 V input power feeders. Disconnecting

less than the maximum will not de-energize the system.

To reduce the risk of injury, disconnect two (2) power feeders when removing power

to the system.

20. NOTICE: Unterminated optical connections may emit laser radiation. Do Not View

With Optical Instruments.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

Certification

The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device meets the following certifications:

• UL Certification UL 1950 / UL 60950

• Canadian Safety Assoc. CSA-22.2-No.25-M90

Safety Save these safety instructions

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2 21830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge

Device

Overview

Purpose

This chapter provides an overview of 1830 Photonic Service Switch 1 MD4H and its

supported features for Release 1.7.

Contents

Introduction 2-2

Hardware design and layout 2-4

Features 2-12

Multiservice muxponder 2-18

Configurations 2-22

Topologies 2-27

CWDM Bidirectional Topology Management 2-30

Protection 2-33

Loopbacks 2-38

Performance Monitoring 2-41

Status Retrieval 2-45

System access 2-46

Synchronization 2-47

Reliability program 2-49

Ordering 2-63

Technical specifications 2-77

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-1

Introduction

1830 PSS-1 Edge Device in Alcatel-Lucent product portfolio

Metropolitan networks are the telecommunications networks connecting residential and

business premises to larger, long-distance core networks. These complex networks serve

to back haul traffic or route traffic locally between different sites. Metro networks

separate into Metro Core networks which are typically rings or meshed networks

providing the service aggregation and interconnection points to the long-haul networks

and Metro Access networks which collect services closer to residential and business

customers.

The 1830 PSS-1 Edge Device platform is designed for installation at the edge of these

metropolitan networks. Multiple versions of this platform are available:

• The 1830 PSS-1 GBEH — a temperature hardened 1 RU Edge Device providing up

to 10 GbE services, or 32 sub-rate EVCs over an 11G optical channel. This product is

described in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBEH Edge Device User Guide.

• The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H — a temperature hardened 1 RU Edge Device supporting two

specially adapted PSS1MD4 OTs, similar to 4DPA4 OTs that can be installed in the

PSS-32, with four multiservice client ports, and two 2.7Gbps line ports on each OT

for sub-ODU1 signals and 2.5G signals, or two 4.5Gbps line ports for 4G FC signals,

on each OT. This product is documented in this document.

• The 1830 PSS-1 MSAH — a temperature hardened 1 RU Edge Device supporting

two specially adapted OTs, a PSS1MD4 and a PSS1P21. The PSS1MD4 is similar to

the 4DPA4 OT that can be installed in the PSS-32, with four multiservice client ports,

and two 2.7Gbps or 4.5Gbps line ports. The PSS1P21 provides 21 E1 client ports and

2 STM-1 line ports. This product is described in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1

MSAH Edge Device User Guide.

• The 1830 PSS-1 AHP — a 1 RU Device supporting a specially adapted high power,

high gain amplifier, similar to the AHPHG that can be installed in the PSS-32. Two of

these devices are installed together and managed as a single NE to create a low cost

ILA node for optical spans connecting 1830 PSS devices. This product is described in

the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 AHP Amplifier User Guide.

PSS-1 MD4H overview

The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H is a 1 RU Edge Device supporting two specially adapted

PSS1MD4 OTs, similar to 4DPA4 OTs that can be installed in the PSS-32. These modules

each accept up to four client signals via SFP optics, and perform non-blocking

multiplexing into one or both of their respective line ports. Each module has dual

pluggable OTU1 line ports that support B & W or CWDM line signals. They support a

variety of sub-ODU1 client signals with extremely flexible transponder mappings.

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Introduction

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




The PSS1MD4 client interfaces have the ability to support Fast Ethernet, Gigabit

Ethernet, OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4, OC48/STM16, FC100, FC200, FC400, SD-SDI,

DVB-ASI, and HD-SDI services up to the capacity of the ODU1 line. The PSS-1 MD4H

supports standard dual fiber transmission and bidirectional transmission over the single

fiber.

Note: Bidirectional transmission requires that an SFC filter (SFC 2/4/8) be used as a

combiner/splitter between the two single-fiber transmit and receive ports of the

PSS1MD4 line interfaces, and the bidirectional single fiber transport medium.

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Introduction

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-3

Hardware design and layout

Purpose

This section provides an overview of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device physical

architecture.

Compliance Standards

The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device complies with the follow regulatory standards for

Environmental, Safety, EMC, ESD, and Hazardous Substances

North America Region:

• Telcordia GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4 “Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical

Safety - Generic Criteria for Network Telecommunications Equipment”

• Telecordia GR-63-CORE, Issue 3 “NEBS Requirements: Physical Protection.

• CSA Certified (US and Canadian) UL 60950-1, Second Edition / CSA C22.2 No.

60950-1-07, Second Edition, “Information Technology Equipment – Safety – Part 1 :

Generic Requirements”

• 21 CFR 1040.10, “Food and Drugs, Radiological Health, Performance Standards for

Light Emitting Products”

• 21 CFR 1040.11, “Food and Drugs, Radiological Health, Specific Purpose Laser

Products”

• FCC Code of Federal Regulations, Title 47 – Telecommunications, Part 15 – “Radio

Frequency Devices”, Class A

• ICES-003, Issue 4 ”Industry Canada Spectrum Management and Telecommunications

Policy, “Interference-Causing Equipment Standard, Digital Apparatus”, Class A

European Market:

• Directive 2004/108/EC, “Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)”

• Directive 2006/95/EC, “Low Voltage Electrical Equipment”

• Directive 93/465/EEC, “CE Marking Directive”

• IEC 60950-1:2005 (2nd Edition) / EN 60950-1:2006 “Information Technology

Equipment – Safety – Part 1 : Generic Requirements”

• EN 60825-1: 2007 “Safety of Laser Products – Part 1: Equipment Classification,

Requirements, and Users Guide”

• EN 60825-2: 2007 “Safety of Laser Products – Part 2: Safety of Optical Fiber

Communication Systems”

• EN 300 386 “Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM);

Telecommunication network equipment; Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

requirements”

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Hardware design and layout

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




• EN 55022: "Information technology equipment - Radio disturbance characteristics -

Limits and methods of measurement". Class A

• ETSI ES 201 468 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM);

Additional Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements for

telecommunications equipment for enhanced availability of service in specific

applications

• EN 300 019 2-1 Environmental Engineering (EE); Environmental Conditions And

Environmental Tests For Telecommunications Equipment; Part 2-1: Specification Of

Environmental Tests; Storage

• EN 300 019 2-2: Equipment Engineering (EE); Environmental Conditions And

Environmental Tests For Telecommunications Equipment - Part 2-2: Specification Of

Environmental Tests; Transportation

• EN 300 019 2-3: Equipment Engineering (EE) - Environmental Conditions And

Environmental Tests For Telecommunications Equipment - Part 2-3: Specification Of

Environmental Tests - Stationary Use At Weather Protected Locations

• ETS 300 753: Equipment Engineering (EE) - Acoustic Noise Emitted By

Telecommunications Equipment

Dimensions

The 1830 PSS-1 shelf (PSS1MD4H), depicted in Figure 2-3, “1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge

Device- Descriptive View” (p. 2-8), weighs 3.0 kg and has the following dimensions

43.5 mm (H) x 443.9 mm (W) x 279.7 mm (D/without cover) or 290 mm (D/with cover).

Note: The complete Shelf Kit (MD4HKIT) weights 3.9 kg.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-5

Figure 2-1 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device showing Dimensions

443.90mm(17.476 in.)443.90mm(17.476 in.)

279.70mm(11.012 in.)

ChassisDepth

279.70mm(11.012 in.)

ChassisDepth

289.50mm(11.398 in.)To Front

Cover

289.50mm(11.398 in.)To Front

Cover

43.50mm(1.713 in.)43.50mm(1.713 in.)

OUT C1 IN OUT C2 IN OUT C3 IN OUT C4 INOUT VA1 IN OUT VA2 INOUT L1 IN OUT L2 IN OUT C1 IN OUT C2 IN OUT C3 IN OUT C4 INOUT VA1 IN OUT VA2 INOUT L1 IN OUT L2 IN


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Figure 2-2 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device with the Cover


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-7

Mechanical design

The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device is 1 RU high and can be mounted in standard

19-inch, 23-inch, or ETSI racks, or wall mounted using available mechanical adapters. It

supports redundant -48 VDC power input filters. It also supports optional, pluggable

CWDM filters, and a pluggable fan unit with management I/O connections.

The basic configuration is shown below.

Figure 2-3 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device- Descriptive View

Figure 2-4 PSS-1 MD4H physical layout


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Layout and Front View of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device

The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device is designed for Metro Access applications, and

based on two PSS1MD4 modules that are similar to 4DPA4 1830 PSS-32 modules

remapped into a CPE format.

The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device supports the following pluggable modules:

• 8 optical client ports for SFPs

• 4 optical line ports for SFPs

• 2 pluggable drawers for CWDM filters

• 2 pluggable Power Filters (PF)

• 1 pluggable Fan Unit & User Panel Module

The power filters, fan unit, SFCs, and filters are pluggable, and can be removed and

replaced. The controller (EC) is integrated into the backplane, and SLC is integrated into

MD4H OT board. They cannot be physically removed. These components are identified

by software as being in numbered slots, as described in “Component slot locations”

(p. 2-10).

Power Filters (PF)

The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H supports redundant Power Filters, with a capacity of 250 Watts

(5.2 Amps @ -48 Vdc). If a single power filter becomes inoperable, the full capacity of

the shelf can be completely supported by the other Power Filter until a replacement is

installed. The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device automatically recognizes equipage of

these modules. Each module supports a fuse and a LED for status.

Fan Unit & User Panel Module

It is comprised of

• a Fan unit with 4 variable speed, independent fans. A single fan failure has no effect

on the transmission capability of the PSS-1. The fan module supports a multicolored

LED for status indication.

• a User Panel residing at the front of the Fan module. There are 4 user interface ports.

The Craft port is an RS232 connection for the local craft. The CIT port is a dedicated

RJ45 to be used by a local craft with a laptop running a web browser (WebUI). The

CIT port is enabled by default, and cannot be disabled. In addition, the CIT port will

support DHCP Server so that, upon connection with the laptop, the laptop will be


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-9

assigned an IP address to communicate with the SPB after the appropriate

authentication process (see “Authentication” (p. 5-20), and “System access”

(p. 2-46)). The LAN1 port can be configured as needed by the user, and can be used to

connect to the management network. It is disabled until user provisioned. The LAN2

port is not supported in this release.

• a rotary switch to set the shelf ID number. Currently, all 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge

Devices are set to the default value (0001). In a future release, multiple 1830 PSS-1

MD4H Edge Devices (up to 8) can be networked to form a single mini-NE from a

management point of view.

Component slot locations

In addition to the physical locations shown in Figure 2-4, “PSS-1 MD4H physical layout”

(p. 2-8), each of the components occupy a logical slot position. The number of this slot

position is used in CLI commands and when alarms indicate problems with a PSS-1

component. The locations of the logical slot numbers is shown in Figure 2-5, “PSS-1

MD4H logical slot numbers” (p. 2-10)

Component Function Required Maximum Slots

PF Power supply 1 (slot 2) 2 2, 3

FAN Fan subsystem 1 1 6

PSS1MD4 4G Dual port Pluggable AnyRate

OT (4 clients)

2 2 7, 8

E-SFC1 1 channel static CWDM filter 0 2 4, 5



E-SFC8 8 channel static CWDM filter 0 1 4

Figure 2-5 PSS-1 MD4H logical slot numbers

GROUND

ESD

PF ASLOT 2

PF BSLOT 3

E-SFCSLOT 4

E-SFCSLOT 5

OTSLOT 7

OTSLOT 8

FANSLOT 6

ECSLOT 1

(BACKPLANE){1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Hardware design and layout

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Carrier class operating environment

The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device is designed to operate in extended temperature

range environments. This supports its installation in outdoor cabinets and similar

deployments.

A pluggable fan module provides cooling for the 1830 PSS-1 Edge Device.

In order for the fan module to provide adequate shelf cooling, the following conditions

must be met:

• The ambient temperature of the facility should be between -25°C and +65°C.

• Humidity:

CO Environment

– 85% long term

– 95% short term

ETSI

– 95% long term

Hardened Environment

– 100% long term

• The facility must provide adequate ventilation for the shelf and remain free of

obstructions that may affect fan efficiency. Cooling air for the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H

Edge Device is drawn in on the right side and exhausted on the left, therefore the

sides of the unit should be free of obstructions.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-11

Features

Introduction

The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device can be deployed as a standalone system or in

conjunction with the 1830 PSS-32. Each OT in the PSS-1 MD4H supports linear and

single channel ring configurations for transport and add/drop of multiservice connections

for protected or unprotected services.

Note: On a given PSS1MD4 OT, it is intended that all services are protected, or all

services are unprotected

Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 32/16 (PSS-32/PSS-16) Release

3.0.0 Product Information and Planning Guide for complete information about the 1830

PSS-32.

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Features

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device provides an optimized multiservice

platform that includes the following features.

• 1 Rack Unit, mounts in 19”( EIA), 23”(WECO), or ETSI Frames.

• Two integrated PSS1MD4 OTs, each containing:

– 4xAnyRate (100 Mbps - 4.5 Gbps ) client ports (SFPs)

– Two line ports (B & W, CWDM) (OTU1 or overclocked OTU1) with Full

Compliance to G.709 Bit rate, Fault Processing and Signal Monitoring

– Mapping for FC400 (4.25 Gbps) directly to overclocked ODU1/OTU1

• OTU-1 Line to line Regeneration

• Flexible services & configurations

Each OT supports:

– Dual bit-rate transparent transponder (1:1+1:1)

– Dual 2xAny combiner (2:1+2:1)

– Single 4xAny combiner into OTU-1 (4:1)

– Flexible muxing (1:1+3:1, 1:1+2:1)

• CWDM filter drawer for 1 channel, 2 channels, 4 channels and 8 channels

• Single fiber bidirectional transmission

• 1+1 Electrical-SNCP protection option (< 50 ms)

• In-band management through GCC

• Digital Performance Monitoring

– Client side: 8B/10B CV, SONET, Ethernet, PCS, SDH

– Line side: ODU/OTU1 Path Monitoring

• Redundant hot-pluggable DC power modules (1+1)


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




• Pluggable Fan Unit & User Panel

• Temperature hardened unit and CWDMs for installation in non-temperature

controlled environments.

Application

The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device is a next generation high density multiservice

muxponder with two OTs, each of which support up to four client SFPs and two OTU1

(2.7G) line ports. Each 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device also has two slots reserved for

CWDM filter packs. The line ports use SFP modules to support single channel (B & W)

or CWDM transmission (up to 8 channels). The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device can be

deployed in Metro Access nodes or customer premises for multiservice back hauling.

The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device is suitable for installation in the following facilities:

• Network telecommunication facilities

• Locations where National Electric Code (NEC) is applicable

• Outdoor cabinets and other locations where extended temperatures are a factor.

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device as standalone system

As a standalone system, one or more 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Devices can be configured

to function as the Gateway NE (GNE) for management access of the network.

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device with 1830 PSS-32/16

When used in conjunction with 1830 PSS-32/16, management access to the 1830 PSS-1

MD4H Edge Device is realized by extending the GCC on the optical transponder (OT)

residing on the 1830 PSS-32/16.

Optical interfaces

The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device supports both B & W SFPs for single-channel

applications and CWDM SFPs for multiple channel applications (up to 8 channels).

Wavelength frequencies

Table below lists the center wavelength frequencies for the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge

Device with 8-channel CWDM.

Channel AID & Port Label Wavelength (nm)

1471 1471

1491 1491

1511 1511

1531 1531


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-13

Channel AID & Port Label Wavelength (nm)

1551 1551

1571 1571

1591 1591

1611 1611

CWDM filter modules

The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device supports wavelength division multiplexing (WDM)

as listed below. E-SFCx is an optional CWDM static filter that can be installed in the

PSS-1 MD4H when more than one wavelength is carried over the fiber pair.

• Eight variants of 1-channel E-SFC1

• Four variants of 2-channel E-SFC2

• Two variants of 4-channel E-SFC4

• One variant of 8-channel E-SFC8

SFPs

The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device supports the following SFPs:

Table 2-1 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device SFPs supported

Module

description

Standards

reference (reach

description)

Mnemonic Supported signal

type

B & W STM-1/OC-3 L-1.1/LR-1 SL-1.1 OC3/STM1

B & W STM-1/OC-3 S-1.1/IR-1 S-1.1 OC3/STM1

B & W STM-1/OC-3 L-1.2/LR-2 L-1.2 OC3/STM1

B & W

STM-4/OC-12

L-4.1/LR-1/40km SL-4.1 OC12/STM4

B & W

STM-4/OC-12

S-4.1/IR-1 /15 km S-4.1 OC12/STM4

ALU SFP L-4.2

-40/+85

L4.2,SM,80 km SL-4.2 OC12/STM4

B & W

STM-16/OC-48/

OTU-1

L-16.1/LR-1 SL-16.1 OC48/STM16,

CBR2G5, OTU1


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Table 2-1 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device SFPs supported (continued)

Module

description

Standards

reference (reach

description)


type

B & W

STM-16/OC-48/

OTU-1

L-16.2/LR-2 SL-16.2 OC48/STM16,

CBR2G5, OTU1

B & W

STM-16/OC-48/

OUT-1

I-16.1/SR-1 SI-16.1 OC48/STM16,

CBR2G5, OTU1

B & W

STM-16/OC-48

multirate Q2.7 Gbps

S-16.1/IR-1 SS-16.1A OC3/STM1,

OC12/STM4,

OC48/STM16,

CBR2G5, OTU1,

1GBE, FC100,

FC200, HDSI,

SD-SDI, DVB-ASI

CWDM 2G5 MR Multirate ≤ 2.7 Gbps

(40 km)

SS-16.2C OC3/STM1,

OC12/STM4,

OC48/STM16,

CBR2G5, OTU1,

1GBE, SD-SDI,

DVB-ASI, HDSI

Fast Ethernet SFP 100BASE-LX10 100B-LX10 FE

Fast Ethernet SFP 100BASE-BX

(downstream - 40km)

FE-BX40D FE

Fast Ethernet SFP 100BASE-BX

(upstream - 40km)

FE-BX40U FE

Electrical FE

SFP FE/FDDI

100BASE-T EL

W/Ext Temp

SFEBTEE 100BASE-T FE

B & W GbE 1000BASE-SX 1000B-SX 1GBE

B & W GbE 1000BASE-ZX 1000B-ZX 1GBE

B & W GbE 1000BASE-LX 1000B-LX 1GBE

B & W GbE 1000BASE-BX

(downstream - 40km)

GE-BX40D 1GBE/STM-4


(upstream 40km)

GE-BX40U 1GBE/STM-4


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-15

Table 2-1 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device SFPs supported (continued)

Module

description

Standards

reference (reach

description)


type


(downstream - 20km)

GE-BX20D 1GBE/STM-4


(upstream - 20km)

GE-BX20U 1GBE/STM-4

Electrical GbE 1000BASE-T 1000B-T 1GBE

B & W 4G FC LC-L 4FCLC-L FC100, FC200.

FC400

B & W 4G FC SN-I 4FCSN-I FC100, FC200.

FC400

CWDM Multirate ≤ 2.7 Gbps

(80 km)

SL-16.2C OC3/STM1,

OC12/STM4,

OC48/STM16,

CBR2G5, OTU1,

1GBE, SD-SDI,

DVB-ASI, HDSI

Extended Temperature Range (ETR) capability

The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device includes the following features to support operation

in an ETR environment, where temperatures can range from -25° C to +65° C:

• A hardened chassis

• Hardened cards

• A variable-speed fan unit

• Hardened SFP pluggables

Note: Hardware installed in an ETR environment must be ETR capable. Operation of

non-ETR capable cards or SFPs in an ETR environment can result in hardware

damage.

Identifying extended temperature range cards

Integrated OT cards in PSS-1 units are ETR qualified depending on whether or not the

equipment controller within the unit is ETR qualified.

Replaceable ETR-capable cards are labeled as “ETR” on the bottom cover. Non-hardened

PSS-1 cards and pluggables will be automatically alarmed by software if detected in a

chassis which is provisioned for ETR operation. Software will display an ETR indicator


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




in inventory data, regardless of whether the node is provisioned for ETR operation. In

addition, non-ETR components are physically “keyed” so that they cannot be installed in

a PSS-1 MD4H chassis.

The temperature range of cards can also be determined from the remote inventory data of

removable cards and the EC by performing a "show card inventory" command. If "ETR"

characters are present in bytes 6-8 of customer inventory field, the card is ETR qualified.

Otherwise it is not ETR qualified. Software will display an ETR indicator in inventory

data, regardless of whether the node is provisioned for ETR operation.

Identifying extended temperature range SFPs

SFPs that support ETR operation are identified during ordering. After installation, retrieve

remote inventory data for the OT ports by performing a "show interface inventory"

command. If "ETR" characters are present in bytes 6-8 of customer inventory field, the

SFP is ETR qualified. Otherwise it is not ETR qualified.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-17

Multiservice muxponder

Purpose

The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device can serve as a muxponder for a variety of

sub-ODU1 client signals with extremely flexible transponder mappings.

Line ports

The PSS1MD4 ODU1 line ports must be manually provisioned. Each OTU1 is divided

into 16 proprietary time slots. Signals from the client ports can be assigned to time slots

according to their bandwidth requirements by the operator.

Note: In R1.0, pluggable line port OTs only support 44 even channels. The SFPs

supported on 4DPA4 line ports in R1.0 are not wavelength locked, therefore traffic

from the pluggable OTs may only traverse 100 GHz systems, unless muxed with a

tunable OT (11STMM10).

The Operational Mode of OTU-1 line ports on each PSS1MD4 can be provisioned as

ADD/DROP or CROSSREGEN, as described in “Line port utilization” (p. 2-18).

Line port utilization

The Operational Mode of OTU-1 line ports on each PSS1MD4 can be provisioned as

ADD/DROP or CROSSREGEN (see Figure 2-6, “Add/Drop operational mode”

(p. 2-18) and Figure 2-7, “CROSSREGEN operational mode” (p. 2-19)).

Figure 2-6 Add/Drop operational mode

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Multiservice muxponder

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Client ports

The client ports must be manually configured. They remain in the unassigned state until

the user assigns a specific client signal type. Each line port ODU1 is divided into 16

logical time slots. Signals from the client ports can be assigned by the operator, to time

slots according to their bandwidth requirements. The types of client signals supported in

this release, their operating bit rate, and the number of time slots required for each signal

are shown in Table 2-2, “Client signal time slot requirements” (p. 2-19).

Client port mapping

Each line port ODU1 is divided into 16 logical time slots. Signals from the client ports

can be assigned by the operator, to time slots according to their bandwidth requirements.

The types of client signals supported in this release, their operating bit rate, and the

number of time slots required for each signal are shown in Table 2-2, “Client signal time

slot requirements” (p. 2-19).

Table 2-2 Client signal time slot requirements

Signal Operating bit rate Required OTU-1 time

slots

OC3/STM1 155.52 Mbps 1

OC12/STM4 622.08 Mbps 4

Figure 2-7 CROSSREGEN operational mode


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-19

Table 2-2 Client signal time slot requirements (continued)

Signal Operating bit rate Required OTU-1 time

slots

OC48/STM16 2.488 Gbps Full ODU1/OTU-1

(An STM16 client port must

be associated with either Line

port 1 or Line port 2 when

provisioning time slots.)

1GbE 1.25 Gbps 8

FE (100M Fast Ethernet) 125 Mbps 1

FC100 (1.0625G) 1.0625 Gbps 7

FC200 (2.125G) 2.125 Gbps 14

FC400 (4.25G) 4.25 Gbps Mapped directly to

overclocked ODU1/OTU1

without timeslots

HDSDI (1.485G, HD-SDI

HDTV)

1.485 Gbps 10

Any of the four client ports on each OT can be mapped to either of the two lines,

bandwidth permitting. As a result, flexible client-to-line configurations such as the

following are possible.

• 1:1 + 1:1 — dual transponders

• 1:1 + 2:1 — transponder on one line, mux on other line

• 1:1 + 3:1 — transponder on one line, mux on other line

• 2:1 + 2:1 — dual mux

• 4:1 — all clients muxed onto one line

Examples of some of these configurations are shown in the following figure. All

connections are bidirectional


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Figure 2-8 PSS1MD4 Client signal mapping examples


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-21

Configurations

Dual fiber configurations

The OTs in the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device support common standard dual fiber

connections with each fiber transmitting data in just one direction.

Line Terminals (Degree 1)

The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device can be configured as a terminal node. The node can

be configured with a B & W SFPs on the OTs (for a single terminating wavelength), or

one of the following filters: SFC2, SFC4, SFC8.

CWDM bus node

The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device supports an asymmetrical degree 2 configuration

for CWDM bus architecture, which has an SFC’s OMD port facing one line side and its

EXP port facing another line side. One of the following SFCs can be used to support this

configuration: (E)SFC-4, (E)SFC-2, or (E)SFC-1.

Figure 2-9 4 channel terminal node

GROUND

ESD

PF PF SFC4 BLANK

OT OT LAN1

LAN2

GROUND

ESD

PF PF BLANK

OT OT LAN1

LAN2

NE1

NE2BLANK

Figure 2-10 CWDM bus node

SFCOMD

EXP

CH

CH

CH

CH

OT shelf

OT shelf

OT

External node

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Configurations

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Single fiber bidirectional configurations

Generally, the bidirectional optical transmission requires two fibers. However, there are

also applications calling for bidirectional transmission over a single fiber. The PSS1MD4

OTs within the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device can to support such an application.

Bidirectional transmission requires that an SFC filter (SFC 2/4/8) be used as a

combiner/splitter between the two single-fiber transmit and receive ports of the

PSS1MD4 line interfaces, and the bidirectional single fiber transport medium.

Bidirectional single fiber transmission uses different CWDM wavelengths in each

direction.

This is accomplished by connecting the transmit and receive sides of line port on the OT

to two different wavelengths supported by the filter. The transmit and receive fibers are

connected to the IN ports of the different wavelengths on the filter. The wavelengths can

pass between the IN ports (the MUX side) of the filter and the OMD OUT port in both the

receive and transmit directions. So, a single fiber, connected to the OMD OUT port of the

filter, carries signals in both directions on their assigned wavelengths.

Bidirectional 1-degree OADM

The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device supports the single-fiber bidirectional transmission

with a terminal node (1-degree OADM) configuration, where a single CWDM filter is

used.

The supported SFC types are:

• (E)SFC-2A, (E)SFC-2B, (E)SFC-2C, (E)SFC-2D

• E)SFC-4A, (E)SFC-4B

• (E)SFC8

The table below lists the requirements on the configuration of CWDM filters:

SFC Filter type Maximum Capacity

(bidirectional

transmission)

SFC Ports

connecting to OT

ports

SFC port

connecting to the

transmission fiber

ESFC-1 1 / per SFC filter Channel in/ EXP in OMD out

Channel out/EXP out OMD in

ESFC-2 1 /per SFC filter Channel in ports OMD out

Channel out ports OMD in

ESFC-4 2 /per SFC filter Channel in or out

ports

OMD out


ESFC-8 4 /per SFC filter Channel in ports OMD out



....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-23

The arrangement of fiber connections for these bidirectional configurations are shown in

the following illustrations.

Figure 2-11 (E)SFC-2A bidirectional fiber connections

RXTXOT

(E)SFC-2A

1471_in

1471_out

1491_

1491_

OMD_out

OMD_in

EXP_in

EXP_out

MDX

in

out

Figure 2-12 (E)SFC-4A bidirectional fiber connections

RXTX

OT

(E)SFC-4A

1471_i

1471_out

1491_i

1491_ou

OMD_out

OMD_in

EXP_in

EXP_out

RXTXOT

1511_i

1531_i

1511_ou

1531_out

MDX


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Bidirectional 2-Degree OADM (Symmetrical)

The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device supports a single-fiber bidirectional transmission

2-degree OADM configuration, where two identical CWDM filters are used. ESFC2 and

ESFC4 filters are supported in this configuration. Band pass-through and channel loop

connections are allowed in this node.

Figure 2-13 (E)SFC-8 bidirectional fiber connections

RXTX

OT

(E)SFC-8

OMD_out

OMD_in

RXTX

MUX

MUX

1471_in

1491_in

1511_in

1531_in

1471_out

1491_out

1551_out

1511_out

1531_out

1571_out

1591_out

1611_outOT

RXTX

OT

(E)SFC-8

OMD_out

OMD_in

RXTX

MUX

MDX

1471_in

1491_in

1511_in

1531_in

1471_in

1491_in

1511_in

1531_in

1471_out

1491_out

1551_out

1511_out

1531_out

1571_out

1591_out

1611_out

1471_out

1491_out

1551_out

1511_out

1531_out

1571_out

1591_out

1611_outOT

1551_in

1571_in

1591_in

1611_in


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-25

Single Fiber CWDM-DWDM regeneration

The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device supports single-fiber CWDM bidirectional

transmission with CWDM-DWDM regeneration, where regeneration OTs are equipped.

SFC2, SFC4 and SFC8 filters. An example CWDM single-fiber configuration for a

DWDM/CWDM mediating OT is shown below.

Figure 2-14 PSS-1 bidirectional 2-degree OADM

RXTX

SFC-4A1_in

2_in

OMD_out

OMD_in

EXP_in

EXP_out

RXTX

OT

SFC-4A

OMD_out

OMD_in

EXP_out

EXP_in

3_in4_in

3_in

4_in

SFC#2SFC#1

ADD/DROP

Band passthrough

loop

RXTXRXTX

1_in

2_in

Figure 2-15 Single Fiber CWDM-DWDM regeneration

RX

TX

SFC-41_in

2_in

OMD_out

OMD_in

EXP_in

EXP_out

OT

3_in

4_in

SFC#2

RX

TX

CWDMDWDM

ClientLine

PSS-32


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Topologies

Purpose

This section provides an overview of the network topologies that can be configured for

the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device.

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device linear networks

One typical 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device topology is a linear standalone network.

These linear topologies are supported with either a single OTU-1 channel (2.7 Gb

capacity), using on one OT in the MD4H. Or, eight OTU-1 channels can be supported

with CWDM (up to 21.6 Gb capacity), using both OTs in four PSS-1 MD4H shelves, and

a CWDM filter in one of the shelves, as shown below.

Bidirectional topologies

Linear network topology is supported for single fiber transmission with, or without,

intermediate 2-degree OADMs.

Figure 2-16 Single channel point-to-point (OTU-1 capacity)

PSS-1MD4H

PSS-1MD4H

Terminal Terminal

SFP

Single channel

SFP

Figure 2-17 CWDM point-to-point (up to 21.6Gb capacity with 8 OTU-1 channels)

PSS-1MD4H

PSS-1MD4H

Terminal Terminal

PSS-1MD4H

SFP

PSS-1MD4H

SFP

PSS-1MD4H

SFP

PSS-1MD4H

SFP

PSS-1MD4H

SFP

PSS-1MD4H

SFP

SFP SFP

CWDM

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Topologies

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-27

Mixed 1830 PSS-32 and 1830 PSS 1 network configurations

The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device can be directly connected to a Service Card in a

1830 PSS-32 node, providing a very cost-effective way to use Metro Core

interconnection to a distant PSS1MD4, either in an 1830 PSS-32 NE, or as a component

of an 1830 PSS-1 MD4H. Both linear and ring topologies of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge

Device can be interconnected to a 1830 PSS-32 node, over a single channel or using

CWDM. 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Release 1.7 supports the direct interconnection

between 1830 PSS-1 MD4H and 1830 PSS-32 via a 11STMM10 or 4DPA4 cards in 1830

PSS-32. The 11STMM10 card serves as a mediating card, providing the B & W/CWDM

to DWDM conversion between Metro Access and Metro Core.

Figure 2-19, “Single channel Metro Access ring sub-tending a DWDM Metro Core

network for multiservice back hauling.” (p. 2-29) shows the case of a single channel

Metro Access ring made up of three 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Devices and sub-tending a

Metro Core DWDM ring. Services are collected in the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device

over a single OTU-1 channel which is forwarded by the 11STMM10 cards in the 1830

PSS-32 node D to the 11STGE12 card in the 1830 PSS-32 node E, where the services are

terminated on the PSS1MD4. Figure 2-19, “Single channel Metro Access ring

sub-tending a DWDM Metro Core network for multiservice back hauling.” (p. 2-29) This

shows a case of diversely routed services, achieved through the redundant 11STMM10

cards in node D. The 11STMM10 cards in the 1830 PSS-32 node D and E support B & W

(1310 nm) XFPs on the client side and DWDM tunable optics on the line.

Figure 2-18 Bidirectional single fiber linear nodes

BidirectionalTerminal




Degree-2OADM node

Bidirectional single fiber CWDM transmission

Bidirectional single fiber CWDM transmission

SFP SFP

SFP SFP SFP SFP


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Figure 2-19 Single channel Metro Access ring sub-tending a DWDM Metro Core

network for multiservice back hauling.

PSS-1 PSS-1

PSS-1

PSS-32

PSS-32

11S

TG

BE

12

...

11S

TG

BE

12

...

11S

TM

M10

XFP

11S

TM

M10

XFP

SFP SFP SFP SFP

SFP SFP

PSS-32

Node A

Single channel ring(2.7Gb capacitiy)

Node BOTU-1

(working)

Node C

DWDMNetwork

PSS-32

PSS-32 PSS-32

PSS-1

PSS-1

PSS-1

Node ENode D

Node F

Node E

Node D Node F

Node A

Node C

Node BMultiserviceup to 2.7 Gb(each routed

diversely)

Multiserviceup to 2.7 Gb(each routed

diversely)

Multiserviceup to 2.7 Gb(each routed

diversely)

Physical topologyLogical topology

(solid lines)

OTU-1(protection)


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-29

CWDM Bidirectional Topology Management

Overview

A single fiber bidirectional link on the optical port is provisioned by specifying the port

connection attributes and the SFC card connection mode.

The SFC card connection mode has the following values:

• two-fiber mode (1): normal connection mode for bidirectional transmission

• one-fiber Mux mode (2): Only OMD OUT, EXP IN, CH IN are used for fiber

connection

Note: The default value of tnCardConnMode is two-fiber mode.

The following information provides examples of the topology associated with different

types of single-fiber bidirectional nodes.

Bidirectional CWDM OADM node

For a single-fiber bidirectional CWDM OADM node, the optical topology connections

within the node shall be provisioned as shown in the following table.

Connection

type

Local port End port End port type Start port Start port

type

ADD/DROP OT L1 SFC#1 CH2 Internal SFC#1 CH1 Internal

SFC#1 CH1 OT L1 Internal - Not Connected

SFC#1 CH2 - Not Connected OT L1 Internal

Loop SFC#1 CH3 - Not Connected SFC#2 CH3 Internal

SFC#2 CH3 SFC#1 CH3 Internal - Not Connected

SFC#1 CH4 - Not Connected SFC#2 CH4 Internal

SFC#2 CH4 SFC#1 CH4 Internal - Not Connected

Band

Pass-Through

SFC#1 EXP SFC#2 EXP Internal SFC#2 EXP Internal

SFC#2 EXP SFC#1 EXP Internal SFC#1 EXP Internal

SFC Card

Connection

Mode=OneFiberM

UX

In the above provision example the OT port is provisioned with two unidirectional

connections, the SFC CH port is provisioned with one unidirectional connection, and the

SFC EXP port is provisioned with a bidirectional connection.

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device CWDM Bidirectional Topology Management

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Bidirectional OADM

In a single-fiber bidirectional OADM node, the external optical topology connections can

be provisioned as shown in the following table.

Connection

type


type

External

ADD/DROP

OT L1 string #1 external string #2 external

SFC#1 CH1 string #3 external - Not Connected

SFC#1 CH2 - Not Connected string #4 external

OMD line SFC#1 OMD string external string external

SFC#2 EXP string external string external

SFC Card

Connection

Mode=OneFiberM

UX

In the above example the OT port is provisioned with two unidirectional connections, the

SFC CH port is provisioned with a unidirectional connection, and the SFC OMD port is

provisioned with a bidirectional external connection.

Bidirectional node for CWDM-DWDM regeneration

In a single-fiber bidirectional CWDM OADM node for CWDM-DWDM regeneration,

the optical topology connections within the node can be provisioned as shown in the

following table.

Connection

type


type

Client

ADD/DROP

OT C1 SFC#1 CH1 Internal SFC#1 CH2 Internal

SFC#1 CH1 OT C1 external - Not Connected

SFC#2 CH2 - Not Connected OT C1 Internal

SFC Card

Connection

Mode=OneFiberM

UX

In the above example the OT client port is provisioned with two unidirectional

connections and the SFC CH port is provisioned with a unidirectional connection.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-31

Single-fiber bidirectional service model

A complete single-fiber bidirectional service consists of two unidirectional optical

channel (OCH) cross-connections (XCs) in an OADM node. The OCH XCs within the

node are modeled as shown in the following table.

XC type A-END Z-END Direction

ADD OT Line SFC OMD Unidirectional

DROP SFC OMD OT Line Unidirectional

External ADD SFC CH SFC OMD Unidirectional

External DROP SFC OMD SFC CH Unidirectional

Loop (A-->Z) SFC#1 OMD SFC#2 OMD Unidirectional

Loop (Z-->A) SFC#2 OMD SFC#1 OMD Unidirectional

Band Pass- Through

(A-->Z)

SFC#1 OMD SFC#2 OMD Unidirectional

Band Pass- Through

(Z-->A)

SFC#2 OMD SFC#1 OMD Unidirectional

Note: Within an NE, the topology link between the EXP ports of two SFC ports, and

between the CH ports of two SFC ports, can be provisioned only when the two SFCs

are in the same connection mode.

Note: An SFC card in single-fiber connection mode will only allow a unidirectional

cross-connect. Attempts to provision a bidirectional cross-connect on an SFC that is

set to single-fiber-mode will be rejected.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Protection

Overview

The OTs in the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device support Electrical sub-block network

connection protection (E-SNCP). This is a line side (network side) protection mechanism

which protects against loss of the line signal due to SFP failure, fiber interruption, or a

malfunction of an intermediate NE node, as shown in the following example.

Figure 2-20 Unprotected and Protected E-SNCP example (1 of 2)

4xMultiservice (2.7Gb total)

1 2 3 4

(Unprotected)

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Protection

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-33

All clients on a PSS-1 MD4H OT must either be protected or unprotected. A mix of

protected and unprotected clients on the same unit is not currently supported. These two

options are shown in Figure 2-20, “Unprotected and Protected E-SNCP example”

(p. 2-34). If there is any problem (fiber cut or otherwise) associated with the left SFP, then

the traffic from client 1 and client 3 will be impacted in the unprotected example. In the

protected example, no client will be impacted by this problem.

If... then...

protected the client signal will be sent to both SFPs and carried out the diverse

fibers.

unprotected the client signal will be routed to only one SFP.

Note: The near-end working and protection line ports must be connected to the

far-end working and protection line ports. This is the responsibility of the individual

configuring the network. There is no software verification.

E-SNCP

E-SNCP protection is implemented by permanent head-end bridging and dynamic tail-end

selection. This is illustrated in Figure 2-21, “E-SNCP on PSS1MD4 OT” (p. 2-35). The

E-SNCP function is contained within each PSS1MD4 OT. Each client port (plus the two

line ports) form an independent protection group. The bridging is performed at the ODU1

level. As a result, all client ports assigned to the working line are bridged simultaneously

to the protection line.

Figure 2-20 Unprotected and Protected E-SNCP example (2 of 2)

4xMultiservice (2.7Gb total)

1 2 3 4

(Protected)


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




In the incoming direction, the OT receives two OTU1 line signals (working and

protection). After FEC error correction and OTU1/ODU1 overhead termination

respectively, client traffic is extracted independently from the two line signals according

to the OPTS mapping structure determined for the outgoing direction. Then, depending

on the external switch commands for individual protection groups, or signal quality, the

traffic for each client port is selected independently from the working or protection line

port.

Note: Currently the PSS1MD4 OTs in the PSS-1 MD4H do not support OPS or

Y-cable protection.

Protection groups

Up to four protection groups can be created on each OT, one for each client port on that

OT. Each protection group on the OT consists of at least one client port, the working line

port, and protection line port. Switching, both automatic and by user command, is on a

per-group basis. Each protection group operates independently of the others.

Figure 2-21 E-SNCP on PSS1MD4 OT

1830

Sub-network

SFP

SFP

SFP

SFP

SFP

SFP

SFP

SFP

SFP

SFP

SFP

SFP

client clientline line

Working path

Protection path

client line

ODU1

4DPA44DPA4

GbE,

FC etc

GbE,FC etc

GbE,

FC etc

OTU1OTU1

OTU1

Note: on-board line side WT

encoder/eVOA not plotted for

simplicity.

4DPA4

PSS-1 MD4H PSS-1 MD4H or PSS-32


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-35

On each PSS1MD4 OT, all services must be protected, or unprotected. A combination of

protected and unprotected services on the same OT is not supported.

If there are client port time slot assignments to only one line port, then all protection

groups must specify this line port as the working line. Otherwise, creation of the

protection group will be denied.

Because bridging is at the ODU1 level, at least one line port must be in the IDLE state

with no client port time slot assignments, before starting the creation of protection group.

Otherwise, creation of protection group will be denied.

Client port assignment

Time slot assignments are only provisioned and retrieved against individual client ports,

and a client port can have time slot assignments to only one line.

Line port assignment

If both line ports are in the IDLE state with no client port time slot assignments, the user

is free to specify either line port as the working port and the other line port as the

protection port for the first protection group. All subsequent protection groups must

follow the working/protection designation by the first group.

Protection group assignment

On the PSS1MD4 OT, you can configure a protection group if the client port and both

line ports are not involved in time slot assignments. That means time slot assignment

between the client port and line port (OPTS mapping) is independent creation of the

protection group. Time slots can be assigned before protection groups are created, or

protection groups can be created before time slots are assigned, either order is supported.

For a client port involved in a protection group but with no time slot assigned, the

protection state machine still runs normally for the protection group to which the client

port belongs.

If a working line has been specified (by creation of a protection group on any client port),

then all subsequent time slot assignments for all client ports are allowed to be made only

to the working line port.

For a client port which has time slot assignment and is currently in a protection group, the

related client signal type and allocated time slots are reported in the near end time slot

map (NETSMAP) on both the working and protection lines.

For a client port which has time slot assignment but is not currently in a protection group,

the related client signal type and allocated time slots are reported in the near end time slot

map (NETSMAP) on the working line only (the line to which the client time slots are

actually assigned).


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Switching

The total outage from a protected Signal Fail (SF) condition is less than, or equal to, 60

ms. This 60 ms is the sum of:

• 10 ms switch initiation time — The time it takes from occurrence of the failure to

detection and initiation of the switch.

• 50 ms switch completion time — The time it takes to perform the switch and to

recover transmission.

Note: Total outage may be greater than 50ms when there is an OTU1/ODU1 TTI

Mismatch defect, or ODU1 payload Type mismatch, as those defects usually require

more time to initiate a protection switch.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-37

Loopbacks

Purpose

This section contains the detailed requirements for LOOPBACKS for the 1830 PSS-1

MD4H Edge Device.

Loopbacks are typically used in a process of installation, system maintenance and

troubleshooting. The basic idea is to allow the user to test the circuit or isolate the failure

by connecting the test equipment to the system interface and creating the loopbacks at

different points in the transmission path. In the process of troubleshooting isolating

segments of the transmission path and associating the addition/removal of a monitored

segment with presence of a failure.

The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device will support the following types of loopbacks

consistent with GR-253-CORE.

• Facility loopback (GR-253-CORE (2005) section 6.2.3.3.3)

The facility loopback is applied at an interface to loop the signal back toward the

facility. (See Figure 2-22, “Loopback access points” (p. 2-40).)

• Terminal loopback (GR-253-CORE (2005) section 6.2.3.2.1)

The terminal loopback is applied at an interface to loop the signal back toward the

terminal hardware (back into the NE). (See Figure 2-22, “Loopback access points”

(p. 2-40).)

Performing loopbacks

Performing loopbacks is service affecting. You must take the facility out of service before

performing a loopback test.

The loopback operation is persistent in the NE. It will survive system restart and

in-service upgrade. During system restart the looped signal may be temporarily

interrupted. After the completion of a restart, the loopback which existed prior to the

restart will be restored.

A port under loopback operation cannot be provisioned to the In-Service state.

Facilities cannot be deleted while a loopback is still active. And, only one loopback

(facility or terminal) is allowed to be active on a facility at a time.

The OTs in the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device can support the following loopbacks.

Table 2-3 Supported loopbacks

Client interfaces (C{1-4}) Line interfaces (L1, L2)

OC-N FACILITY loopback (N=3, 12, 48) OTU1 FACILITY loopback

STM-N FACILITY loopback (N=1, 4, 16) OTU1 TERMINAL loopback

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Loopbacks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Table 2-3 Supported loopbacks (continued)

Client interfaces (C{1-4}) Line interfaces (L1, L2)

1GBE FACILITY loopback

FE FACILITY loopback

FC100/FICON FACILITY loopback

FC200/FICON_EXPRESS/ISC3 FACILITY

loopback

FC400/FICON FACILITY loopback

HDSDI FACILITY loopback

OC-N TERMINAL loopback (N=3, 12, 48)

STM-N TERMINAL loopback (N=1, 4, 16)

1GBE TERMINAL loopback

FE TERMINAL loopback

FC100/FICON TERMINAL loopback

FC200/FICON_EXPRESS/ISC3 TERMINAL

loopback

FC400/FICON TERMINAL loopback

HDSDI TERMINAL loopback

Note: Loopbacks may experience packet loss during a warm or cold reset of the unit.

Loopback access points

The following illustration illustrates the loopbacks supported on the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H

Edge Device OTs configured for bidirectional service.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-39

Figure 2-22 Loopback access points

OTmodule

OE

O

OE

O

ClientPort Port

OTmodule

OE

O

OE

O

ClientPort Port

OTmodule

OE

O

OE

O

ClientPort Port

OTmodule

OE

O

OE

O

ClientPort

C/DWDMPort

LosProp=LPBK LosProp=LPBK

Client FacilityLoopback

DWDM PortTerminal Loopback

Client TerminalLoopback

DWDM Port FacilityLoopback

aLaserOFFAAIS

(or aLaserOFFif LOSPROP=LASEROFF)

C/DWDMC/DWDM

C/DWDM


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Performance Monitoring

Purpose

Performance monitoring (PM) refers to the in-service, non-intrusive monitoring of

transmission quality and equipment health. The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device tracks

the signal quality and equipment health through continuous collection and analysis of

performance data. The user can retrieve current and past values of the system to get an

overview of the health of the system. The performance monitoring capability exists for

optical lines, channels, and equipment monitoring. Users have the ability to provision

threshold parameters to levels that might be indicative of impending performance

degradation. Responding to a performance degradation before there is a failure and

system alarms are raised is termed proactive maintenance. Responding to system alarms

is termed reactive maintenance. Crossing of a performance parameter threshold indicates

a potential network quality or performance degradation while the services being

transported have not been impacted. If a condition continues to deteriorate, then alarms

are raised and immediate attention may be required to resolve or repair the problem.

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Performance Monitoring

The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device supports performance monitoring both on the client

ports and on the OTU1 line side ports.

Optical Performance Monitoring

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device supports optical performance monitoring related to

received and transmitted optical power for both the optical client ports and the OTU1 line

side ports.

OTN Line Performance Monitoring supports a wide variety of client signals (including

sub-ODU1 signals, 2.5G signals, and 4.5G FC400 signal)

The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device deliver G.709-framed sub-ODU1, 2.5G, and 4.25G

FC400 signals, and the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H monitors the following section and path

performance parameters accordingly:

Table 2-4 OTN Performance Monitoring

PM Parameter Section Path

Errored Seconds (ES) yes yes

Severely Errored Seconds (SES) yes yes

Unavailable Seconds (UAS) yes yes

Background Block Errors (BBE) yes yes

FEC: corrected bits yes yes

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Performance Monitoring

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-41

Table 2-4 OTN Performance Monitoring (continued)

PM Parameter Section Path

FEC: uncorrected bytes yes yes

The performance monitoring complies to ITU-T G.874 and G.798.

Ethernet client Performance Monitoring

On client ports configured for GbE, the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device supports the

non-intrusive monitoring of Ethernet per IETF RFC-2819, Tables 2 and 3. The following

Near-End Physical Coding Sublayer parameters are monitored for GbE connections.

Table 2-5 PCS PM parameter definitions

Parameter Mnemonic Definition

Code Violations - PCS CV-PCS Count of 64B/66B or 8B/10B coding

violations

Errored Seconds - PCS ES-PCS Count of 64B/66B or 8B/10B coding

violations ≥ 1 or dLSS = True or dLOS =

True

Severely Errored Seconds -

PCS

SES-PCS Count of seconds with 64B/66B or

8B/10B errors ≥ x2

or dLSS = True or

dLOS = True

Severely Errored Frame

Seconds - PCS

SEFS-PCS Count of seconds in which dLSS = True

or dLOS = True

How performance monitoring works

Performance monitoring (PM) statistics provide counts or measurements of significant

information that can be used to gauge the performance of the network element and the

services running on it.

The statistics gathered are used primarily for the following:

• to provide instant notification, via alarms, that acceptable thresholds for data such as

CPU utilization or dropped packets have been crossed.

• to provide a historical view of the performance of the network element over a given

period of time.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




15 minutes and 24 hours counters

For each parameter, 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device provides 15 minutes and 24 hours

counters:

• 15 minutes counters: 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device provides one current and 32

recent registers for the Performance Data. Each register is time stamped and contains

a suspect interval indication (this indicates that the duration of the interval is

suspected of being unequal to 15 minutes). The 15 minute intervals are aligned with

the 24 hour intervals.

• 24 hours counters: The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device provides one current and

seven recent 24H registers for the Performance Data. Each register is time stamped

and contains a suspect interval indication (this indicates that the duration of the

interval is suspected of being unequal to 24 hours). The 24 hour intervals are

synchronized to the time-of-day. The suspect indication is supported for all

measurement periods. The suspect indication is supported for all measurement

periods.

This complies to ITU-T G.784 and Telcordia GR-253 issue 3 (2000).

Threshold crossing alerts (TCAs)

Performance monitoring statistics are gathered for all interface ports and the statistics are

grouped by functional category. Each category has several monitored parameters for

which you can configure threshold crossing alerts (TCAs). A threshold is the mechanism

for generating a defined notification resulting from changes in PM parameter values. The

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device allows provisioning of performance parameter

thresholds, which can be set by the user to show degraded performance. You can

configure how much data is gathered, how it is stored, and how and when you are notified

if certain thresholds levels are crossed. Beginning with PSS-1 MD4H 1.7, a TCA is a

standing condition that can be obtained by interrogating the NE. (A standing condition is

a persistent state that must be cleared.)

Threshold values are considered as crossed when the value in the Current Register is

equal to or exceeds the value in the corresponding Threshold Register. No threshold for

clearing is supported. TCAs are reported via messages upon recognition of the threshold

crossings. No clearance is reported at the end of any monitoring period. TCA messages

for digital parameters identify the monitored facility, monitored parameter register,

current threshold value, current register value, time and date of the occurrence.

TCA messages for analog parameters identify the monitored facility, monitored parameter

register, current threshold value, current register value, base-lined value, time and date of

the occurrence. TCA message output contains absolute measure value for the current

register value and not the deviation from associated base-lined value.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-43

For each threshold on a Current register, only one TCA is sent during an accumulation

period, unless the Current register is reset. If the Current register is reset and subsequently

its value again reaches or exceeds the threshold value, another TCA is sent. When a

threshold is crossed, the NE does not reset the register, but continues counting to the end

of the accumulation period.

The data for each PM group is queried and tested for threshold crossings at the following

intervals:

• 15-min bin: every 15 minutes

• 24-hr. bin: every 24 hours

A TCA event is reported within a minute of the TCA event occurring.

Note: The PM groups are also queried and tested for threshold crossings when the

contents of the raw bin are viewed. This query is in addition to the regularly

scheduled queries.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Status Retrieval

Objective

Configuration parameters and status information can be retrieved for a range of

equipment and conditions on 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device. Status information is

retrieved using the CLI. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS)

Release 3.0.0 Command Line Interface Guide.

The following status retrieval options are available from the CLI:

• System Timing status

• Loopbacks

• All Faults

Retrieving user status

The NE maintains all active and inactive users.

• Admin or Service users can retrieve session information on all active (session

established) authenticated (logged on) users at any given time.

• Users with appropriate security level privileges can retrieve information related to the

login parameters (i.e., time remaining before a user login becomes disabled due to

password aging) of provisioned users in the system, and information indicating

whether or not the provisioned user is disabled or enabled to login.

• Users with sufficient security level privileges can retrieve session information on all

active (session established) unauthenticated (not logged on) sessions at any given

time.

Retrieving and editing user privileges

The ability to edit an existing user profile entry (created when entering a user) is provided

to users with appropriate security level privileges. The following conditions apply:

• Only users with appropriate administration privileges can change a user profile

database entry for another user.

• Only users with administrator privileges can modify a user’s security level. It is not

possible to modify the UID or user security level of factory default users.

• Modifications to user specific provisioned values are not allowed for a user that is

currently logged on.

• A user with security administration privileges can retrieve any or all user profile

entries. Otherwise a user can only retrieve his own user profile entry.

• Only those parameters values that are actually applied for the specified UID are

reported. This means that those system-wide parameters that have been modified, but

still not applied to the specified UID, are reported with their previous values.

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Status Retrieval

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-45

System access

Overview

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device supports local access for provisioning and status

retrieval.

IP address

The IP address of the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device is configured through the CLI.

During a software installation/upgrade, a computer with an IP address is used as the FTP

host for the upgrade. This computer will contain the source file (zipped in tar.gz) to be

loaded and will also have an FTP server running. Refer to, “Software installation”Proc-

edure 4-3: “Software installation” (p. 4-5).

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device System access

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Synchronization

Manual Time of Day synchronization

The following apply for manual (non-NTP) Time of Day synchronization.

• The NE date and time are capable of being modified via user interface command

• If NTP synchronization is enabled, attempts to modify date and time are denied.

• Changing the date or time, without input errors, will not cause any alarms, conditions,

or autonomous messages from the NE system due to date or time changes.

• The system ensures the date/time is set and reported within the valid range supported

by the user commands. The valid date range is from 1-Jan-2005 to 31-Dec-2059.

• The NE preserves the correct time and date through a restart/reboot of the processors

where there is no loss of power, and also when a module or device (hard disk) has

been replaced.

• The NE internal time of day clock uses the calculated UTC time from the selected

NTP server, when enabled, as modified by the user-provisioned offset. All messages,

event reports, logs, and events that carry time stamps use this time of day.

Note: Time/date changes may cause partial or incomplete PM data, depending on the

magnitude of the time change. Time/date changes will not affect the application of

security measures such as password aging.

Network Time Protocol (NTP) synchronization

The NE is capable of synchronizing its time of day via Network Time Protocol (NTP). It

is possible to provision up to ten (10) NTP servers and it is also possible to delete an NTP

server. The user can retrieve the attributes and service state of all designated NTP servers

via user command.

The following applies:

• It is possible to enable or disable NTP synchronization. When NTP protocol is

enabled, the NE internal time of day clock uses the calculated UTC time from the

selected NTP server, as modified by the user-provisioned offset. All messages, event

reports, logs, and events that carry time stamps will use this time of day (NTP UTC

time + provisioned offset).

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Synchronization

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-47

When NTP protocol is disabled after having been synchronized to an NTP server, the

NE internal clock adopts the last value of the NTP server time as its set time and

continues to calculate time stamps using the provisioned offset.

• The NE supports the following time-of-day synchronization modes:

– non-synchronized, free-running mode: NTP is not enabled, and the NE is not

synchronized to an NTP server and is instead using its own internal clock as a

source.

– synchronized mode: the NE is using the NTP protocol to synchronize to an NTP

server. The NE is polling the NTP server and periodically making corrections to

its internal clock so as to maintain the same clock time as the NTP server.

• The current time-of-day synchronization mode is retrievable via user command

• NTP server addresses and NTP enable/disable status is able to survive a database

backup and restore.

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Synchronization

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Reliability program

Overview

The reliability program is implemented as an integral part of the Alcatel-Lucent Product

Life Cycle (PLC) process. The reliability program is comprehensive, and includes

activities such as setting and ensuring compliance with customer-focused

system-reliability requirements, ensuring component qualification is consistent with use

environment and system design, predicting failure rates of Field Replaceable Units

(FRUs), assessing reliability architecture, modeling system reliability, assuring

satisfactory system-downtime performance, reducing hardware failure rates through

Environmental Stress Testing (EST), and tracking field returns.

The reliability program is comprehensive, and includes the following activities:

• Sets and ensures compliance with customer-focused system-reliability requirement

• Ensues component qualification is consistent with use environment and system design

• Predicts failure rates of FRUs

• Assesses reliability architecture

• Models system reliability

• Ensures satisfactory system-downtime performance

• Reduces hardware failure rates through Environmental Stress Testing (EST)

• Tracks field returns

Design and development

During the design and development stage, reliability predictions, qualification and

selection of components, definition of quality assurance audit standards, and prototyping

of critical areas of the system ensure built-in reliability.

Manufacturing and field deployment

During manufacturing and field deployment, techniques such as environmental stress

testing, production quality audits, field-return tracking, failure-mode analysis, and

feedback and corrective-action further enhance the ongoing reliability improvement

efforts.

Failure Rates

This section provides reliability figures of 1830 PSS-32 and 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge

Device Orderable Items with non-zero failure rates per Telcordia SR-332 [1], Method

I-D.

Failure rates are expressed in FITs, where one FIT is one failure in 109

operating hours.

The mean time to failure (MTTF) in years is given by:

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Reliability program

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-49

In this equation, λ is the steady-state failure rate per SR-332, Issue 2; Method I-D. The

mean time between failures (MTBF) is defined by:

In this equation, MTTR is the mean time to repair. Since MTTF >> MTTR, MTBF is very

close to MTTF. Hence the two terms MTBF and MTTF are often used interchangeably.

Table 2-6 Failure Rates and MTBFs for 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device in a

controlled environment

Acronym Orderable Item APN Failure Rate

(FITs)

MTBF

(yrs)

MD4HKIT ED MD4H Shelf

Kit (incl.

PSS1MD4H,

PWRx2, FAN11

)

(hardened)

8DG59884AA 8255 14

PSS1MD4H MSC Dual Edge

Device (RSA

PSSMD4H

(backplane +

PSS1MD4x2)

8DG59885AA 5825 20

EDFANUP Hardened Edge

Device Fan Unit1

)

User Panel

integrated

8DG59379HA 1726 66

EDPFDC Edge Device

Power Filter (DC)

- Hardened

8DG59382HA 352 324

E_SFC1A Edge Device -

Static Filter

Hardened CWDM

1 Channel (A

Variant)

8DG59592HA 223 512

MTTF =8760

y10

9

MTBF = MTTF + MTTR


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................





controlled environment (continued)


(FITs)

MTBF

(yrs)

E_SFC1B Edge Device -

Static Filter

Hardened CWDM

1 Channel (B

Variant)

8DG59592HB 223 512

E_SFC1C Edge Device -

Static Filter

Hardened CWDM

1 Channel (C

Variant)

8DG59592HC 223 512

E_SFC1D Edge Device -

Static Filter

Hardened CWDM

1 Channel (D

Variant)

8DG59592HD 223 512

E_SFC1E Edge Device -

Static Filter

Hardened CWDM

1 Channel (E

Variant)

8DG59592HE 223 512

E_SFC1F Edge Device -

Static Filter

HardenedCWDM

1 Channel (F

Variant)

8DG59592HF 223 512

E_SFC1G Edge Device -

Static Filter

Hardened CWDM

1 Channel (G

Variant)

8DG59592HG 223 512

E_SFC1H Edge Device -

Static Filter

Hardened CWDM

1 Channel (H

Variant)

8DG59592HH 223 512


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-51


controlled environment (continued)


(FITs)

MTBF

(yrs)

E_SFC2A Edge Device Static

Filter Hardened

CWDM 2 Channel

(A Variant)

8DG59601HA 235 486


Static Filter

Hardened CWDM

2 Channel (B

Variant)

8DG59601HB 235 486


Static Filter

Hardened CWDM

2 Channel (C

Variant)

8DG59601HC 235 486


Static Filter

Hardened CWDM

2 Channel (D

Variant)

8DG59601HD 235 486


Static Filter

Hardened CWDM

4 Channel (A

Variant)

8DG59593HA 260 439


Static Filter

Hardened CWDM

4 Channel (B

Variant)

8DG59593HB 260 439

E_SFC8 CWDM Channel

Static Filter

Hardened

8DG59594HA 296 386

SFP Small Form Factor

Pluggable

210 544


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Notes:

1. The fan unit is a limited-life component, per Telcordia SR-332. The published failure rate

(MTBF) represents an average rate during the useful life of the fan unit, which is 6.5 years.

Preventive replacement of a fan unit which has reached its end-of-life is highly

recommended. If a fan unit is allowed to run past its end-of-file, its failure rate will be

greater than the published value.

According to Telcordia SR-332, the failure rate (MTBF) of a circuit pack in a remote

terminal (uncontrolled environment) is twice the failure rate of the same pack in a central

office (controlled environment).

Table 2-7 Failure Rates and MTBFs for 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device in an

uncontrolled environment

Acronym Orderable Item APN (12 digit) Failure Rate

(FITs)

MTBF

(yrs)

MD4HKIT ED MD4H Shelf

Kit (incl.

PSS1MD4H,

PWRx2, FAN11

)

(hardened)

8DG59884AA 16510 7

PSS1MD4H MSC Dual Edge

Device (RSA

PSSMD4H

(backplane +

PSS1MD4x2)

8DG59885AA 11650 10

EDFANUP Hardened Edge

Device Fan Unit1

)

User Panel

integrated

8DG59379HA 3452 33

EDPFDC Edge Device

Power Filter (DC)

- Hardened

8DG59382HA 704 162


Static Filter

Hardened CWDM

1 Channel (A

Variant)

8DG59592HA 446 256


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-53


uncontrolled environment (continued)


(FITs)

MTBF

(yrs)


Static Filter

Hardened CWDM

1 Channel (B

Variant)

8DG59592HB 446 256


Static Filter

Hardened CWDM

1 Channel (C

Variant)

8DG59592HC 446 256


Static Filter

Hardened CWDM

1 Channel (D

Variant)

8DG59592HD 446 256

E_SFC1E Edge Device -

Static Filter

Hardened CWDM

1 Channel (E

Variant)

8DG59592HE 446 256

E_SFC1F Edge Device -

Static Filter

HardenedCWDM

1 Channel (F

Variant)

8DG59592HF 446 256

E_SFC1G Edge Device -

Static Filter

Hardened CWDM

1 Channel (G

Variant)

8DG59592HG 446 256

E_SFC1H Edge Device -

Static Filter

Hardened CWDM

1 Channel (H

Variant)

8DG59592HH 446 256


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................





uncontrolled environment (continued)


(FITs)

MTBF

(yrs)

E_SFC2A Edge Device Static

Filter Hardened

CWDM 2 Channel

(A Variant)

8DG59601HA 470 243


Static Filter

Hardened CWDM

2 Channel (B

Variant)

8DG59601HB 470 243


Static Filter

Hardened CWDM

2 Channel (C

Variant)

8DG59601HC 470 243


Static Filter

Hardened CWDM

2 Channel (D

Variant)

8DG59601HD 470 243


Static Filter

Hardened CWDM

4 Channel (A

Variant)

8DG59593HA 520 220


Static Filter

Hardened CWDM

4 Channel (B

Variant)

8DG59593HB 520 220

E_SFC8 CWDM Channel

Static Filter

Hardened

8DG59594HA 592 193

SFP Small Form Factor

Pluggable

420 272


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-55

Notes:

1. The fan unit is a limited-life component, per Telcordia SR-332. The published failure rate

(MTBF) represents an average rate during the useful life of the fan unit, which is 6.5 years.

Preventive replacement of a fan unit which has reached its end-of-life is highly

recommended. If a fan unit is allowed to run past its end-of-file, its failure rate will be

greater than the published value.

Sparing Tables for Field Replaceable Units

The circuit pack sparing levels in the following tables were determined using the

methodology in Bell Communications Research SR-TSY-000385 [2]. In the context of

sparing calculations, lead time is the time to replenish the sparing pool with a new or

repaired pack. The sparing levels are based on circuit pack steady-state FIT rates given in

Table 2-6, “Failure Rates and MTBFs for 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device in a controlled

environment” (p. 2-50) and a service continuity objective of 99.999%.

Attention: Lead time, as used herein, does not pertain to the delivery intervals from

the submission of a purchase order, as that term may be used under any applicable

contract. Furthermore, lead time should not be confused with mean time to repair

(typically, 2 hours in a central office), which is the time elapsed from when a circuit

pack or unit is known to fail in service to when a spare circuit pack or unit is placed in

service to replace the failed item. It is the customer’s responsibility to maintain the

recommended sparing levels at all times. The need to maintain recommended sparing

levels implies that a replacement spare must be ordered immediately upon the

detection of a pack failing in service. In addition, lead times and FIT rates specified

here are assumptions for purposes of maintaining adequate sparing levels only, and

they do not change the terms of any applicable contracts, including ordering terms,

lead times, delivery provisions, or any applicable warranties that may be in effect.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Figure 2-23 Recommended 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Circuit Pack and Unit

Sparing Levels - 30 Day Lead Time for packs in a controlled

environment


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-57


Sparing Levels - 30 Day Lead Time for packs in an uncontrolled

environment


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................





Sparing Levels - 60 Day Lead Time for packs in a controlled

environment


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-59


Sparing Levels - 60 Day Lead Time for packs in an uncontrolled

environment


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................





Sparing Levels - 90 Day Lead Time for circuit packs in a controlled

environment


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-61


Sparing Levels - 90 Day Lead Time for circuit packs in an uncontrolled

environment


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Ordering

Purpose

This section provides ordering details for 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device ordering

information.

Table Contents

Table 2-8, “1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 NE

CD-ROMs and License Point Fees”

(p. 2-63)

lists the ordering information for the 1830

PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 MD4H network element

(NE) software CD-ROMs.

Table 2-9, “PSS-1 MD4H SFPs” (p. 2-64) lists the ordering information for the 1830

PSS-32 and the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device

SFP pluggable optics

Table 2-10, “1830 PSS-1 MD4H common

equipment” (p. 2-72)

lists the ordering information for the 1830 PSS-1

MD4H Edge Device common equipment.

Table 2-11, “1830 PSS-1 MD4H installation

kits” (p. 2-73)

lists the ordering information for 1830 PSS-1

MD4H Edge Device installation kits, and their

contents.

Table 2-12, “1830 PSS-1 MD4H kit:

customer-replaceable items” (p. 2-74)


MD4H Edge Devicekit: customer-replaceable

items.

Table 2-13, “1830 PSS-1 MD4H

miscellaneous equipment” (p. 2-74)


MD4H Edge Device miscellaneous equipment.

Ordering details

Table 2-8, “1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 NE CD-ROMs and License Point Fees”

(p. 2-63) lists the ordering information for the 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 network element

(NE) software CD-ROMs.

Table 2-8 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 NE CD-ROMs and License Point Fees

Acronym Description Part No. CLEI code 1830

PSS-32

1830

PSS-1

MD4H

SWP-

1830 PSS

R3.0.0

1830 PSS

R3.0.0

CDROM

8DG60712AAAA — X —

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Ordering

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-63

Table 2-8 1830 PSS-32/1830 PSS-1 NE CD-ROMs and License Point Fees

(continued)

Acronym Description Part No. CLEI code 1830

PSS-32

1830

PSS-1

MD4H

SWP

1830PSS-

1MD4H

R1.7.0

1830PSS-

1MD4H

R1.7.0

CDROM

3KC27893AAAA — — X

SWL-

Wave-

length

Tracker

1830PSS32

License

Fee

1830 PSS-32

R2.0 Software

License Fee

(incl.

Wavelength

Tracker)

8DG60207AAAA — X —

SWL-

Photonics

VERS

“A”

WDM LP

WDM Blade

License Point

Fee

3AL75117AAAA — X —

SWL-

Photonics

VERS

“A” TDM

LP

TDM Blade

License Point

Fee

3AL75118AAAA — X —

SWL-

Photonics

VERS

“A” ETH

LP

Ethernet

Blade License

Point Fee

8DG59727AAAA — X —

Table 2-9, “PSS-1 MD4H SFPs” (p. 2-64) lists the ordering information for the 1830

PSS-32 and the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H SFP pluggable optics.

Table 2-9 PSS-1 MD4H SFPs

Mne-

monic

Standards APN Description CLEI Code

Line (OTU1)


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Table 2-9 PSS-1 MD4H SFPs (continued)

Mne-

monic


SL-16.1 L-16.1/LR-1 1AB376370003 ALU SFP L-16.1 -5/+85 NGI7ANRMAA

1AB376370007

(ETR)

ALU SFP L-16.1

-40/+85

-

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200001 CWDM 2G5 MR

multirate ≤2.7 Gbps

(80km)

NGI7ANFMAA

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200002 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7AUPMAA

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200003 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7ANHMAA

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200004 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7ANJMAA

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200005 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7ANKMAA

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200006 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7ANLMAA

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200007 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7ANMMAA

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200008 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7ANNMAA

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200009 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7AUHMAA

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200010 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7AUNMAA

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200011 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7AUPMAA


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-65


Mne-

monic


SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200012 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7AURMAA

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200013 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7AUSMAA

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200014 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7AUTMAA

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200015 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7AUUMAA

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200016 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7AUVMAA

SS-16.1A 2G5 MR

SFP(S-16.1/

IR-1)

1AB376370005 B & W STM-16/OC-48


(IR-1)

WMU1AF2CAA

SS-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

40km

1AB377160001 CWDM 2G5 MR


(40km)

NG17AM7MAA

SS-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

40km

1AB377160002 CWDM 2G5 MR


(40km)

NG17AM8MAA

SS-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

40km

1AB377160003 CWDM 2G5 MR


(40km)

NG17AM9MAA

SS-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

40km

1AB377160004 CWDM 2G5 MR


(40km)

NG17ANAMAA

SS-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

40km

1AB377160005 CWDM 2G5 MR


(40km)

NG17ANBMAA

SS-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

40km

1AB377160006 CWDM 2G5 MR


(40km)

NG17ANCMAA


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................





Mne-

monic


SS-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

40km

1AB377160007 CWDM 2G5 MR


(40km)

NG17ANDMAA

SS-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

40km

1AB377160008 CWDM 2G5 MR


(40km)

NG17ANEMAA

4FC-OC NA 1AB155070001 CWDM 4.55G

OTU1/SFP 4FC CWDM

WOTRB1XTAA

4FC-OC NA 1AB155070002 CWDM 4.55G

OTU1/SFP 4FC CWDM

WOTRB1YTAA

4FC-OC NA 1AB155070003 CWDM 4.55G

OTU1/SFP 4FC CWDM

WOTRB1ZTAA

4FC-OC NA 1AB155070004 CWDM 4.55G

OTU1/SFP 4FC CWDM

WOTRB10TAA

4FC-OC NA 1AB155070005 CWDM 4.55G

OTU1/SFP 4FC CWDM

WOTRB11TAA

4FC-OC NA 1AB155070006 CWDM 4.55G

OTU1/SFP 4FC CWDM

WOTRB12TAA

4FC-OC NA 1AB155070007 CWDM 4.55G

OTU1/SFP 4FC CWDM

WOTRB13TAA

4FC-OC NA 1AB155070008 CWDM 4.55G

OTU1/SFP 4FC CWDM

WOTRB14TAA

4FC-OD NA 1AB383360003 DWDM 4.55G

OTU1/SFP 4FC DWDM

WOTRBFKTAA

4FC-OD NA 1AB383360004

thru-

1AB383360008

DWDM 4.55G

OTU1/SFP 4FC DWDM

WOTRBFVTAA

thru-

WOTRBFZTAA

4FC-OD NA 1AB383360009

thru-

1AB383360018

DWDM 4.55G

OTU1/SFP 4FC DWDM

WOTRBF0TAA

thru-

WOTRBF9TAA

4FC-OD NA 1AB383360019

thru-

1AB383360026

DWDM 4.55G

OTU1/SFP 4FC DWDM

WOTRBGATAA

thru-

WOTRB-

GHTAA


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-67


Mne-

monic


4FC-OD NA 1AB383360027

thru-

1AB383360031

DWDM 4.55G

OTU1/SFP 4FC DWDM

WOTRBGJTAA

thru-

WOTRBGN-

TAA

4FC-OD NA 1AB383360032 DWDM 4.55G

OTU1/SFP 4FC DWDM

WOTRBGPTAA

4FC-OD NA 1AB383360033

thru-

1AB383360041

DWDM 4.55G

OTU1/SFP 4FC DWDM

WOTRBGRTAA

thru-

WOTRBGZTAA

4FC-OD NA 1AB383360042

1AB383360046

DWDM 4.55G

OTU1/SFP 4FC DWDM

WOTRBG0TAA

thru-

WOTRBGZTAA

Client

4FCLC-L LC-L 1AB379640002 SFP FC/2FC/4FC 1310

nm

NG17ANWMAA

4FCSN-I SN-I 1AB379640001 SFP FC/2FC/4FC 850

nm - Hardened

-

1AB379640003

(ETR)

NGI7AUJMAA

1000B-LX 1 G SFP

1000BASE-LX

1AB376720002 B & W GbE

(1000BASE-LX/10km)

NGI7AMLMAA

1000B-SX 1 G SFP

1000BASE-SX

1AB376720001 B & W GbE

(1000BASE-SX/550m)

NGI7ANPMAA

1000B-T 1000BASE-T 1AB359780002 Electrical GbE -

1000B-ZX 1 G SFP

1000BASE-ZX

1AB376720003 B & W GbE

(1000BASE-ZX/80km)

NGI7AMMMAA

GE-BX20D 1000BASE-

BX20

OC12/STM-4

20km BiDi

1AB393080006 B & W 1000BX/STM-4

(20km Downstream)

NG17AWK2AA

GE-BX20U 1000BASE-

BX20

OC12/STM-4

20km BiDi

1AB393080005 B & W 1000BX/STM-4

(20km Upstream)

NG17AWJ2AA


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................





Mne-

monic


GE-BX40D 1000BASE-

BX40

OC12/STM-4

40km BiDi

1AB393080010 B & W 1000BX/STM-4

(40km Downstream)

NG17AWH2AA

GE-BX40U 1000BASE-

BX40

OC12/STM-4

40km BiDi

1AB393080009 B & W 1000BX/STM-4

(40km Upstream)

NG17AWG2AA

100BLX10 100BASE-LX10 1AB382180001 Fast Ethernet SFP NGI7ASGMAA

FE-BX40D FE

100BASE-BX40

OC-3/STM-1

40kmBiDi

1AB393080008 B & W 100BX/FE

(40km-Downstream)

NG17AWM2AA

FE-BX40U FE

100BASE-BX40

OC-3/STM-1

40kmBiDi

1AB393080007 B & W 100BX/FE

(40km-Upstream)

NG17AWL2AA

SFEBTEE 100BASE-T 1AB310140001 SFP FE/FDDI

100BASE-T EL W/Ext

Temp

-

SL-1.1 L-1.1/LR-1,

30km

1AB376350002 ALU SFP L-1.1 -40/+85 NGI7AMFMAA

SL-1.2 L-1.2,155M,

SM,80km

1AB376350003 ALU SFP L-1.2 -40/+85 NGI7AMGMAA

SS-1.1 S-1.1/IR-1,15km 1AB376350001 ALU SFP S-1.1 -40/+85 NGI7AMEMAA

SL-4.1 L-4.1/LR-1,

40km

1AB376360002 ALU SFP L-4.1 -40/+85 NGI7AMJMAA

SL-4.2 L4.2,SM,80km 1AB376360003 ALU SFP L-4.2 -40/+85 NGI7AMKMAA

SS-4.1 S-4.1/IR-1,15km 1AB376360001 ALU SFP S-4.1 -40/+85 NGI7AMHMAA

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200001 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7ANFMAA

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200002 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7ANGMAA


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-69


Mne-

monic


SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200003 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7ANHMAA

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200004 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7ANJMAA

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200005 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7ANKMAA

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200006 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7ANLMAA

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200007 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7ANMMAA

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200008 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7ANNMAA

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200009 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7AUHMAA

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200010 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7AUNMAA

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200011 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7AUPMAA

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200012 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7AURMAA

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200013 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7AUSMAA

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200014 CWDM 2G5 MR

multirate ≤2.7

Gbps(80km)

NGI7AUTMAA


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................





Mne-

monic


SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200015 CWDM 2G5 MR

multirate ≤2.7

Gbps(80km))

NGI7AUUMAA

SL-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

80km

1AB377200016 CWDM 2G5 MR


(80km)

NGI7AUVMAA

SS-16.1A 2G5 MR

SFP(S-16.1/

IR-1)

1AB376370005 B & W STM-16/OC-48


(IR-1)

WMU1AF2CAA

SS-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

40km

1AB377160001 CWDM 2G5 MR


(40km)

NG17AM7MAA

SS-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

40km

1AB377160002 CWDM 2G5 MR


(40km)

NG17AM8MAA

SS-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

40km

1AB377160003 CWDM 2G5 MR


(40km)

NG17AM9MAA

SS-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

40km

1AB377160004 CWDM 2G5 MR


(40km)

NG17ANAMAA

SS-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

40km

1AB377160005 CWDM 2G5 MR

multirate ≤2.7

Gbps(40km)

NG17ANBMAA

SS-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

40km

1AB377160006 CWDM 2G5 MR

multirate ≤2.7

Gbps(40km)

NG17ANCMAA

SS-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

40km

1AB377160007 CWDM 2G5 MR

multirate ≤2.7

Gbps(40km)

NG17ANDMAA

SS-16.2C 2G5 MR

CWDM SFP

40km

1AB377160008 CWDM 2G5 MR

multirate ≤2.7

Gbps(40km)

NG17ANEMAA

SI-16.1 I-16.1/SR-1 1AB376370001 B & W

STM-16/OC-48/OUT-1

NGI7AMTMAA


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-71


Mne-

monic


SL-16.1 L-16.1/LR-1 1AB376370003 ALU SFP L-16.1 -5/+85 NGI7ANRMAA

1AB376370007

(ETR)

ALU SFP L-16.1

-40/+85

-

SL-16.2 L-16.2/LR-2 1AB376370004 ALU SFP L-16.2 -5/+85 NGI7ANSMAA

1AB376370008

(ETR)

ALU SFP L-16.2

-40/+85

-

Table 2-10, “1830 PSS-1 MD4H common equipment” (p. 2-72) lists the ordering

information for the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device common equipment.

Table 2-10 1830 PSS-1 MD4H common equipment

Acronym Description Part No. CLEI code

MD4HKIT PSS-1 MD4H Shelf Kit

(includes integrated MD4H

(2xPSS1MD4), EDFANUP,

EDPFDCx2)

8DG59884AA —

PSS1MD4H MD4H Edge Device 8DG59885AA —

EDCVR Edge Device Shelf Cover - EIA 8DG59494AA —

DUJSME1 Duplex JUMPER S.M.

LC/PC-LC/PC 1.4m ETSI

1AB215120060 —

DUJSMN1 Duplex JUMPER S.M.

LC/PC-LC/PC 1.4m NAR

1AB215120061 —


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Table 2-11, “1830 PSS-1 MD4H installation kits” (p. 2-73) lists the ordering information

for the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device kits and their contents.

Table 2-11 1830 PSS-1 MD4H installation kits

Acronym Description Part No. CLEI code Content items

EDINST19 Edge Device

Installation Kit

(19-inch rack)

8DG59655AA — 1: Shelf Cover

4: 12-24 screws

6: M2.5 x 5 FH screws

2: 19” shelf mounting ear

2: NAR Power Cable

(3.6m)

1: SFP removal tool

1: LC fiber removal tool

EDINST23 Edge Device

Installation Kit

(ANSI Rack)

8DG59655AB — 1: shelf cover

4: 12-24 screws


2: 23” shelf mounting ear

2: NAR power cable

(3.6m)

1: SFP removal tool


EDINSTET Edge Device

Installation Kit

(ETSI Rack)

8DG59655AC — 4: M6 x 12 thread forming

screw


2: ETSI mounting ear

2: ETSI power cable (3.6)

1: SFP removal tool


EDWLMNT ED Shelf Wall

Mount Kit

8DG59733AA — 1: 1830 Edge Device wall

mount


10: #10 x 3/4” hex flange

head wood screws

10: washers


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-73

Table 2-12, “1830 PSS-1 MD4H kit: customer-replaceable items” (p. 2-74) lists the

ordering information for the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H kit: customer-replaceable items.

Table 2-12 1830 PSS-1 MD4H kit: customer-replaceable items


EDFANUP Edge Device Fan

Unit User Panel

integrated

8DG59379AA WOPQAB1RAA

EDAIRFLT Edge Device Dust

Filter

8DG59648AA —

EDPFDC Edge Device Power

Filter (DC)

8DG59382AA WOPUABDMAA

Table 2-13, “1830 PSS-1 MD4H miscellaneous equipment” (p. 2-74) lists the ordering

information for the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H miscellaneous equipment.

Table 2-13 1830 PSS-1 MD4H miscellaneous equipment


EDHSFB ED Filter Blank

(half-slot)

8DG59658AA —

EDFSFB ED Filter Blank (full

slot)

8DG59691AA —

EDPSFB ED Power Filter

Blank

8DG59659AA —

EDHSLAD Half-slot adapter

(filter slot)

8DG59642AA —

E_SFC1A Edge Device - Static

Filter Hardened

CWDM 1 Channel (A

Variant)

8DG59592HA WOCUANFUAA

E_SFC1B Edge Device - Static

Filter Hardened

CWDM 1 Channel (B

Variant)

8DG59592HB WOCUANUUAA

E_SFC1C Edge Device - Static

Filter Hardened

CWDM 1 Channel (C

Variant)

8DG59592HC WOCUANMUAA


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Table 2-13 1830 PSS-1 MD4H miscellaneous equipment (continued)


E_SFC1D Edge Device - Static

Filter Hardened

CWDM 1 Channel (D

Variant)

8DG59592HD WOCUANNUAA

E_SFC1E Edge Device - Static

Filter Hardened

CWDM 1 Channel (E

Variant)

8DG59592HE WOCUANPUAA

E_SFC1F Edge Device - Static

Filter Hardened

CWDM 1 Channel (F

Variant)

8DG59592HF WOCUANRUAA

E_SFC1G Edge Device - Static

Filter Hardened

CWDM 1 Channel (G

Variant)

8DG59592HG WOCUANSUAA

E_SFC1H Edge Device - Static

Filter Hardened

CWDM 1 Channel (H

Variant)

8DG59592HH WOCUANTUAA


Filter Hardened

CWDM 2 Channel (A

Variant)

8DG59601HA WOCUANVUAA


Filter Hardened

CWDM 2 Channel (B

Variant)

8DG59601HB WOCUANWUAA

E_SFC2C Edge Device - Static

Filter Hardened

CWDM 2 Channel (C

Variant)

8DG59601HC WOCUANXUAA

E_SFC2D Edge Device - Static

Filter Hardened

CWDM 2 Channel (D

Variant)

8DG59601HD WOCUANYUAA


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-75

Table 2-13 1830 PSS-1 MD4H miscellaneous equipment (continued)



Filter Hardened

CWDM 4 Channel (A

Variant)

8DG59593HA WOCUAN0UAA


Filter Hardened

CWDM 4 Channel (B

Variant)

8DG59593HB WOCUAN1UAA

E_SFC8 CWDM 8 Channel

Static Filter Hardened

8DG59594HA WOCUANZUAA


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Technical specifications

Purpose

This section provides technical specifications for 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device.

Power

This section provides the power specifications for the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device

and its external power options.

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device

A fully populated 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device will draw a maximum of 110 Watts

(90 Watts typical).

Power filter input

The input voltage for power filters on the 1830 PSS-1 have the following specifications:

Table 2-14 Power filter input specifications

System voltage Input range

-48 Vdc -40.5 Vdc to -57 Vdc

-60 Vdc -50 Vdc to -72 Vdc

SFP sensitivity and power

The information in the table on the following pages identifies the sensitivity and power

information for SFPs used with the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device. For comprehensive

information for SFPs, see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch 32/16

(PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 3.0.0 Product Information and Planning Guide.

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Technical specifications

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-77

Table

2-15

SFP

specifications

APN

Description

Mnem

onic

Fiber

Type

Launch

Pow

er

Receiver

Sensitivity

Re-

ceiver

Over-

load

Min

BO

L

(dBm

)

Max

BO

L

(dBm

)

Min

EO

L

(dBm

)

Max

EO

L

(dBm

)

Min

(dBm

)

EO

L

(dBm

)

Line

(O

TU

1)

1A

B3

76

37

00

03

SF

PL

-1

6.1

-5

/+

85

(B

&W

ST

M-1

6/O

C-4

8

DD

M1

31

0n

m

(L

-1

6.1

/L

R-1

))

SL

-1

6.1

SS

MF

-1

+2

-2

+3

-2

9-2

7-9

1A

B3

76

37

00

07

(E

TR

)

SF

PL

-1

6.1

-4

0/+

85

(B

&W

ST

M-1

6/O

C-4

8

DD

M1

31

0n

m

(L

-1

6.1

/L

R-1

))

SL

-1

6.1

SS

MF

-1

+2

-2

+3

-2

9-2

7-9

1A

B3

77

20

00

01

SF

PC

WD

M-L

H

14

71

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

AP

D(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SL

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-3

0-2

8-8

1A

B3

77

20

00

02

SF

PC

WD

M-L

H

14

91

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

AP

D(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SL

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-3

0-2

8-8

1A

B3

77

20

00

03

SF

PC

WD

M-L

H

15

11

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

AP

D(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SL

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-3

0-2

8-8

1A

B3

77

20

00

04

SF

PC

WD

M-L

H

15

31

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

AP

D(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SL

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-3

0-2

8-8


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Table

2-15

SFP

specifications

(continued)

APN

Description

Mnem

onic

Fiber

Type

Launch

Pow

er

Receiver

Sensitivity

Re-

ceiver

Over-

load

Min

BO

L

(dBm

)

Max

BO

L

(dBm

)

Min

EO

L

(dBm

)

Max

EO

L

(dBm

)

Min

(dBm

)

EO

L

(dBm

)

Line

(O

TU

1)

1A

B3

77

20

00

05

SF

PC

WD

M-L

H

15

51

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

AP

D(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SL

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-3

0-2

8-8

1A

B3

77

20

00

06

SF

PC

WD

M-L

H

15

71

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

AP

D(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SL

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-3

0-2

8-8

1A

B3

77

20

00

07

SF

PC

WD

M-L

H

15

91

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

AP

D(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SL

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-3

0-2

8-8

1A

B3

77

20

00

08

SF

PC

WD

M-L

H

16

11

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

AP

D(<

2.7

G)

DD

MC

H1

61

0)

SL

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-3

0-2

8-8

1A

B3

77

20

00

9S

FP

CW

DM

-L

H

14

71

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

AP

D(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SL

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-3

0-2

8-8

1A

B3

77

20

00

10

SF

PC

WD

M-L

H

14

91

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

AP

D(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SL

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-3

0-2

8-8


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-79

Table

2-15

SFP

specifications

(continued)

APN

Description

Mnem

onic

Fiber

Type

Launch

Pow

er

Receiver

Sensitivity

Re-

ceiver

Over-

load

Min

BO

L

(dBm

)

Max

BO

L

(dBm

)

Min

EO

L

(dBm

)

Max

EO

L

(dBm

)

Min

(dBm

)

EO

L

(dBm

)

Line

(O

TU

1)

1A

B3

77

20

00

11

SF

PC

WD

M-L

H

15

11

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

AP

D(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SL

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-3

0-2

8-8

1A

B3

77

20

00

12

SF

PC

WD

M-L

H

15

31

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

AP

D(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SL

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-3

0-2

8-8

1A

B3

77

20

00

13

SF

PC

WD

M-L

H

15

51

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

AP

D(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SL

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-3

0-2

8-8

1A

B3

77

20

00

14

SF

PC

WD

M-L

H

15

71

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

AP

D(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SL

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-3

0-2

8-8

1A

B3

77

20

00

15

SF

PC

WD

M-L

H

15

91

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

AP

D(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SL

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-3

0-2

8-8

1A

B3

77

20

00

16

SF

PC

WD

M-L

H

16

11

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

AP

D(<

2.7

G)

DD

MC

H1

61

0)

SL

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-3

0-2

8-8


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Table

2-15

SFP

specifications

(continued)

APN

Description

Mnem

onic

Fiber

Type

Launch

Pow

er

Receiver

Sensitivity

Re-

ceiver

Over-

load

Min

BO

L

(dBm

)

Max

BO

L

(dBm

)

Min

EO

L

(dBm

)

Max

EO

L

(dBm

)

Min

(dBm

)

EO

L

(dBm

)

Line

(O

TU

1)

1A

B3

76

37

00

05

SF

PS

S-1

6.1

A

AN

YR

AT

E

-4

0/+

85

(B

lack

an

d

Wh

ite

ST

M-1

6/O

C-

48

/O

TU

-1

Mu

ltirate

[<

2.7

G]

DD

M1

31

0n

m)

(S

S-1

6.1

A)

2G

5M

RS

FP

SS

-1

6.1

AS

SM

F-4

-1

-5

0-2

0-1

80

1A

B3

77

16

00

01

SF

PC

WD

M-S

H

14

71

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

PIN

(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SS

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-2

0.5

-1

8.5

0

1A

B3

77

16

00

02

SF

PC

WD

M-S

H

14

91

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

PIN

(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SS

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-2

0.5

-1

8.5

0

1A

B3

77

16

00

03

SF

PC

WD

M-S

H

15

11

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

PIN

(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SS

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-2

0.5

-1

8.5

0

1A

B3

77

16

00

04

SF

PC

WD

M-S

H

15

31

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

PIN

(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SS

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-2

0.5

-1

8.5

0

1A

B3

77

16

00

05

SF

PC

WD

M-S

H

15

51

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

PIN

(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SS

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-2

0.5

-1

8.5

0


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-81

Table

2-15

SFP

specifications

(continued)

APN

Description

Mnem

onic

Fiber

Type

Launch

Pow

er

Receiver

Sensitivity

Re-

ceiver

Over-

load

Min

BO

L

(dBm

)

Max

BO

L

(dBm

)

Min

EO

L

(dBm

)

Max

EO

L

(dBm

)

Min

(dBm

)

EO

L

(dBm

)

Line

(O

TU

1)

1A

B3

77

16

00

06

SF

PC

WD

M-S

H

15

71

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

PIN

(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SS

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-2

0.5

-1

8.5

0

1A

B3

77

16

00

07

SF

PC

WD

M-S

H

15

91

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

PIN

(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SS

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-2

0.5

-1

8.5

0

1A

B3

77

16

00

08

SF

PC

WD

M-S

H

16

11

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

PIN

(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SS

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-2

0.5

-1

8.5

0

1A

B1

55

07

00

01

CW

DM

4.5

5G

OT

U1

/S

FP

4F

C

CW

DM

4F

C-O

CS

SM

F-7

.4-2

-8

.4-1

-1

9.3

-1

7.3

-1

1A

B1

55

07

00

02

CW

DM

4.5

5G

OT

U1

/S

FP

4F

C

CW

DM

4F

C-O

CS

SM

F-7

.4-2

-8

.4-1

-1

9.3

-1

7.3

-1

1A

B1

55

07

00

03

CW

DM

4.5

5G

OT

U1

/S

FP

4F

C

CW

DM

4F

C-O

CS

SM

F-7

.4-2

-8

.4-1

-1

9.3

-1

7.3

-1

1A

B1

55

07

00

04

CW

DM

4.5

5G

OT

U1

/S

FP

4F

C

CW

DM

4F

C-O

CS

SM

F-7

.4-2

-8

.4-1

-1

9.3

-1

7.3

-1

1A

B1

55

07

00

05

CW

DM

4.5

5G

OT

U1

/S

FP

4F

C

CW

DM

4F

C-O

CS

SM

F-7

.4-2

-8

.4-1

-1

9.3

-1

7.3

-1

1A

B1

55

07

00

06

CW

DM

4.5

5G

OT

U1

/S

FP

4F

C

CW

DM

4F

C-O

CS

SM

F-7

.4-2

-8

.4-1

-1

9.3

-1

7.3

-1


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Table

2-15

SFP

specifications

(continued)

APN

Description

Mnem

onic

Fiber

Type

Launch

Pow

er

Receiver

Sensitivity

Re-

ceiver

Over-

load

Min

BO

L

(dBm

)

Max

BO

L

(dBm

)

Min

EO

L

(dBm

)

Max

EO

L

(dBm

)

Min

(dBm

)

EO

L

(dBm

)

Line

(O

TU

1)

1A

B1

55

07

00

07

CW

DM

4.5

5G

OT

U1

/S

FP

4F

C

CW

DM

4F

C-O

CS

SM

F-7

.4-2

-8

.4-1

-1

9.3

-1

7.3

-1

1A

B1

55

07

00

08

CW

DM

4.5

5G

OT

U1

/S

FP

4F

C

CW

DM

4F

C-O

CS

SM

F-7

.4-2

-8

.4-1

-1

9.3

-1

7.3

-1

1A

B3

83

36

00

03

DW

DM

4.5

5G

OT

U1

/S

FP

4F

C

DW

DM

4F

C-O

DS

SM

F-7

.4-2

-8

.4-1

-1

9.3

-1

7.3

-1

Clien

t

1A

B3

79

64

00

02

SF

PF

C/2

FC

/4

FC

13

00

NM

(B

&W

1G

/2

G/4

GF

ib

re

Ch

an

nel

DD

M

13

10

nm

(L

C-L

))

4F

CL

C-L

SS

MF

-7

.4-2

-8

.4-1

-1

9.1

-1

7.1

-1

1A

B3

79

64

00

03

(E

TR

)

SF

PF

C/2

FC

/4

FC

85

0N

M(B

&W

1G

/2

G/4

GF

ib

re

Ch

an

nel

DD

M

85

0n

m(S

N-I))

4F

CS

N-I

MM

F-8

-1

-9

0-1

6.1

-1

4.1

0

1A

B3

79

64

00

01

SF

PF

C/2

FC

/4

FC

85

0N

M(B

&W

1G

/2

G/4

GF

ib

re

Ch

an

nel

DD

M

85

0n

m(S

N-I))

4F

CS

N-I

MM

F-8

-1

-9

0-1

6.1

-1

4.1

0

1A

B3

76

72

00

02

SF

PG

BE

LX

-4

0/+

85

(B

&W

1G

bE

DD

M

13

10

nm

(1

00

0B

AS

E-L

X))

10

00

BA

SE

-L

XS

SM

F-8

-4

-9

-3

-2

1.5

-1

9.5

-3


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-83

Table

2-15

SFP

specifications

(continued)

APN

Description

Mnem

onic

Fiber

Type

Launch

Pow

er

Receiver

Sensitivity

Re-

ceiver

Over-

load

Min

BO

L

(dBm

)

Max

BO

L

(dBm

)

Min

EO

L

(dBm

)

Max

EO

L

(dBm

)

Min

(dBm

)

EO

L

(dBm

)

Line

(O

TU

1)

1A

B3

76

72

00

01

SF

PG

BE

SX

-4

0/+

85

(B

&W

1G

bE

DD

M8

50

nm

(1

00

0B

AS

E-S

X))

10

00

BA

SE

-S

XM

MF

-8

.5-1

-9

.50

-1

9-1

70

1A

B3

59

78

00

02

SF

PG

BE

T

-4

0/+

85

(1

00

0B

AS

E-T

)

10

00

B-T

1N

AN

AN

AN

AN

AN

AN

AN

A

1A

B3

76

72

00

03

B&

W

Gb

E(1

00

0B

AS

E-

ZX

/8

0k

m)

10

00

B-Z

XS

SM

F+

1+

40

5-2

6-2

4+

1

1A

B3

93

08

00

06

10

00

BA

SE

-B

X2

0

OC

12

/S

TM

-4

20

km

BiD

i

GE

-B

X2

0D

SS

MF

–5

-1

-6

0-2

2.5

-2

0.5

1

1A

B3

93

08

00

05

10

00

BA

SE

-B

X2

0

OC

12

/S

TM

-4

20

km

BiD

i

GE

-B

X2

0U

SS

MF

–5

-1

-6

0-2

2.5

-2

0.5

1

1A

B3

93

08

00

10

10

00

BA

SE

-B

X4

0

OC

12

/S

TM

-4

40

km

BiD

i

GE

-B

X4

0D

SS

MF

-2

+1

-3

+2

-2

7-2

5-3

1A

B3

93

08

00

09

10

00

BA

SE

-B

X4

0

OC

12

/S

TM

-4

40

km

BiD

i

GE

-B

X4

0U

SS

MF

-2

+1

-3

+2

-2

7-2

5-3

1A

B3

82

18

00

01

Fast

Eth

ern

et

SF

P

10

0B

AS

E-L

X1

0

10

0B

-L

X1

0S

S

MF

-1

9-1

5-2

0-1

4-3

3

(B

ER

1E

-1

0)

-3

1

(B

ER

1E

-1

2)

-3

1

(B

ER

1E

-1

0)

-2

7

(B

ER

1E

-1

2

-1

4

1A

B3

93

08

00

07

B&

W1

00

BX

/F

E

(4

0k

m-U

pstream

)

FE

-B

X4

0U

SS

MF

-4

-1

-5

0-3

4-3

2-3


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Table

2-15

SFP

specifications

(continued)

APN

Description

Mnem

onic

Fiber

Type

Launch

Pow

er

Receiver

Sensitivity

Re-

ceiver

Over-

load

Min

BO

L

(dBm

)

Max

BO

L

(dBm

)

Min

EO

L

(dBm

)

Max

EO

L

(dBm

)

Min

(dBm

)

EO

L

(dBm

)

Line

(O

TU

1)

1A

B3

10

14

00

01

SF

PF

E/F

DD

I

10

0B

AS

E-T

EL

W/E

xt

Tem

p

10

0B

AS

E-T

1N

AN

AN

AN

AN

AN

AN

AN

A

1A

B3

76

35

00

02

SF

PL

-1

.1-4

0/+

85

(B

&W

ST

M-1

/O

C-3

DD

M1

31

0n

m

(L

-1

.1/L

R-1

)

SL

-1

.1S

SM

F-4

-1

-5

0-3

6-3

4-1

0

1A

B3

76

35

00

03

AL

US

FP

L-1

.2

-4

0/+

85

SL

-1

.2S

SM

F-4

-1

-5

0-3

6-3

4-1

0

1A

B3

76

35

00

01

AL

US

FP

S-1

.1

-4

0/+

85

SS

-1

.1S

SM

F-1

4-9

-1

5-8

-3

0-2

8-1

0

1A

B3

76

36

00

02

SF

PL

-4

.1-4

0/+

85

(B

&W

ST

M-4

/O

C-1

2

DD

M1

31

0n

m

(L

-4

.1/L

R-1

))

SL

-4

.1S

SM

F-2

+1

-3

2-3

0-2

8-8

1A

B3

76

36

00

01

AL

US

FP

S-4

.1

-4

0/+

85

SS

-4

.1S

SM

F-1

4-9

-1

5-8

-3

0-2

8-8

1A

B3

76

37

00

05

SF

PS

S-1

6.1

A

AN

YR

AT

E

-4

0/+

85

(B

lack

an

d

Wh

ite

ST

M-1

6/O

C-

48

/O

TU

-1

Mu

ltirate

[<

2.7

G]

DD

M1

31

0n

m)

(S

S-1

6.1

A)

2G

5M

RS

FP

SS

-1

6.1

AS

SM

F-4

-1

-5

0-2

0-1

80


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-85

Table

2-15

SFP

specifications

(continued)

APN

Description

Mnem

onic

Fiber

Type

Launch

Pow

er

Receiver

Sensitivity

Re-

ceiver

Over-

load

Min

BO

L

(dBm

)

Max

BO

L

(dBm

)

Min

EO

L

(dBm

)

Max

EO

L

(dBm

)

Min

(dBm

)

EO

L

(dBm

)

Line

(O

TU

1)

1A

B3

77

16

00

01

SF

PC

WD

M-S

H

14

71

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

PIN

(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SS

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-2

0.5

-1

8.5

0

1A

B3

77

16

00

02

SF

PC

WD

M-S

H

14

91

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

PIN

(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SS

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-2

0.5

-1

8.5

0

1A

B3

77

16

00

03

SF

PC

WD

M-S

H

15

11

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

PIN

(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SS

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-2

0.5

-1

8.5

0

1A

B3

77

16

00

04

SF

PC

WD

M-S

H

15

31

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

PIN

(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SS

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-2

0.5

-1

8.5

0

1A

B3

77

16

00

05

SF

PC

WD

M-S

H

15

51

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

PIN

(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SS

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-2

0.5

-1

8.5

0

1A

B3

77

16

00

06

SF

PC

WD

M-S

H

15

71

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

PIN

(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SS

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-2

0.5

-1

8.5

0

1A

B3

77

16

00

07

SF

PC

WD

M-S

H

15

91

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

PIN

(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SS

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-2

0.5

-1

8.5

0


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Table

2-15

SFP

specifications

(continued)

APN

Description

Mnem

onic

Fiber

Type

Launch

Pow

er

Receiver

Sensitivity

Re-

ceiver

Over-

load

Min

BO

L

(dBm

)

Max

BO

L

(dBm

)

Min

EO

L

(dBm

)

Max

EO

L

(dBm

)

Min

(dBm

)

EO

L

(dBm

)

Line

(O

TU

1)

1A

B3

77

16

00

08

SF

PC

WD

M-S

H

16

11

NM

(C

WD

M

2.5

GM

ultirate

PIN

(<

2.7

G)

DD

M)

SS

-1

6.2

CS

SM

F+

1+

40

+5

-2

0.5

-1

8.5

0

1A

B3

76

37

00

01

B&

W

ST

M-1

6/O

C-

48

/O

UT

-1

SI-1

6.1

SS

MF

-4

-1

-5

0-2

0-1

80

1A

B3

76

37

00

04

SF

PL

-1

6.2

-5

/+

85

(B

lack

an

dW

hite

ST

M-1

6/O

C-4

8

DD

M1

31

0n

m)

(L

-1

6.2

/L

R-2

)

SL

-1

6.2

SS

MF

-1

+2

-2

+3

-3

0-2

8-9

1A

B3

76

37

00

08

(E

TR

)

SF

PL

-1

6.2

-4

0/+

85

(B

lack

an

d

Wh

ite

ST

M-1

6/O

C-4

8

DD

M1

31

0n

m)

(L

-1

6.2

/L

R-2

)

SL

-1

6.2

SS

MF

-1

+2

-2

+3

-3

0-2

8-9

Notes:

1.

100B

AS

E-T

/1000B

AS

E-T

are

electrical

SF

Ps

and

the

given

specifications

are

not

applicable

to

them

.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-87

Optical filter insertion loss specifications

Table 2-16 SFC1 Optical Insertion Loss

SFC1 Loss Value Unit

Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch i _OUT 1.5 dB

Insertion Loss OMD-In → EXP_OUT 1.3 dB

Insertion Loss Exp-In → OMD-OUT 0.8 dB

Insertion Loss Ch i_In → OMD-OUT 1.0 dB



Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch i _OUT 1.8 dB

Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch EXP_OUT 1.5 dB

Insertion Loss EXP-In → OMD-OUT 0.8 dB

Insertion Loss Ch i_In → OMD-OUT 1.3 dB



Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch 4/8 _OUT 1.4 dB


Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch 2/6 _OUT 2 dB


Insertion Loss OMD-In → Exp_OUT 2.2 dB

Insertion Loss Exp-In → OMD-OUT 1.7 dB

Insertion Loss Ch 4/8_In → OMD-OUT 1.8 dB






Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch 1_OUT 1.4 dB



....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Table 2-19 SFC8 Optical Insertion Loss (continued)


Insertion Loss OMD-In → Ch 2/6 _OUT 2 dB







Insertion Loss Ch 1_In→ OMD-OUT 0.9 dB

Insertion Loss Ch 2_In → OMD-OUT 1.2 dB








....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




2-89


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3 3Installation and System

turn up

Overview

Purpose

This chapter includes procedures necessary for installation and provisioning 1830 PSS-1

MD4H Edge Device, including mounting, cabling, powering and provisioning. Additional

procedures such as installing pluggable modules and cleaning optical fibers are also

included in this chapter.

Illustrations in procedures relating to physical installation of the PSS-1 depict the PSS-1

GBEH. However, the procedures for basic physical installation are identical and can be

applied for all PSS-1 variants.

Installation covers the physical mounting of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device, the

running and connecting of power cables, interconnecting cables, alarm cables, and as

required, communication cables.

System turn up covers establishing of the system parameters, synchronization and to

provision a network element (NE) to get it ready to operate in the network.

Contents

Before you begin 3-3

Procedure 3-1: Vertical installation of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device 3-6

Procedure 3-2: Rack installation of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device 3-11

Procedure 3-3: Powering and provisioning an 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device 3-12

Procedure 3-4: SFP module extraction 3-20

Procedure 3-5: LC fiber removal 3-22

Procedure 3-6: Verify installation and seat packs 3-23

Procedure 3-7: Connect to the NE and initialize database 3-24

Procedure 3-8: Connect to the NE for CLI access 3-29

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-1

Procedure 3-9: Configure the software environment and load; commit the

software

3-31

Procedure 3-10: Set the NE to operate in SDH mode 3-37

Procedure 3-11: Set the loopback IP address 3-38

Procedure 3-12: Configure the LAN1 Ethernet port 3-39

Procedure 3-13: Set the network element date and time 3-40

Procedure 3-14: Update firmware on all circuit packs 3-41

Procedure 3-15: Configure additional system properties 3-42

Procedure 3-16: Configure GNE for management system access 3-43

Procedure 3-17: Configure topological links 3-50

Procedure 3-18: Verify system provisioning 3-51

Procedure 3-19: Example configuration of FTP server 3-52

Installation and System turn up Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Before you begin

Before you begin

Prior to performing any procedures in this chapter, review Chapter 1, “Safety”.

Note: Any Command Line Interface (CLI) commands associated with carrying out

procedures are listed in this chapter. CLI commands are in bold type text and are

entered by the user performing the procedures; example: <CTRL>B Go back one

character on the CLI screen display.

Installation and System turn up Before you begin

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-3

Translation — VCCI statement

This is a Class A product based on the standard of the VCCI Council. If this equipment is

used in a domestic environment, radio interference may occur, in which case, the user

may be required to take corrective actions.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Safety labeling

Figure 3-1, “Showing compliance and safety warnings” (p. 3-5) shows an example of the

Alcatel-Lucent labeling on the 1830 PSS-1 Edge device. This label provides compliance

and safety warnings. Please check the labeling on your specific PSS-1 unit for details that

apply to your product.

Figure 3-1 Showing compliance and safety warnings


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-5

Procedure 3-1: Vertical installation of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge

Device

Purpose

A mounting kit is available with the hardware needed to install an 1830 PSS-1 MD4H

Edge Device on a vertical surface. (See Table 2-11, “1830 PSS-1 MD4H installation kits”

(p. 2-73).)

Use this procedure and the following procedures to install and provision 1830 PSS-1

MD4H Edge Device. These procedures reference the detailed level procedures for

performing the specific tasks required.

Required equipment for Installation and Provisioning

• Personal Computer (PC), refer to Procedure 4-2: “Personal computer requirements

and provisioning” (p. 4-4), for PC requirements and to establish a CLI session.

• #2 Phillips screw driver

• T8, T20, and T25 Torx drivers

• Drill with 2.5 mm drill bit (vertical installation only)

• a fiber scope for LC fibers

• an ESD wrist strap

• an SFP removal tool

• Necessary fiber cleaning equipment, refer to Procedure 4-9: “Cleaning optical

connectors” (p. 4-15)

Procedure

Complete the following steps to install 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device on a vertical

surface.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Determine the mounting location.

Note: It is recommended that you use plywood approximately 3/4 in. (19 mm) thick

as a mounting surface.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Position the vertical mounting bracket on the vertical mounting surface, and use it as a

template to mark the location for a single, first mounting screw.

Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-1: Vertical installation of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H

Edge Device

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Using a 2.5mm bit, drill the hole for the first mounting screw.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Place one of the #10 screws, with one of the supplied washers, and screw it 80% of the

way into the hole.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Hang the vertical mounting bracket on the first screw.

Figure 3-2 Marking initial mounting screw location

Figure 3-3 Initial mounting screw placement


Edge Device

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-7

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Align the bracket and use it as a template to mark the position of the remaining screws.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Drill the holes for the remaining screws, and install the screws with the supplied washers,

make sure that all screws, including the first one are tight.

Figure 3-4 Hanging vertical mounting bracket for alignment

Figure 3-5 Marking screw placement for vertical mounting bracket


Edge Device

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Gently lower the unit into the mounting bracket.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Push the unit toward the mounting surface until the unit is vertical.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Secure the unit to the bracket using three of the provided M2.5 x 5 mm pan head screws

on each side.

Figure 3-6 Securing all mounting screws

Figure 3-7 Placement of unit in vertical mounting bracket


Edge Device

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-9

Figure 3-8 Securing unit in vertical mounting bracket


Edge Device

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-2: Rack installation of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge

Device

Procedure

Mounting kits are available with the hardware needed to install an 1830 PSS-1 MD4H

Edge Device in a standard EIA, ANSI, or ETSI equipment rack. (See Table 2-11, “1830

PSS-1 MD4H installation kits” (p. 2-73).)

Complete the following steps to install 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device in an equipment

rack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Determine the mounting location.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Mount bay frame brackets to unit using 3 T8 screws per side.

Note: There are two sets of threaded holes on each side of the unit. Use the holes

closest to the front for a 2 ¼” protrusion, or the rear holes for a 5” protrusion.

Front holes are also used for ETSI 300 mm deep mounting.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Using the screws provided (EAI and ANSI kits come with four 12-24 screws, ETSI

comes with four M6x1 screws), secure the unit to the desired position in the bay frame

with each screw installed loosely to allow proper positioning of the screw holes.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Once all 4 screws are in place, tighten them securely.

Figure 3-9 Bay frame bracket installation

Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-2: Rack installation of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge

Device

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-11

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-3: Powering and provisioning an 1830 PSS-1 MD4H

Edge Device

Powering and provisioning procedure

Complete the following steps to apply power and provision 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge

Device.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device is suitable for Common Building Network (CBN) or

Isolated Building Network (IBN) applications. GR-295-CORE requirements apply for

IBN applications.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Connect shelf ground wire, if applicable, to the back of the 1830 PSS-1 Edge Device. A

ground cable is not included with the equipment and must be supplied separately. The

ground wire should be 14 AWG (2.0 mm2

cross section) at a minimum and have a

FCI/Burndy YAV10-2TC10, or equivalent, 14 AWG two-hole lug with 0.625 in. spacing.

Note: Use only the M4 screws provided with the equipment for attaching the ground

cable to the rear of the chassis. Screws longer than 8 mm may damage the equipment.

Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-3: Powering and provisioning an 1830 PSS-1

MD4H Edge Device

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Bay frame must be properly prepared for grounding by removing all paint and

non-conductive coatings, exposing bare metal at ground lug attachment point. Bare metal

must be clean and coated with anti-oxidant prior to attaching ground lug.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Connect one end of customer-provided copper ground cable to bay frame using only

thread-forming shelf mounting screws and customer-provided lug.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Measure resistance between the case of the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device and the

CBN or IBN. The resistance must be less than 1 ohm.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Ensure power supply for device is shut off at BDFB or AC power supply.

Note: The AC power supply must be provided with 15 A Max over-current protection

to protect the 16 AWG (1.5 mm2) wiring to the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device.

Figure 3-10 Rear ground attachment points

CAUTION

Use screws pro

vided withth

isequipment fo

r ground connectio

n

Use screws pro

vided withth

isequipment fo

r ground connectio

n

Screws longer th

an 8mmmay damage th

isequipment

Screws longer th

an 8mmmay damage th

isequipment


MD4H Edge Device

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-13

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Connect A and B power cables to customer provided power supply cables using table

Table 3-1, “Office power connection and cable color” (p. 3-14)

Note: In the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device, the battery return conductor is an

Isolated DC return (DC-I).

Table 3-1 Office power connection and cable color

Office power connection Cable color

A Battery - Blue

A Return + Red

A Ground Black (NAR)

Yellow/Green (ETSI)

B Battery - Blue

B Return + Red

B Ground Black (NAR)

Yellow/Green (ETSI)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Test continuity of A and B power cables using Table 3-2, “Test and expected results”

(p. 3-15) for each cable.


MD4H Edge Device

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Table 3-2 Test and expected results

Test point 1 Test point 2 Expected measurement

Pin 1 Pin 3 Open circuit

Pin 3 Pin 2 Minimal closed circuit, dependent on wire length

(~1 ohm)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Connect power cables to power filters. Route cables to the left to provide access to filter

ports and for air filter replacement.

Figure 3-11 Power Cable


MD4H Edge Device

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-15

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Insert a half-size pack adapter, if required (consult shelf-specific, customer

documentation). There are two sizes of filter circuit packs, a full size 8 channel pack and

half size 4, 2, or 1 channel packs. Half-size packs require that a half-size pack adapter be

installed prior to inserting the filter circuit pack(s). The half-size pack adapter is held in

place by the filter circuit packs.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Insert Filter circuit pack(s) as specified by the customer in shelf-specific documentation.

If only one half-size circuit pack is to be installed, install it on the left side.

Figure 3-12 Power cables installed

Figure 3-13 Half size pack adapter


MD4H Edge Device

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Note: Figure 3-14, “Filter pack installed” (p. 3-17), shows installation in a PSS-1

GBEH. Installation is the same in PSS-1 MD4H and PSS-1 MSAH units.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Insert blanks in any unused filter slots. If no filter is installed, insert the full-size blank.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Turn on A and B power at BDFB or AC power supply.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Verify power connections using Table 3-3, “Power connection test and Results” (p. 3-17)

Table 3-3 Power connection test and Results

Test Expected Results

Shut off power A at BDFB or AC power

supply, with corresponding power B turned on

Power Filter A status LED extinguishes

Power Filter B status LED remains lit

Shut off power B at BDFB or AC power

supply, with corresponding power A turned on

Power Filter B status LED extinguishes

Power Filter A status LED remains lit

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Set the Shelf ID using Shelf ID selector switch on lower left of shelf. Choose from the

options in Table 3-4, “Shelf ID and Settings” (p. 3-18).

Figure 3-14 Filter pack installed


MD4H Edge Device

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-17

Table 3-4 Shelf ID and Settings

Shelf Shelf ID setting

Master 1

Peer shelf 1 2

Peer shelf 2 3

Peer shelf 3 4

Peer shelf 4 5

Peer shelf 5 6

Peer shelf 6 7

Peer shelf 7 8

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Verify that the PSS-1 air filter is installed (see Procedure 4-13: “Fan air filter

replacement” (p. 4-23)).

Note: The PSS-1 air filter should be removed when using the unit in Outside Plant

Applications (-40C to +65C). The Outside Plant application requires cabinets to either

have their own filters or be a closed-loop system.

Figure 3-15 Shelf ID


MD4H Edge Device

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Connect shelf-to-shelf LAN cables (not supported in this release). LAN cables should be

“daisy chained” from port “LAN E2” of the master shelf to port “LAN E1” of Peer shelf

1, then from Port “LAN E2” of Peer shelf 1 to port “LAN E1” of Peer shelf 2, and so on.

Cables should not enter and exit directly to the right, as this will block removal and

replacement of the air filter for maintenance.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Insert SFPs, as applicable, using shelf-specific documentation from the customer.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Inspect and clean the SFP modules after insertion.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Inspect, clean (as needed), and connect fibers to all required ports, per shelf-specific

customer documentation. All fibers should exit to the left, if possible, to allow access to

air filter for periodic replacement. Turn angled boots on each fiber toward the direction

the fiber exits the shelf.

Note: PSS-1 GBEH shelf shown above.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 Fiber slack should be coiled neatly, using the hook-and-loop fasteners included in the

installation kit.

Figure 3-16 Fibers


MD4H Edge Device

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-19

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-4: SFP module extraction

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Insert SFP extraction tool into SFP.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Gently push in bottom wedge on SFP extraction tool to release SFP retention spring.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Pull on body of SFP extraction tool to remove SFP.

Figure 3-17 Push in wedge

Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-4: SFP module extraction

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Remove SFP from extraction tool by depressing blue locking clips on SFP extraction tool.

Figure 3-18 Pull out SFP

Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-4: SFP module extraction

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-21

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-5: LC fiber removal

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Grasp LC fiber connector with LC connector end of XFP extractor/LC connector tool.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Squeeze XFP extractor/LC connector tool until blue locking tab on LC connector is

depressed

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Pull on XFP extractor/LC connector tool to remove LC connector.

Figure 3-19 LC fiber tool

Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-5: LC fiber removal

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-6: Verify installation and seat packs

Objective

Ensure that the NE has been installed as described in the previous procedures and is ready

for initial set up.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Refer to the site documentation and verify that all modules are present and slotted

correctly. Verify the fibers are properly run between packs.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Check all power and electrical cabling to be sure they are run properly.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Verify that the shelf is powered up and the green led is lit on both power filter modules.

Verify that the fans are running.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Fully seat all circuit packs in the shelf if they have not already been seated.

Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-6: Verify installation and seat packs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-23

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-7: Connect to the NE and initialize database

Purpose

You can connect directly to the network element (NE) to access the web interface

(webUI). No client software is needed on your PC, only Internet Explorer.

The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device will ship with software and a factory image. This

procedure will provide the first steps for establishing connection to the NE using webUI

and creating an initial database.

Procedure

Note: SUN Java Runtime Environment must be installed on the PC.

Note: Popup blockers must be turned off in Internet Explorer.

Note: The network element is equipped with a DHCP server. Your LAN port must be

configured to obtain an IP address automatically.

You can connect a computer (typically a laptop) directly to a network element to access

the webUI using Internet Explorer via the CIT port on the FAN unit.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the CIT port on the FAN unit. Connect the other

end of the cable to the Ethernet port on your PC.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Open a PC command window and type ipconfig and <Enter>. Verify that the IP address

assigned by the NE to your PC is 172.16.0.2. Refer to Figure 3-20, “PC command

window” (p. 3-25).

Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-7: Connect to the NE and initialize database

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Launch Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the CIT port in the Address bar. The

default address for an uncommissioned NE is 172.16.0.1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Go. The browser connects to the network element and the webUI login window is

displayed. See Figure 3-21, “Login Screen” (p. 3-26).

Figure 3-20 PC command window


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-25

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Enter admin in the “User:” field and admin in the “Password:” field. Then click the

“Login” button.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 A Warning message will appear similar to Figure 3-22, “WebUI uninitialized database

warning” (p. 3-27), indicating that the database is uninitialized.

Figure 3-21 Login Screen


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click OK and the system will automatically restart after initialization.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 After the restart is complete, the system will prompt you for a new NE name as shown in

Figure 3-23, “WebUI NE name prompt” (p. 3-28). Type the NE name provided in the site

documentation.

Figure 3-22 WebUI uninitialized database warning


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-27

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Click Submit and the system will restart once again. The restart will take approximately 2

minutes. A window will appear showing the restart progress as shown in Figure 3-24,

“WebUI NE restart progress window” (p. 3-28).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 After restart is complete, the webUI interface will open with the system properties view.

Figure 3-23 WebUI NE name prompt

Figure 3-24 WebUI NE restart progress window


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-8: Connect to the NE for CLI access

Overview

After completing the database initialization using webUI, you can connect directly to the

network element to access the CLI. No client software is needed on your PC for either

application, only a Telnet application. The remaining procedures in this chapter will be

completed using CLI.

Procedure


the CLI using the CIT port on the FAN unit. On multi-shelf network elements, the CIT

port is active on the master shelf only. Note that this is the same connection used for the

webUI interface.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 If not already connected, connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the CIT port on the

FAN unit. Connect the other end of the cable to the Ethernet port on your PC.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Use a Telnet application on your PC and open a Telnet session connected to the IP address

of the CIT port. The default address for an uncommissioned NE is 172.16.0.1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Hit <Enter> and the “login:” prompt will appear. Type cli and <Enter>.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Type cli at the “Password:” prompt and <Enter>.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 This starts the cli interface, and another “Username:” prompt will appear. Type admin and

<Enter>.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 At the “Password:” prompt type admin and <Enter>. This will bring up the following

warning notice.

1830 PSS-1, WAVELENGTH TRACKER

Alcatel-Lucent

(c) 2008 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.

Welcome to the CLI

Warning Notice

This system is restricted solely to Alcatel-Lucent authorized

users for legitimate business purposes only. The actual or

attempted unauthorized access, use, or modification of this

Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-8: Connect to the NE for CLI access

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-29

system is strictly prohibited by Alcatel-Lucent. Unauthorized

users are subject to Company disciplinary proceedings and/or

criminal and civil penalties under state, federal, or other

applicable domestic and foreign laws. Use of this system may be

monitored and recorded for administrative and security reasons.

Anyone accessing this system expressly consents to such

monitoring and is advised that if monitoring reveals possible

evidence of criminal activity, Alcatel-Lucent may provide the

evidence of such activity to law enforcement officials. All

users must comply with Alcatel-Lucent Corporate Instructions

regarding the protection of Alcatel-Lucent information assets.

Do you acknowledge? (Y/N)?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Type Y and <Enter>.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 The current alarm summary will be displayed followed by the NE# prompt. CLI

commands can now be entered. Type ? for a list of commands.

Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-8: Connect to the NE for CLI access

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-9: Configure the software environment and load;

commit the software

Purpose

The NE is shipped with software pre-loaded. However, the software version that is

pre-loaded on the cards may not be the same as the software version that will be run in the

network. You must therefore perform the following tasks to load and commit the correct

software load on the NE.

The PC connected to the NE must have an FTP server running. The first procedure is to

prepare the FTP server on the NE. Then follow the CLI procedure for software download

and activation.

FTP server preparation

Note: Refer to Procedure 3-19: “Example configuration of FTP server” (p. 3-52) for

more detailed instructions on configuring an ftp server.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Start the FTP server application on your PC and create a user account. Record the userid

and password established for the account.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Establish a root directory for the server and make sure it has read and write privileges.

You may create a folder in the root directory that will contain the NE software.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Copy the folder and sub-folders with the NE software into the ftp root directory

established above.

Note: The software folder name will have the format 1830PSS1-<ver>, where <ver>

is the version of the software to be loaded. There should also be two sub-folders

named “1830PSS1” and “1830PSS1M”. The software will typically be provided on a

CD.

PC preparation

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Open Windows Firewall from the Control Panel. See Figure 3-25, “Windows Firewall

settings” (p. 3-32).

Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-9: Configure the software environment and

load; commit the software

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-31

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select Off. Then click OK.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Open a PC command window and type ipconfig and <Enter>. Note the IP address

assigned by the NE to your PC. This will be used later in the procedure. See Figure 3-20,

“PC command window” (p. 3-25).

Figure 3-25 Windows Firewall settings



....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

CLI procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Type config software server ip and <Enter>.

Where <ip> is the ip address of the PC with the FTP server. This is the ip address you

obtained when using the ipconfig command.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Type config software server userid <userid> and <Enter>.

Where <userid> is the userid of the user account defined on the ftp server.

Sample output below.

“Enter password:”

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Type <pw> and <Enter>.

Where <pw> is the password for the FTP server.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Type config software server root <path> and <Enter>.

Where <path> is the path to the NE software relative to the server root directory.

Note: If the software folder was copied directly into the root directory, enter / for the

<path>.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Type config software server detail and <Enter>.


Software Server Protocol : FTP

Software Server IP : 172.16.0.2

Software Server Userid : sw1

Software Server Root Directory : /

Verify the settings are correct.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Type config software upgrade status and <Enter>.


Software Upgrade Information:



Committed Release :

Working Release Directory :



....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-33

Working Release : 1830PSS1-0.00-2

Active Release : 1830PSS1-0.00-2/

Operation :

Operation Status :

Upgrade Path Available : True

Software Download Script (Timezone: ):

Verify the current active software is an older release than the software that you are

loading.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Type config software upgrade manual audit <releasedir> no backup and <Enter>.

Where <releasedir> is the directory name on the PC containing the software.

This will check the path and verify that the system is ready for upgrade.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


A listing of packs will be displayed along with the status showing which packs need to be

upgraded. Sample output below.



Software Server Root Directory : /SVT/

Committed Release :

Working Release Directory : 1830PSS1-0.00-2/

Working Release : 1830PSS1-0.00-2

Active Release : 1830PSS1-0.00-2

Operation : Audit

Operation Status : Completed

Upgrade Path Available : True


Stage=0 Step=1 SH/SL: 1/1 CARDTYPE: EC

ACTION: Audit node Completed 100% complete

RESULT: Success

Stage=1 Step=0 SH/SL: 0/0 CARDTYPE: Empty

ACTION: Transfer to disk Planned 0% complete

RESULT: None

Stage=2 Step=0 SH/SL: 1/1 CARDTYPE: EC

ACTION: Activate Planned 0% complete

RESULT: None

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Repeat Step 8 until the Operation Status indicates Completed. Verify the Upgrade Path

Available changes to True.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Type config software upgrade manual load and <Enter>.



....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




This will transfer the software to the NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Watch for the following lines.

...

Operation : Load

Operation Status : In Progress 0%

...

Continue to execute the status command until the Operation Status shows “Completed.”

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Type config software upgrade manual activate and <Enter>.

This will activate the software on the 1830 PSS-1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 The NE will reboot and the Telnet connection will drop. Wait about 2 minutes after the

fan speed drops back down to normal speed and log back into the NE. Refer to Procedure

3-8: “Connect to the NE for CLI access” (p. 3-29).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...

Operation : Activate


...

Continue to execute the status command until the Operation Status shows Completed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 Type config software upgrade manual audit <releasedir> nobackup and <Enter>.

Where <releasedir> is the directory name on the PC containing the software.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Type config software upgrade commit and <Enter>.

This will commit the software to be the primary release.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................





....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-35

...

Operation : Activate


.

Continue to execute the status command until the Operations Status shows Completed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 After the last status command is executed, verify the new software release is displayed as

the committed, working, and active release. See the sample output below.




Committed Release : 1830PSS1-1.10-0

Working Release Directory : 1830PSS1-1.10-0/

Working Release :

Active Release : 1830PSS1-1.10-0/

Operation : Commit

Operation Status : Completed

Upgrade Path Available : False




....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-10: Set the NE to operate in SDH mode

Background

The network element defaults to SONET mode. You need to perform this procedure only

if you want the network element to operate in SDH mode.

This procedure should only be executed when a system is first turned up.

Procedure

If you want the network element to operate in SONET mode, skip to Procedure 3-11: “Set

the loopback IP address” (p. 3-38).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Type show version and <Enter>.

Sample output:

Software Version: 1830PSS1-2.0

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Copy the string after “Software Version:” This will be used as the password for the SDH

mode command.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Type config admin mode sdh <pw> and <Enter>.

Where <pw> is the password copied in the previous step.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 The following Warning will appear.

WARNING: Changing the SONET/SDH mode will cause the database to be

cleared, the node to be cold reset and all services to be

deleted.

Enter 'yes' to confirm, 'no' to cancel:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Type yes and <Enter>.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 You will be logged out. The procedure is complete.

Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-10: Set the NE to operate in SDH mode

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-37

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-11: Set the loopback IP address

Purpose

Each network element (NE) requires a loopback address for IP connectivity. The default

loopback IP address for a new NE is 172.16.1.1/32.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Type config interface loop ip <address>/<mask> and <Enter>.

Where <address> is the IP address and <mask> represents the subnet mask following the

CIDR format. Obtain this information from the site documentation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 The following Warning message will appear.

WARNING: Changing the loopback IP address will result

in a warm reset of this network element.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 The CLI session will be terminated.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Follow the CLI login procedure described in Procedure 3-8: “Connect to the NE for CLI

access” (p. 3-29).

Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-11: Set the loopback IP address

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-12: Configure the LAN1 Ethernet port

Background

The LAN1 port is used to connect to the External Management System (EMS) and is the

main control interface to the NE. The signaling format is 10/100BaseT.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Type config interface fan lan1 ip <address>/<mask> and <Enter>.



Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-12: Configure the LAN1 Ethernet port

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-39

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-13: Set the network element date and time

Purpose

You can set the network element (NE) date and time manually using the network

element’s internal clock, and you can configure the unit to get this information from an

NTP server, if one is available.

Procedure (manual)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Type config general date <date> and <Enter>.

Where <date> is of the format yyyy mm dd.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Type config general time <time> and <Enter>.

Where <time> is of the format hh mm ss, and hh is between 0 and 23.

Procedure (NTP)

You can configure each network element to use up to three NTP servers, indexed by

number. The network element automatically selects the highest stratum NTP server with

which it can reliably communicate. If the network element loses communications with an

NTP server, it automatically selects the next best available server.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Type config general ntp add <index> <IP_address> and <Enter>.

Where <index> is of the index number for the server and <IP_address> is the IP address

of the server.

Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-13: Set the network element date and time

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-14: Update firmware on all circuit packs

Purpose

This procedure will ensure that the latest firmware is uploaded to all the installed circuit

packs. This is done by performing a cold reboot on the NE.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Type config admin resetNE cold and <Enter>.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 The following Warning message will appear.

WARNING: You are about to perform a cold system restart.

This is a service affecting command.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 The NE will reboot. The reboot will take several minutes, depending on the number of

circuit packs requiring a firmware upgrade.

Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-14: Update firmware on all circuit packs

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-41

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-15: Configure additional system properties

Purpose

This procedure allows changes to system properties including temperature units and

AINS timer. The AINS timer value is system-wide and will become the default for all

ports; the value can be overridden on each individual port.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 To change the AINS timer value, type config general ainstimer <hours> and <Enter>.

Where <hours> is of the format <hh> [<mm>]. You can also type config general

ainstimer help for the default value and range.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 The temperature unit defaults to Celsius. To change the temperature units to Fahrenheit,

type config admin tempUnits fahrenheit and <Enter>.

Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-15: Configure additional system properties

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-16: Configure GNE for management system

access

Background

The NE can connect to an Element Management System (EMS) via the OAMP port if it is

to act as a Gateway Network Element (GNE). The IP address must be provisioned and the

OAMP port enabled to use this port. In addition, an IP route must be established to route

connections to the RNEs.

Purpose

This procedure will provision and enable the OAMP port so that the NE can act as a

Gateway Network Element. The procedure will also provision the IP route information to

allow connection to RNEs. Not all NEs (that is, RNEs) require this provisioning. Refer to

the site documentation.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 If using WebUI continue to “WebUI Procedure” (p. 3-43).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 If using CLI continue to “CLI procedure” (p. 3-49).

WebUI Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Expand “Shelf 1” in the equipment tree and then expand “slot 6 FAN”.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select Lan1. The Lan1 port provisioning window will appear as shown in Figure 3-26,

“WebUI Lan1 port provisioning” (p. 3-44).

Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-16: Configure GNE for management system

access

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-43

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter the IP address and subnet mask as indicated in the site documentation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Check the Port Enabled check-box.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click the “Submit” button.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Select Administration -> Networking -> IP Routes from the top menu as shown in Figure

3-27, “WebUI IP routes menu” (p. 3-45).

Figure 3-26 WebUI Lan1 port provisioning


access

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 The IP Routes screen is displayed as shown in Figure 3-28, “WebUI IP routes window”

(p. 3-46).

Figure 3-27 WebUI IP routes menu


access

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-45

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click the “Create” button. The Create IP Routes screen is displayed as shown in Figure

3-29, “WebUI Create IP route window” (p. 3-47).

Figure 3-28 WebUI IP routes window


access

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Enter the parameters based on the site documentation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Click the “Apply” button.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Verify the new IP route is now shown in the IP routes screen as shown in Figure 3-30,

“WebUI IP routes window with new route” (p. 3-48).

Figure 3-29 WebUI Create IP route window


access

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-47

Figure 3-30 WebUI IP routes window with new route


access

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

CLI procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Configure the LAN1 Ethernet port. (Also see, Procedure 3-12: “Configure the LAN1

Ethernet port” (p. 3-39).)

Type config interface fan lan1 ip <address>/<mask> and <Enter>.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Type config interface fan lan1 state up and <Enter>, to set the state of the interface to up.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Type config interface fan lan1 rou en and <Enter>, to enable routing on the interface.


access

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-49

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-17: Configure topological links

Purpose

Before transmission can be established on the system, all the fiber connections must be

provisioned on the NE as topological links. Both internal and external fiber connections

must be defined.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Refer to site documentation and the physical fibering on the NE to determine all the fiber

connections. Obtain a list of these fiber connections as a reference.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Choose an internal fiber connection to provision and type config interface topology

<sh/sl/pt> internal <sh/sl/pt> and <Enter>.

Where <sh/sl/pt> is the shelf slot and port on each end of the fiber.

For example: config interface topology <?> internal <?>

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Check off the fiber connection from the reference list.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If there are additional internal fiber connections to be defined, go back to Step 2. If not,

continue.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 For each external fiber connection (connection to adjacent network elements), type the

following command:

config interface topology <sh/sl/pt> external <ip> <sh2/sl2/pt2> and <Enter>.

Where <sh/sl/pt> is the shelf, slot, and port connection on the NE of the external line

fiber (typically, the OMD port).

<ip> is the loopback ip address of the adjacent NE at the far end of the line fiber.

<sh/sl2/pt2> is the shelf, slot, and port of the connection on the adjacent NE of the

external line fiber.

Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-17: Configure topological links

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-18: Verify system provisioning

Purpose

This procedure will verify that the network element (NE) is installed and turned-up

correctly and that all system provisioning is correct.

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Capture all the logging of this session and save for record keeping.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Type alm and <Enter>.

Verify there are no unexpected alarms on the network element.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Type show condition and <Enter>.

Verify there are no unexpected conditions on the network element.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Type show software upgrade status and <Enter>.

Verify the correct version of software has been successfully committed on the NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Type show general detail and <Enter>.

Verify system details are correct, including IP addresses, date and time, and SONET/SDH

mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Type show shelf * and <Enter>.

Verify the shelves are properly displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Type show card inventory * and <Enter>.

Verify all installed circuit packs are properly displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Type show interface topology * and <Enter>.

Verify all topological links have been provisioned correctly.

Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-18: Verify system provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-51

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 3-19: Example configuration of FTP server

Background

There are many different FTP server software applications available. This procedure

provides detailed configuration instructions using one of the most common platforms,

FileZilla. However, the steps can be used as a reference for configuring other FTP server

applications. Consult the documentation for your specific FTP server software for

detailed instructions.

Cisco TFTP is the preferred TFTP server software as it is widely used.

Purpose

This procedure provides more detail to the steps listed in “FTP server preparation”

(p. 3-31).

Prerequisites

The FTP server application must be downloaded and installed on the PC. The FileZilla

server software can be downloaded from http://filezillaproject.

org/download.php?type=server.

Procedure

Disable the firewall on the PC

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Open Windows Firewall from the Control Panel. See Figure 3-25, “Windows Firewall

settings” (p. 3-32)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select Off. Then click OK.

FTP server configuration using FileZilla

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Start the FileZilla server software. The Connect to Server screen will open as shown in

Figure 3-31, “FileZilla connect to server screen” (p. 3-53).

Installation and System turn up Procedure 3-19: Example configuration of FTP server

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Leave the default settings and click OK.

Figure 3-31 FileZilla connect to server screen


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-53

Result: The server screen will open as shown in Figure 3-32, “FileZilla server screen”

(p. 3-54).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Select Edit -> Groups from the top menu as shown in Figure 3-33, “FileZilla groups

menu” (p. 3-55).

Figure 3-32 FileZilla server screen


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Result: The Groups screen opens as shown in Figure 3-33, “FileZilla groups menu”

(p. 3-55).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 With the General page highlighted in the left bar, click Add on the right.

Figure 3-33 FileZilla groups menu


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-55

Result: The Add user group screen will open as shown in Figure 3-34, “FileZilla add

group screen” (p. 3-56).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Enter a group name in the dialogue box and click OK.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Select the Shared folders page in the left bar and the Groups screen changes as shown in

Figure 3-35, “FileZilla groups shared folders screen” (p. 3-57).

Figure 3-34 FileZilla add group screen


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Click Add in the center pane, Shared Folders section.

Figure 3-35 FileZilla groups shared folders screen


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-57

Result: A browse screen opens as shown in Figure 3-36, “FileZilla browse folder

screen” (p. 3-58).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Browse to the folder where the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 software is or will be copied

to, and select it. Then click OK.

Note: You may wish to create a new folder for the software before performing this

step.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 The folder will appear in the directories window. With the newly added folder selected,

make sure the Read and Write check-boxes are checked.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Click Set as home dir.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 Click OK to close the window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

14 Select Edit -> Users from the top menu as shown in Figure 3-37, “FileZilla users menu”

(p. 3-59).

Figure 3-36 FileZilla browse folder screen


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Figure 3-37 FileZilla users menu


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-59

Result: The Users screen will open as shown in Figure 3-38, “FileZilla users screen”

(p. 3-60).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 With the General page highlighted, click Add on the right pane. The Add user account

screen opens as shown in Figure 3-39, “FileZilla add user screen” (p. 3-61).

Figure 3-38 FileZilla users screen


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 Type a user account name in the top dialogue box.

Note: The account name will be the userid used in Procedure 3-9: “Configure the

software environment and load; commit the software” (p. 3-31).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

17 Select the group created in Step 7 from the drop down list and click OK.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 Check Password check-box and type a password in the dialogue box.

Note: This will be the password used in Procedure 3-9: “Configure the software

environment and load; commit the software” (p. 3-31).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

19 Select the group created in Step 7 from the Group Membership: list.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

20 Select the Shared folders page in the left bar and the Users screen will change as shown

in Figure 3-40, “FileZilla users shared folders screen” (p. 3-62).

Figure 3-39 FileZilla add user screen


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-61

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

21 Click Add.

Figure 3-40 FileZilla users shared folders screen


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Result: A browse window opens as shown in Figure 3-41, “FileZilla browse folder

window” (p. 3-63).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

22 Browse to the folder where the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 software is or will be copied

to, and select it. Then click OK.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

23 The folder appears in the directories window. With the newly added folder selected, make

sure the Read and Write check-boxes are checked.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

24 Click Set as home dir.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

25 Click OK to close the window.

Figure 3-41 FileZilla browse folder window


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




3-63

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




4 4User Operations

Procedures

Overview

Purpose

This chapter includes procedures necessary to support features in 1830 PSS-1 MD4H

Edge Device

Contents

Procedure 4-1: Connect to Network Element through Web user interface

(WebUI) or CLI

4-2

Procedure 4-2: Personal computer requirements and provisioning 4-4

Procedure 4-3: Software installation 4-5

Procedure 4-4: Electrical Sub-Network Connection Protection (E-SNCP)

Provision

4-6

Procedure 4-5: Port Provisioning 4-9

Procedure 4-6: GCC network setup 4-11

Procedure 4-7: TCA profiles 4-12

Procedure 4-8: Provisioning for ETR operation 4-14

Procedure 4-9: Cleaning optical connectors 4-15

Procedure 4-10: Inspecting optical connectors 4-18

Procedure 4-11: Cleaning other optical components 4-19

Procedure 4-12: In-service fan replacement 4-20

Procedure 4-13: Fan air filter replacement 4-23

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




4-1

Procedure 4-1: Connect to Network Element through Web user

interface (WebUI) or CLI

Introduction

The web interface (WebUI) provides web-based access to the network element (NE). You

access the web interface using Internet Explorer running on a computer that is connected

via Ethernet to the NE, either directly or over a LAN.

Hardware requirements

• Laptop or desktop computer capable of running the required software.

• Ethernet card (10 Mbps minimum, 10/100 Mbps recommended).

• It is recommended that you use a monitor capable of displaying at a resolution of

1024x768 or greater.

Software requirements

• Windows XP or Windows 2000, updated to the most recent patch level.

• Internet Explorer 6.0 or Internet Explorer 7.0, updated to the most recent patch level.

• J2SE Java Runtime Environment (JRE) version 5.0. The supported version for the NE

software version you are running is included on the NE software CD-ROM.

Login to the web interface


the WebUI using the CIT port on the FAN unit. Note this is the same connection used for

a CLI connection.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Launch the Internet Explorer browser.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter the IP address of the NE in the Address field, for example, http://123.45.6.78. The

web interface login window is displayed.

Note: The default address for an uncommissioned NE is 172.16.0.1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter the user name “admin” in the “Username”: field.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enter the password “admin” in the “Password”: field. The characters you enter for the

password are not displayed.

User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-1: Connect to Network Element through Web

user interface (WebUI) or CLI

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Note: Passwords are case sensitive. If you experience difficulty logging in, verify that

the Caps Lock key is off.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click on the Login button, or press the Enter key.

Connect to the NE through CLI


the CLI using the CIT port on the FAN unit. Note this is the same connection used for the

WebUI interface.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the CIT port on the FAN unit. Connect the other

end of the cable to the Ethernet port on your PC.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Use a Telnet application on your PC and open a Telnet session connected to the IP address

of the CIT port. The default address for an uncommissioned NE is 172.16.0.1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Hit <Enter> and the user: prompt will appear. Type cli and <Enter>

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Type cli at the password: prompt and <Enter>. This will bring up a welcome message.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 At the next User: prompt type admin and <Enter>.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 At the Password: prompt type admin and <Enter>.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 This will bring up the CLI “#” prompt. You can now enter CLI commands. Type ? for a

list of commands.

User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-1: Connect to Network Element through Web

user interface (WebUI) or CLI

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




4-3

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-2: Personal computer requirements and

provisioning

PC and software requirements

Table 4-1 PC and software requirements

Item Minimum Recommended

Processor 350-MHz 500-MHz Pentium III

RAM 256 Mbyte 512 Mbyte

Disk space 120 Mbyte 120 Mbyte

Video 1024 X 768- 256 Color 1024 X 768 - 256 color

Network Interface 10/100BaseT LAN NIC with

RJ45 interface

10/100BaseT LAN NIC

with RJ45 interface

CDROM Required Required

Operating System Windows 2000 Windows 2000\Windows

XP

PC Card Slot available (FMM) Required Required

Compact Flash Card with

Adapter for ILA and TOADM.

256 MB PCMCIA Compact

Flash Card. P.N 848922639

512 MB PCMCIA

Compact Flash Card. P.N

848999835

Verify PC capabilities

It is anticipated that most customers will have a dedicated laptop personal computer (PC)

for the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device applications software. However, a properly

configured desktop PC will suffice.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 The Table 4-1, “PC and software requirements” (p. 4-4) shows the PC requirements for

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device.

User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-2: Personal computer requirements and

provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-3: Software installation

Before you begin

Prior to performing this procedure, refer to Procedure 4-2: “Personal computer

requirements and provisioning” (p. 4-4).

Procedures for NE software installation

Initial software installation is covered in the applicable Release Notes for this product.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Initial software is always downloaded locally. Software is loaded onto a PC and then into

the network element. Remote downloads for first time installations are not possible.

Note: The Comcodes for release of software to be installed will be available on the

customer order.

User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-3: Software installation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




4-5

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-4: Electrical Sub-Network Connection Protection

(E-SNCP) Provision

Overview

Each PSS1MD4 OTU1 is divided into 16 proprietary Virtual Time Slots (VTS)s. Services

are transported over the 2.7Gb line structure with the designated VTSs depending on the

bandwidth requirement of the service.

It also provides 1+1 dedicated, sub-50ms, ESNCP protection for services by using

out-of-band channel for status and protection signaling. Automatic Protection Switching

(APS) channel communication is established by using APS/PCC channel in ODU1

overhead of line port, thus not reducing client signal bandwidth.

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device also supports provisioning of protection switching

modes: e.g. unidirectional switching, revertive/non-revertive switching.

Unidirectional Switching:

A switching mode in which the selection decision for the service path is made

independently of the Far-End node's switch state. The APS channel is not used to

coordinate switching activity between the nodes.

Bidirectional Switching:

A switching mode in which a channel is switched to the protection path in both directions.

Switching of only one direction is not allowed. Head-end to tail-end signaling is

accomplished using the APS channel.

Non-Revertive mode:

A switching mode in which a switch of service to the protection entity is maintained even

after the working entity has recovered from the failure or the manual command to

protection that caused the switch is cleared.

Revertive switching mode:

In revertive switching, the traffic is automatically switched back to the working line when

the working line has recovered from the failure or the user command is cleared. In the

failure-recovery case, the switch back to working is delayed until working has been

continuously good for the number of minutes specified by the wait-to-restore (WTR)

parameter. In the case of clearing a user switch command, there is no delay.

Both revertive and non-revertive switching can be used in unidirectional protection

groups. Both revertive and non-revertive switching can be used in bidirectional protection

groups.

User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-4: Electrical Sub-Network Connection

Protection (E-SNCP) Provision

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Procedure overview

The following procedure steps outline high-level tasks. For the latest detailed information

about CLI options and parameters, see the “config aps group” in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830

Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 3.0.0 Command Line Interface Guide.

Use the latest version of the Web Interface to display the most current WebUI. In the

WebUI equipment tree, select the port and click the Port Protection tab.

Create an APS Group

To create a new APS group, the following attributes need to be specified via CLI or Web

Interface.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Group ID: An integer identifier for the APS group (not needed via WebUI, WebUI will

automatically assign a group ID)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Port no.: C1-C4 client ports on PSS1MD4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Protection port/VTS: The VTS No. (1-4) on L1,L2 line ports

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Working port/VTS: The VTS No. (1-4) on L1, L2 line ports

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Uni/bidirectional switching

Note: If using Release 1 only unidirectional is supported.

Edit an APS Group

The user can edit the following attributes of an APS group:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 The description string for the APS group.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 The direction mode for the APS group.

Note: Release 1 supports unidirectional only.



....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




4-7

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 The reversion mode for the APS group: revertive or non-revertive switching.

Initialize/Clear an external switch request

The user can initialize or clear an external request on an APS group. External switch

requests are the received commands from a user interface.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 The following options are provided by 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device:

• Lockout

• Forced Switch

• Manual Switch



....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-5: Port Provisioning

Overview

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device contains dual OTs. Each OT houses 4 multiservice

client ports and 2 OTU-1 line ports.

Client ports remain in an unassigned state until a user command to create specific client

port type is issued. The 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device needs to manage virtual circuits

between client ports and any of the virtual time slots (VTS) on the two line ports.

The user can provision the following port attributes:

• Specify a name and description for the port.

• Set the loopback mode

• Set the performance monitoring, specifying the connected SFC ports. For channel

parameters, this can be provisioned via Optical connection (config xc) and will be

reflected in show interface pss1md4 line port detail report.

• Set the administrative state

• Set the port attributes including the client port to virtual time slot mapping (VTS)

• Set the OTU1/ODU1 attributes

• Set the line port to virtual time slot mapping (VTS)

• Set the VTS through mapping between two line ports.

• Set the optical connection by specifying the port to which the OTU1 port is optically

connected.

Procedure overview

The following procedure steps outline high-level tasks. For the latest detailed information

about CLI options and parameters, see the “config interface pss1md4 ” information in the

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 3.0.0 Command Line

Interface Guide.

Use the latest version of the Web Interface to display the most current WebUI. In the

WebUI equipment tree, select the port.

Procedure

The following procedure will set up an unprotected service, using the CLI or WebUI.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Specify the module types (the module type by default is AUTO), and insert the SFP

modules into the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device Line Ports

User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-5: Port Provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




4-9

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Specify the module types (the module type by default is AUTO), and insert the SFP

modules into the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device client Ports

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Configure Line OTU1 attributes by specifying the connected SFC ports and GCC status.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Set the administrative state of the line interface to Up.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Configure the attributes of the client port:

• Auto negotiation attributes

• Losprop attributes

• AINS timer attributes

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Configure the Client port-to-VTS Mapping.

For example: config interface pss1md4 1/8/c1 stm4 timeslot line 1 vts 1-4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Set the administrative state of client port to Up.

User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-5: Port Provisioning

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-6: GCC network setup

Procedure

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Identify GNE node

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Provision loopback address for all nodes in the network using the config interface

loopback command, as detailed in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS)

Release 3.0.0 Command Line Interface Guide.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enable GCC status for all nodes in the network using the config interface pss1md4

shelf/slot/{L1, L2} otu1 command, as detailed in the config interface pss1md4 information

in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Release 3.0.0 Command Line Interface Commands Guide

(Volume II).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 At GNE nodes: Connect LAN cable to OAMP port (LAN1). Provision OAMP IP, admin

state and enable OSPF routing (routestate) using the config interface fan lan1 command

as detailed in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch (PSS) Release 3.0.0

Command Line Interface Guide.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Configure the default route and set the distribution mode to redistribution using the config

cn route default add command, as detailed in Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service

Switch (PSS) Release 3.0.0 Command Line Interface Guide.

User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-6: GCC network setup

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




4-11

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-7: TCA profiles

Purpose

As the PM data is collected, the attribute counters in the active bin get incremented or

updated each time an event, such as an errored second, occurs. If desired, it is possible to

configure and assign a profile to an interval to monitor the value of each attribute in the

active bin and raise a log event when a certain threshold level is reached. When a

specified threshold is crossed a log event is raised. You can configure each PM group

with up to eight profiles, all having different threshold levels. The NE provides the ability

to modify all TCA profiles.

The threshold levels you define in the profiles depend on two factors:

• the interval length. For example, if you were gathering statistics for an interface over

15 minute and 24 hour intervals you would need to define two profiles, one that

defines the threshold values for the 15 minute interval and one that defines thresholds

for the 24 hour interval.

• the service level of the traffic using the interface.

There are 9 instances of each profile type supported. Profile instance 0 is used to disable

TCAs for the group. Profiles with index 7 contain factory default data with 15-min

defaults preloaded while profile with index 8 contains 1-day defaults preloaded.

Instances 1-6 are initialized with all 0 values and can be customized by user. The system

supports the following TCA profile types:

• OC_N (SONET port section monitoring)

• STM_N (SDH port section monitoring)

• DW (OTU2 and ODU2 layer PM parameters)

• ETH (Ethernet group)

• INF (Interface group)

• PCS (PCS layer monitoring for Ethernet/FC ports)

• CP (Equipment PM parameters, applicable to EC)

• OPR (Optical Power Received on OT and OSC ports)

• OPT (Optical Power Transmitted on OT and OSC ports)

Testing for threshold crossings (TCAs)

The data for each PM group is queried and tested for threshold crossings at the following

intervals. A TCA event is raised as soon as a threshold crossing is detected:

Optical power PM groups: Once every five minutes

All other PM groups: Once every 10 seconds

User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-7: TCA profiles

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Note: The PM groups are also queried and tested for threshold crossings when the

contents of the raw bin are viewed. This query is in addition to the regularly

scheduled queries.

Determining which interfaces and cards to configure to collect PM data

The cards and interfaces on the network element determine the PM groups for which you

need to create profiles. Card-level statistics are gathered by the Card (CP in TL1) PM

group.

Note: It is recommended that you create a document that lists the shelf, slot, and port

of all of the interfaces on the NE that you need configure, along with the PM group,

or groups, that apply to each interface.

Viewing performance monitoring data

Performance monitoring data is recorded in logs or in bins. The logs record all of the

threshold crossing events that occurred on the network element. The bins hold data

gathered on a specific card or interface over a specific interval. In addition to the interval

bins, there is a raw bin for each PM group that continues to gather data until cleared.

Configuring performance monitoring

The major steps in high-level performance monitoring configuration are as follows:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Determine the interfaces you need to configure to collect performance monitoring data.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Configure the profiles to define the threshold levels at which log events are generated for

the PM groups you will be monitoring on the network element.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Configure each of the interfaces on the network element for which you will be collecting

performance monitoring statistics. You need to define which PM statistics are gathered,

the interval period over which they are gathered, and the profile used for each interval

period.

For the latest detailed information about CLI options and parameters, see the config

interface PSS1MD4 shelf/slot/C{1-12} pm information in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830


User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-7: TCA profiles

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




4-13

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-8: Provisioning for ETR operation

Overview

PSS-1 GBEH, MD4H, and MSAH units that are capable of supporting ETR operation

must be completely equipped with cards and plugins that support ETR operation. The

PSS-1 AHP and PSS-1 GBE units do not support ETR operation. Operation of non-ETR

capable units, cards, or plugins in an ETR environment can result in hardware damage.

ETR provisioning

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Verify the ETR status of all hardware by using the "show card inventory" command. If

"ETR" characters are present in bytes 6-8 of customer inventory field for all components,

the hardware is ETR qualified. If it is missing from any component, the unit should not be

used in an ETR environment.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Use "show general detail" to view the ETR capability status of the PSS-1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 If the unit is qualified for ETR operation, and will be used in an ETR environment, use

"config general etr enabled" to configure the unit for ETR operation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If the unit is not qualified for ETR operation, or will not be used in an ETR environment,

use "config general etr disabled" to configure the unit for non-ETR operation.

User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-8: Provisioning for ETR operation

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-9: Cleaning optical connectors

Materials and tools

For proper cleaning, the equipment and materials in the following table are

recommended:

Table 4-2 Tools for cleaning optical fiber connectors

Product Model Comcode ITE # Installation

Order #

Optical Fiber

Scope

Noyes OFS

300-200X

408463636 ITE-7129 33712900

2.5-mm

Universal

Adapter Cap

For use with the

Noyes OFS

300-200X

408197044 ITE-7129D1 33712901

1.25-mm

Universal

Adapter Cap

For use with the

Noyes OFS

300-200X

408197069 ITE-7129D2 33712902

Video Fiber

Scope*

Noyes VFS- 408356830 ITE-7146 4171600

1.25-mm Adapter For VFS-1 408356848 ITE-7146D1 33714601

2.5-mm Adapter For VFS-1 408356855 ITE-7146D2 33714602

FC Adapter For VFS-1 408356863 ITE-7146D3 33714603

LC Adapter For VFS-1 408356889 ITE-7146D4 33714604

SC Adapter For VFS-1 408356954 ITE-7146D5 33714605

ST Adapter For VFS-1 408356962 ITE-7146D6 33714606

Individual

Pre-Saturated

Alcohol Wipes

99% Pure

Isopropyl Alcohol

901375147 ITE-7136 33713600

CLETOP

Cleaning Cassette

Type A Reel 901375154 ITE-7137 33713700

CLETOP

Cleaning Cassette

Replacement

Reel

Type A Reel 901375014 ITE-7137 D1 33713701

Luminex Stick

Port Cleaners

1.25 mm 901375030 ITE-7134 33713400

Luminex Stick

Port Cleaners

2.5 mm 901375022 ITE-7135 33713500

User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-9: Cleaning optical connectors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




4-15

Table 4-2 Tools for cleaning optical fiber connectors (continued)

Product Model Comcode ITE # Installation

Order #

Luminex Cloth 5.5” x 5.5” 408201226 R6033 23603300

Note: The equipment and material previously listed has been tested and is proven

effective when used in conjunction with this procedure. Substitution of equipment or

materials is at the discretion of the user and is not recommended by Alcatel-Lucent.

Fiber cleaning considerations

Observe the following precautions when handling fibers to prevent contaminates from

adhering to the fibers and creating potential errors and unnecessary losses:

• Assume that all fibers are dirty and must be inspected and cleaned before connection

to equipment.

• Always inspect fibers for contaminants and clean where required.

• Do not remove the protective end caps on fibers or fiber ports until ready to connect.

• If it is suspected that a fiber or port was contaminated during test or turn up

procedures, reinspect and clean as necessary.

Cleaning process

The following cleaning procedure is acceptable for field service/installation activities:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Remove the dust cap from the connector ferrule exposing the connector end-face.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Open an individual foil packet of a pre-saturated isopropyl alcohol (99% pure) wipe.

Grasp the connector housing and place the connector ferrule end-face perpendicular to the

alcohol wipe.

Drag it against the wipe three (3) times in a figure eight pattern. This action applies the

alcohol solvent to the end-face and initially loosens and scrubs away organic/solid

contaminates.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 If a CLETOP cassette cleaner is not available, proceed with Step 7. Otherwise, hold the

CLETOP cassette cleaner in the palm of your hand with the cassette shutter door facing

up.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Rotate the cassette lever all the way down with your thumb. Do not release the lever. The

lever advances the “dry” Luminex cleaning cloth inside the case and simultaneously

opens the shutter. The CLETOP cassette shutter door is now open and ready for cleaning

the connector.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Insert and press the connector ferrule end-face perpendicular against the cleaning cloth in

the first of two slots of the cleaner.

Drag it down in the direction indicated by the arrows on the cleaner. Do not release the

lever of the cassette.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Lift the connector from the first slot and rotate it 90 degrees and repeat the wiping

procedure using the second slot. Be sure the ferrule is pressed snug against the cleaning

cloth while dragging the ferrule to assure the proper cleaning action.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Release the cassette lever allowing the shutter door to close to its initial position.

Continue with Step 8.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Wrap a Luminex cleaning cloth around the ferrule and rotate the connector housing,

cleaning the outside periphery of ferrule.

Follow this by folding an unused portion of the cloth over the end of the ferrule end-face

and then with light pressure from the thumb, slightly drag the cloth from the center of the

ferrule to the edge while rotating the connector 360 degrees. If the Luminex cleaning

cloth is not available, a lint-free clean room optic wipe can be used. The Luminex

cleaning cloth is washable and can be used multiple times. The optic wipes are single use

and disposable.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Inspect the connector for cleanliness. If necessary, repeat the cleaning process.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




4-17

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-10: Inspecting optical connectors

Connector inspection

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Follow the instructions in the manual provided with the Optical Fiber Scope to view the

ferrule end-face of the fiber under inspection.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 The visual area of the ferrule end-face (ferrule and fiber) as observed by the inspection

system/scope should be free of any contaminates. Repeat the Cleaning Procedure if the

fiber end-face does not meet the following requirements:

Requirement:

No fixed type of contamination (contaminates that remain at the same location after three

wet-dry cleaning cycles), regardless of size, is allowed in the restricted area of the glass

fiber end-face.

Note: The restricted area is defined as ~66 micron (µ) diameter for both single mode

and multi-mode fibers.

Requirement:

No chips, cracks or scratches are allowed near the core of the glass fiber end-face.

Requirement:

No large floating (loose) contaminates are allowed on the glass fiber and ceramic ferrule

end-face.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 After the connector has been verified to be cleaned, it should be immediately inserted into

the adapter build-out of the optical component. This will assure maximum cleanliness and

effectiveness of the connector.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If the cleaned connector can not be “connectorized” with a corresponding adapter, the

connector ferrule must be protected with a connector dust cap. Before placing the cap on

the ferrule, make sure the cap is clean. This can be accomplished by inserting a CLETOP

stick cleaner (swab) of the same inside diameter as the cap (either 2.5 or 1.25 mm) and

rotate the stick 360 degrees three (3) times. Following this procedure, carefully place the

cap over the ferrule. When the cleaned connector is ready for assembly, it should be

reinspected for cleanliness prior to connectorization.

User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-10: Inspecting optical connectors

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-11: Cleaning other optical components

Fiber adapters or circuit pack connectors

During testing and/or troubleshooting activities, it may be necessary to clean the optical

build-out adapter or the circuit pack connector. The following procedure is recommended.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Using the appropriate CLETOP stick cleaner (2.5 mm for SC, ST, and FC connectors,

1.25 mm for LC connectors) dampen the stick cleaner with Ethyl alcohol using the

alcohol wipe. Insert the stick cleaner into the adapter rotating the stick 360 degrees while

inserting. Push/rotate the stick until the stick cleaner makes contact with the connector.

Apply slight pressure upon contact and rotate the stick 360 degrees at least three (3)

times.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Remove the stick cleaner, rotating it upon removal.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Using a dry CLETOP stick cleaner of appropriate diameter, repeat the above cleaning

procedure. This procedure will clean the side walls of the adapter and the end-face of the

circuit pack connector.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Gently insert the Video Fiber Scope probe into the port until the fiber ferrule comes into

view.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Verify that the fiber ferrule is clean. Repeat the process in Steps 1 - 3 if the fiber does not

meet the requirements specified in Procedure 4-10: “Inspecting optical connectors”

(p. 4-18)

User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-11: Cleaning other optical components

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




4-19

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-12: In-service fan replacement

Overview

With a PSS-1 unit that is in-service, you should replace the FAN card without

powering-off or restarting the PSS-1. Otherwise, you must restore the database in force

mode. After the FAN is replaced, you should immediately issue the command to

synchronize the database.

Fan replacement procedure

Note: On the 1830 PSS-1, the FAN and User Panel are integrated into one unit.

You should use the following procedure to replace a FAN within PSS-1 shelf that is

in-service. If this procedure is interrupted by a restart or power cycle of the unit, use the

procedure to recover.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Verify that the NE Name, FAN LAN1 port details, loopback, IP address, and static routing

and gateway information are recorded and available in case a restart interrupts the

procedure. The user can use WEBUI and CLI to collect the information. The related CLI

commands are: show general name, show interface loopback,

show interface fan lan1, and show cn routes static.

Note: You can use the WEBUI and CLI to collect this information, using the

following commands:

• show general name

• show interface loopback

• show interface fan lan1

• show cn routes static

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 If there are no database alarms, backup the current database so that it can be restored if

the procedure is interrupted by a shelf power shut down or NE restart..

Note: If there are database alarms, they must be resolved before backing up the

database and proceeding.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Physically replace the 1830PSS-1 FAN (integrated Fan/User Panel).

User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-12: In-service fan replacement

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Note: Physical replacement of the integrated Fan/User Panel is the same on all PSS-1

models. (PSS-1 GBEH illustrated)

1. Note any cables that are connected to the fan unit. Label them if needed to insure their

correct replacement after changing the unit. Then remove any connections

2. Completely loosen the retaining screw that secures the fan unit in the PSS-1.

3. Grasp the extraction handle and pull the fan unit straight out of the PSS-1.

4. Position the new fan unit and slide it straight into the PSS-1.

5. Securely tighten the retaining screw, but do not overtighten.

6. Restore any connections to the fan unit that were removed in Step #1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Synchronize the database and the new FAN.

You may use the WEBUI (Release 2.0 and later) menu to issue the command:

Administation> Database > FAN Replacement Update. Or,you may issue the

config database usrpnlrepl CLI command.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Backup the database again, with the FAN successfully replaced.

Recovery from NE reset during FAN replacement

Note: If FAN replacement is interrupted by the NE restarting or a Shelf powering

cycle, then the traffic may be lost and a Database Invalid alarm occurs.

If a FAN card is being replaced on a NE and the NE restarts or experiences a power cycle

before the user has a chance to successfully issue the command,

Administration> Database > FAN Replacement Update from the WEBUI

(Release 2.0 and later) menu, or complete the config database usrpnlrepl, traffic


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




4-21

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

may be lost and the user will see a "database invalid" (DBINVALID) alarm after an NE

reboot. You may use the following procedures to recover the traffic and clear the

DBINVALID alarm:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Re-provision the NE Name. This can be done during the initial connection to the NE with

the WebUI, or using the config general name CLI command.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Re-provision the loopback IP address using the config interface loopback ip

CLI command.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 On a PSS-1, reprovision the FAN LAN1 port IP address, using the

config interface fan lan1 CLI command.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Re-provision the static routing, gateway information, using the

config cn routes static add CLI command.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Enter the CLI command, config database restore force, to bring the database

from a remote server to the NE.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 4-13: Fan air filter replacement

Maintenance intervals

Air filters on PSS-1 units should be replaced at 3 month intervals or sooner if necessary.

Note: The PSS-1 air filter should be removed when using the unit in Outside Plant

Applications (-40C to +65C). The Outside Plant application requires cabinets to either

have their own filters or be a closed-loop system.

NOTICE

Potential equipment damage

Before installing or removing the filter, check that the protective adhesive film has been

removed.

Fan air filter replacement procedure

CAUTION

Possibility of personal injury.

Personal injury can result from contact with moving fan blades.

Avoid contact with rotating fans. Personal injury can be caused by rotating fans.

Air filters on PSS-1 units should be replaced at 3 month intervals or sooner if necessary.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Completely loosen the air filter retaining screw.

User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-13: Fan air filter replacement

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




4-23

Note: Filter replacement is performed in the same way on all PSS-1 models. (PSS-1

GBEH illustrated.)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Grasp the removal tab, pull the old air filter straight out of the PSS-1 unit and dispose of

the filter.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Align a new air filter with the opening in the PSS-1 unit, and slide it straight into the unit.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Completely tighten the air filter retaining screw, but do not overtighten.

User Operations Procedures Procedure 4-13: Fan air filter replacement

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 5Security administration

Overview

Purpose

This chapter provides information on security administration procedures for the 1830 PSS

system. The security functions determine NE access, command execution, and

administrative control for the 1830 PSS.

Contents

User accounts and privileges 5-2

Configuring user accounts 5-6

Procedure 5-1: Procedures to configure user accounts 5-10

Login sessions 5-13

System security features 5-15

Procedure 5-2: View security log procedure 5-19

Authentication 5-20

Procedure 5-3: RADIUS server procedures 5-24

Procedure 5-4: SNMP procedures 5-26

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




5-1

User accounts and privileges

The purpose of security administration is to manage user accounts (logins, passwords,

authorization levels, external links) and to monitor system security so that only valid

users can perform permitted actions and receive authorized information from the system.

The NE provides the ability to create, modify, delete, and view user profiles and

associated security levels. Each level has distinct privileges for accessing and executing

the commands and performing administrative functions on the NE. The description of

each function or command is listed in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch

(PSS) Release 3.0.0 Command Line Interface Guide and/or Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic

Service Switch (PSS) Release 3.0.0 TL1 Commands and Messages Guide including the

user levels that are able to access and execute each specific command (see “System

access control” (p. 5-18)).

The system does not provide an “unsecure” user external port. To gain access to an NE

you need a user account with login and password. The user account name, privilege level

and password is created and defined by the Admin user, and is unique for each network

element in the network.

Important! The 1830 PSS is delivered with two default users as part of the factory

software load: one Admin user (with administration privilege) and one Service user

(with service privilege).

The login ID and passwords are:

• For Admin user: admin/admin

• For Service user: service/AlcaLu-1830!

Note: The administration of all security functions is only accessible to Admin and

Service users (i.e. the system will only allow access to these security functions to

users with appropriate security administration privileges). The Service user is not

capable of creating/deleting/managing user profiles. The NE does not allow deletion

of the default users.

Security administration User accounts and privileges

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




The user levels, the privileges assigned to each level, and their intended use are

summarized in Table 5-1, “User privilege levels” (p. 5-3).

Table 5-1 User privilege levels

Level Privileges and use

Observer Observer level restrictions and privileges are as follows:

• An Observer user cannot initialize the database during NE

configuration.

• An Observer user cannot access any Administrative functions.

This includes configuring: database backup/restore, date/time,

IP routes and OSPF areas, NTP, Users, SNMP, software

upgrade, Syslog, user activity logging.

• An Observer can view and modify user preferences.

• An Observer can change his own password.

• An Observer user can view alarms and conditions, but cannot

access the functions under the Fault and Test/Analysis buttons.

These include: alarm configuration, test LED, and loopback.

• An Observer user cannot select Alarm Cutoff on the alarm

display.

• For Connections:

– An Observer user can view all cross-connects and details,

but cannot create, modify or delete cross-connects.

– An Observer user can view the NE Physical Topology, but

cannot create or delete a connection

– An Observer can view the NE Logical Topology with no

restrictions

• The Observer user cannot create, modify or delete any

equipment-related items or perform any action on the NE that

will change its status. If an Observer user tries to submit such

a request, the WebUI will display a message indicating that the

user does not have permission to perform the function.

• There are no restrictions for the Report menu items.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




5-3

Table 5-1 User privilege levels (continued)


Provisioner The Provisioner has all the “Observer” privileges plus the

following:

• configure IO cards, ports, interfaces and circuits

• run test procedures on any cards that do not contribute to

system-wide outage (e.g. COLD boot of all packs)

This user cannot provision system-wide security access, (e.g. user

profile, add or delete user account), cannot perform a system

reboot, cannot perform a card-level cold reboot, and cannot

modify OPSA A and B port switching attributes. A Provisioner

user cannot access any Administrative functions. This includes

configuring: database backup/restore, date/time, IP routes and

OSPF areas, NTP, Users, SNMP, software upgrade, Syslog, user

activity logging.

A Provisioner can view and modify user preferences. A

Provisioner can change his own password.

Admin The Admin user is the administrator for the NE. The Admin has all

the “Provisioner” privileges and can also do the following:

• add users to the NE

• delete users from the NE, except Service user

• edit the security and privilege information of any user, except

Service user

• retrieve security information about users (not password)

• change the password of other users, including other Admin

users, without entering the old password (cannot change

password of Service user)

• logoff a particular user (including a user with administration

privileges and users who are logged with DEBUG, WebUI and

CLI sessions)

• obtain user info about the users currently logged on to the NE

(including users who are logged with DEBUG, WebUI and

CLI sessions)

• inhibit and allow all users, including Service user

• set system-wide user security attributes

• retrieve security information about authenticated (logged on)

and unauthenticated (not logged on) sessions

• execute software download and database backup and restore

commands


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Table 5-1 User privilege levels (continued)


Service This is the highest level, and is meant for Alcatel-Lucent

technicians. This user has all the “Admin” privilege (except the

ability to create/delete/manage user profiles), plus the ability to

utilize the debugging and software development tools. The

following applies:

• a maximum of one Service user per NE, created by default, as

part of the SW load. (There is no mechanism to create another

Service user profile or to delete the Service user profile). Only

the Service user can change his/her password


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




5-5

Configuring user accounts

Introduction

Login security controls access to the NE(s) by individual users. Client Authentication for

logging in and auditing on each NE requires a user ID (UID) and a complex password.

Security administration enables the system to deny a user access to the NE. The NE

authenticates the user ID against the NE's local security database. Based on this, the NE

either accepts or denies login access to the NE. Access may be denied during one of the

following points in time:

• When the user first attempts to log in and the login attempt is denied.

• During an active session and the user is disconnected by the NE.

After the user logs into an NE with a valid user ID and Password, user functions can be

performed based on the assigned User Access Privilege (UAP).

User identification and user password definition

Userids and passwords can contain the following characters:

• Alphabetic characters in the set [a–z, A–Z]

• Numeric characters in the set [0–9]

• Special characters % (percent sign), + (plus sign), # (pound sign), and _ (underscore).

User identifier (UID)

User identity is specified using a UID that is a unique identifier used by an NE for

security management. A UID code is a non-confidential, unique, and auditable

representation of a user such as the login name. The NE supports UIDs that are strings of

5 to 12 case-sensitive alphanumeric characters where the first character is alphabetic.

The following conditions apply to UIDs:

• Each authorized user (a person, device or a software process having operations related

command inputs access) must have a UID. Each UID must be unique on the NE (i.e.

the system does not support 2 UIDs that are the same).

• At any given instant in time, the NE internally maintains the identity of all UIDs

logged on at that time.

• The NE supports a maximum of 255 unique UIDs.

Password identifier (PID)

A PID is a case sensitive string of 6 to 24 alphabetic [a-z, A-Z], numeric [0-9], or special

characters. A valid password must contain at least 1 alphabetic, 1 numeric, and 1 special

character. The following special characters are accepted as valid: % (percent sign), + (plus

sign), # (pound sign), and _ (underscore). The first character of the PID can be any

alphabetic, numeric, or valid special character.

Security administration Configuring user accounts

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




The following conditions apply to PIDs:

• The PID cannot be the same as the associated UID, nor can it be the reverse of the

associated UID.

• The NE will not prevent a user from choosing an already existing password (more

than one user can have the same password).

Password administration

The NE supports the ability for a user with security administration privileges to specify

the following user password attributes: the password age (in days); the number of days

that the existing password can continue to be used before a new password becomes

mandatory; the number of times that the existing password can continue to be used before

a new password becomes mandatory; the password obsolescence interval that must elapse

before an obsolete password can be reused.

A user with security administration privileges can provision a system-wide password

aging interval to encourage users to change passwords periodically. The following

applies:

• The default for system-wide password aging interval is 30 days. The allowed range is

from 1 to 999 days.

• The system allows the ability to disable the system-wide password aging interval, by

assigning a value of 0 (zero) days.

A password grace period and number of logins allowed after password expiration can also

be provisioned. The following applies:

• The default for the password grace period is 7 days.

• The default for the number of logins allowed after password expiration is 3.

A password is expired when one of the following events occurs:

• the password is expired and neither a grace period nor number of logins is permitted

after password expiration

• the password is expired and either a grace period or a number of logins is permitted

after password expiration, but the provisioned value(s) is expired (i.e., the user has no

more days to use the expired password, or no more logins allowed with the expired

password).

Users have the ability to change their own password on demand. To change a password,

the user must enter the current password, the new password, and the confirmed new

password (Note: For an Admin user changing another user’s password, only the new

password value needs to be entered). The NE checks the password for proper length and

syntax in accordance with established password requirements. Before updating the NE's

database, the NE ensures that the current password is different from the new password

and that the new password and confirmed new password are the same. An error message

is generated to notify the user if any of the password requirements are not met.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




5-7

Adding a User

A user with appropriate security level privileges (Admin user) can add new users to the

User Security Database and to specify for each user his/her User Access Privilege (UAP).

The UAP specifies the set of commands a user can execute based on the access privilege

of the user and of the command.

Note: A maximum of only 1 Service user is allowed in the NE. Multiple users of the

other user levels are allowed.

The NE provides the ability to specify an initial password pertaining to the new user. The

user is prompted to change the password when one of the following conditions occurs:

• when that user establishes a session for the first time after the initial password is

assigned

• when that user establishes a session for the first time after a user password has been

reset by an administrative action.

The NE denies the session if the user does not comply.

Deleting a user

A user with appropriate security level privileges can delete existing user profiles from the

User Security Database. If the specified user is currently logged on, then the user is also

logged off. Users with security administration privileges can delete any existing user

profile except default users' profiles.

Note: A user with administration or service privileges cannot delete his/her own user

profile. The Admin user cannot delete the Service user, and the Service user cannot

delete himself.

Retrieving and editing user privileges

The ability to edit an existing user profile entry (created when entering a user) is provided

to users with appropriate security level privileges. The following conditions apply:

• Only users with appropriate administration privileges can change a user profile

database entry for another user.

• Only users with administrator privileges can edit the User Security Level User

attributes that exist for each user's profile. The security level user attributes are: user

privilege level, link timeout, user provided name, and user-id status. It is not possible

to modify the UID or user security level of factory default users.

• Any change to the privilege(s) granted to a user do not apply to the user if the user is

currently logged in. Any such change will take effect after the next login.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




• A user with security administration privileges can retrieve any or all user profile

entries.

• Only those parameter values that are actually applied for the specified UID are

reported. This means that those system-wide parameters that have been modified, but

still not applied to the specified UID, are reported with their previous values.

Enabling/disabling a user

A user with appropriate security level privileges can disable existing user profiles in the

User Security Database. If the specified user is logged on, then the user is also logged off.

A user cannot disable himself/herself.

A user with appropriate security level privileges can enable existing and previously

disabled user profiles in the User Security Database for a specified user(s).

Note: The Admin user can disable and enable all users including the Service user.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




5-9

Procedure 5-1: Procedures to configure user accounts

Before you begin

The following procedures are available via the WebUI after the user initially connects to

the NE and logs into the system (see Procedure 4-1: “Connect to Network Element

through Web user interface (WebUI) or CLI” (p. 4-2)).

View or modify user details

Note: Appropriate privilege level is required to configure user accounts.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 In the WebUI, select Administration > Security > Users.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the desired user and click Details.

Result: User details are displayed. You can change privilege level or password, or

enable or disable the account.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Modify available fields (see “Configuring user accounts” (p. 5-6)) and click Apply.

Create a user

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click Create.

Result: Create User screen is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter appropriate information (see “Configuring user accounts” (p. 5-6)) and click Apply.

Security administration Procedure 5-1: Procedures to configure user accounts

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Delete a user

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the desired user and click Delete.

Change password

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 In the WebUI, select Administration > Security > Change Password.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Enter the old password and the new password, and confirm the new password. Then click

Apply.

View / terminate sessions

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 In the WebUI, select Administration > Security > Sessions.

Result: All active sessions are displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 To terminate a session, select the desired session and click Terminate.

View SNMP v3 users

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 In the WebUI, select Administration > Security > SNMP v3 Users.

Result: All current SNMP v3 users are displayed.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




5-11

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Create SNMP v3 user

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 To create an SNMP v3 user, click Create.

Result: The Create SNMP v3 User window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter User ID, Password, and Access Privilege information. and click Apply.

Modify SNMP v3 user

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 To modify an SNMP v3 user, select the user and click Modify.

Result: The Modify SNMP v3 User window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter the desired parameters and click Apply.

View / modify system security attributes

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 In the WebUI, select Administration > Security > System.

Result: The System Security Administration window with current settings is

displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 To modify existing value(s), enter desired value(s) and click Apply.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Login sessions

Overview

There is no limit to the number of simultaneous active sessions per user ID. One user ID

can log into the NE multiple times (via WebUI, TL1, CLI, and SNMP), the maximum of

which is restricted by the number of sessions supported by the NE. The NE notifies the

security administrator when a user logs into the NE indicating the UID and the

established User Session Number.

The ability to authenticate a session (i.e., activate a user session) is established with the

NE by logging in an existing user through a UID and a PID. The NE will deny the

activation of a user session if authentication for the user cannot be established (e.g. the

specified password does not match the user's password on the NE, the user profile does

not exist on the NE, etc.).

The NE allows a user to cancel a current session which was previously authenticated by a

login request by providing a logoff function for the current session.

The following applies to canceling a user session:

• Only users with appropriate administration privileges are able to logoff other users.

Otherwise users can only logoff themselves.

• Users with administration privileges and also the Service user can logoff other users

with administration privileges.

• A command request to cancel a session will terminate a single active user session on

the addressed NE. In addition, any supporting connection that is no longer supporting

other sessions or connections, is also terminated.

Session timeout

The NE supports auto log out and auto disconnect of user sessions based upon user link

inactivity (i.e. an idle user). Inactivity is defined as lack of user input. The inactivity

interval (period which triggers log out) is provisionable on a system basis. The longest

such interval allowed for an idle user is 999 minutes, with a minimum of 1 minute and a

default of 60 minutes. The system allows the ability to disable the User Session Link

Timer attribute, on a system basis, by assigning the zero value. A value of 0 implies no

idle timeout, (i.e. the user can remain idle forever).

When the session timer expires, the NE logs out and disconnects a user's session to the

NE. The session timer is reset/restarted by successful user login and user session link

communication input activity after the login occurs.

Each properly logged-in session will either be logged out by the user or by system

inactivity or by connection interruption. When a session is terminated (e.g., normal

logoff, power failure, a break in the physical or logical connection), the NE ensures that

the port drops immediately and terminates the user processes running at the time of

Security administration Login sessions

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




5-13

logoff. When the next user attempts to log on to that physical or logical port, the user is

required to go through the entire login procedure including identification and

authentication.

The admin user may configure unique per user session timeout, based on the UID profile.

If provisioned, the timeout value may take on any value up to the system maximum. If

provisioned, the user-defined session timeout takes precedence over the system-wide

session timeout value provisioned.

Security administration Login sessions

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




System security features

Encrypted and normal mode

The system supports the ability to set the NE to function in an encrypted or normal mode.

Encrypted or normal mode should be set during initial commissioning. There is no default

mode. Only the administrative user can invoke the security mode on the NE. Changing

the mode from encrypted to normal, or vice versa, causes a warm reboot of the active

Main EC. All current user sessions will be logged off as a result.

The NE does not allow the encrypted mode setting if there is no SSH key initialized on

the system. Encrypted mode can only be turned on after the NE has already generated an

SSH key. The NE applies the following guidelines when setting the mode to either

encrypted or normal. These settings apply to the OAMP port only.

In encrypted mode:

• SSH is enabled

• telnet is disabled to ports 23, 3082, 3083

• telnet is enabled to port 22 to support SSH

• SNMP ports (161, 162) are allowed to be enabled

• port 69 (tftp) remains open for the internal transfers from the main EC to other circuit

packs on the local NE

• NTP port (123) is allowed to be enabled

• SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, SNMPv3 (without authentication and privacy) requests to the

NE are disabled

• SNMPv3 (with authentication and privacy) requests are allowed by the NE

In normal mode:

• SSH is enabled (SSH can be used in both modes)

• telnet is enabled to all ports TL1 (3082, 3083) and CLI (22, 23) ports

• SNMP ports (161, 163) are allowed to be enabled

• NTP port (123) is allowed to be enabled

• HTTP (Web interface available) is enabled for remote management

• The port 69 (tftp) remains open for the internal transfers from the main EC to other

circuit packs on the local NE

• SNMPv1, SNMPv2c requests are allowed by the NE

• SNMPv3 (without authentication and privacy) requests are not allowed by the NE

• SNMPv3 (with authentication and privacy) requests are allowed by the NE

• CLI over the craft serial port is not encrypted

Security administration System security features

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




5-15

The NE supports the enabling and disabling of the following external ports: OAMP, VoIP,

E1-LAN, E2-LAN, ES1 and ES2 for extension shelves. Only an administrative user has

the ability to enable/disable these interfaces. The serial/console port cannot be disabled.

Note: The two external LAN ports, E1 and E2, connect to externally managed

devices, like RAMAN or EDFA power booster amplifiers. In the current release, one

User Panel is supported on the Master Shelf of an NE. This provides a maximum of 2

LAN ports for external RAMAN or Booster devices per NE.

TFTP, FTP, and SFTP

TFTP, FTP, and SFTP file transfer protocols are supported for both encrypted and normal

mode. Database backup/restore, and PM upload/transfer can use either TFTP or SFTP.

Software download can use either FTP or SFTP.

SFTP (secure FTP) is a program that uses SSH to transfer files. Unlike standard FTP, it

encrypts both commands and data, preventing passwords and sensitive information from

being transmitted in the clear over the network. It is functionally similar to FTP, but

because it uses a different protocol, standard FTP client can't be used to talk to an SFTP

server, nor an FTP server can be connected with a client that supports only SFTP.


• FTP and SFTP passwords are stored in the database using AES encryption.

• No user interface displays the password for the FTP and SFTP server.

• SFTP or TFTP are used regardless of whether the NE is in encrypted or in normal

mode.

Secure Shell (SSH)

Secure Shell (SSH) is a network protocol that allows data to be exchanged using a secure

channel between two network devices. SSH is designed as a replacement for telnet and

other unsecure remote shells which send information (notably passwords) in plaintext,

leaving them open to interception. The encryption used by SSH provides confidentiality

and integrity of data over an unsecure network, such as Internet. SSH allows a trusted

path of communication between two ends (e.g., NE and EMS) using encryption of the

data stream.


• The 1830 NE supports SSHv2. This applies to both 1830 PSS-32 and the 1830 PSS-1

(Edge Device).

• The NE supports the generation of the SSH crypto Key. This crypto key needs to be

generated before the NE is set to encrypted mode. The NE allows the generation of

the crypto key only if the NE mode is normal. If the NE mode is encrypted, the crypto

key generation is denied.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




• SSH Keys cannot be zeroized in encrypted mode.

• The NE supports AES encryption. SSH key must be encrypted with AES before

storing in the disk.

Security event log

For security purposes, the system generates a security log to provide an audit trail record

that supports after-the-fact investigation of specific activities (e.g., logins, modification of

critical system resources). The security log provides a means for the Security

Administrator to investigate, audit, detect, and analyze security events in order that proper

remedial actions can be taken. Security logs are protected from unauthorized access and

no modification by any user or process, even debug tools, is allowed.

The system provides the ability to a user with sufficient security level privileges to

retrieve security event log reports that were generated by the system for a given UserID

and between a specified From Date and Time and To Date and Time.

The following applies to the security log:

• The security log has a circular (or equivalent) recording mechanism (i.e., oldest

record overwritten by newest), and an appropriate administrator has the capability to

retrieve, print, copy, and upload the security log for long-term storage.

• When the security log has reached 90% of its maximum size, the NE sends an

appropriate event to the security administrator.

• The security event log file is protected from tampering by any user defined in the user

security database and cannot be deleted by any user defined in the user security

database.

• The security event log file is stored in non-volatile memory and survives system

restarts/resets.

• The security event log file does not survive software generic upgrades and power

reset.

Security log contents

Each NE is able to log the following classes of information in the security log:

• any action that changes the security attributes and services

• any action that changes access controls

• any action that changes configuration parameters of the device

• each login attempt and its result

• each logout or session termination (whether remote or console, whether requested or

due to inactivity timeout)


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




5-17

A security log entry contains the following information:

• the identification, address and security level of the user that initiated the action that is

being logged

• the actual attempted action that is being logged (the echo of the command/response

message)

• an indication of the success or failure of the activity (command completion code)

• the date and the time the action (i.e. the command or the message) occurred

Note: The security event log file does not record actual or attempted passwords that

are entered in as passwords.

System access control

System access control prevents an otherwise authenticated (valid) user from unauthorized

access. Not all system resources are available to every user, and restricting resource

availability is extremely important to securing a safe and trusted network. System access

control allows only authorized users access to the NE. Access control level is associated

with each user and is maintained through the User Security Level attribute.

To execute any command, a user needs a User Security Level (User Access Privilege)

including the Command Security Level (Command Access Privilege) assigned to the

command being executed. If the user is denied the privilege of executing a command due

to an insufficient User Security Level, the system indicates to the user that the command

request is invalid due to insufficient privileges.

All physical ports of the NE exercise system access control. This includes direct access

serial and LAN ports (CIT, external OAMP network access, etc.) and access via an

Embedded Communications Channel (ECC) as in the case of GCC between 1830

PSS-32/PSS-16 and the 1830 PSS-1 (Edge Device).

Any failed login attempt immediately reports to the user that the login process has failed

or is invalid. Information such as “invalid user ID” or “invalid password” is not reported.

The NE performs the entire user authentication procedure even if the UID that is entered

is not valid. After a failed login attempt, the system delays for 2 seconds prior to

presenting the next login prompt. This applies to human interaction interfaces (e.g. CLI,

TL1, WebUI).

After the maximum number of consecutive invalid login attempts for a session has been

reached, the system records in the security log the IP address of the source along with the

UID and an intrusion transient condition is reported.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Procedure 5-2: View security log procedure

View security log

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 In the WebUI, select Reports > Logs > Security.

Result: The Security Log is displayed.

Security administration Procedure 5-2: View security log procedure

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




5-19

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Authentication

Overview

Authentication is the act of verifying a claimed identity, providing a basis for setting up

private communications with full data integrity and logging management activity. The

system supports the following different methods of authentication.

• RADIUS authentication

• Local NE Authentication

• SNMP

RADIUS authentication

RADIUS allows the user to be authenticated and authorized at the same time. The

RADIUS server is provisioned with one or more user profile or profiles. Based on the

user profile and user class definitions, the RADIUS server not only allows the user to

have access to the NE, but also grants the user the user's privilege level. The RADIUS

client works with Steel-Belted RADIUS, WinRADIUS, and FreeRadius servers. The NE

supports provisioning of up to 2 RADIUS Servers. The administrative privilege user can

add/delete the specific RADIUS server.


• The administrative privilege user can Enable/Disable the RADIUS servers without

deleting their configuration.

• When two servers are configured and enabled, the NE queries the second RADIUS

server (RAD2) only if the first server (RAD1) does not respond after the appropriate

timeout and retries.

• Web users are authenticated from the local stored database regardless of whether

RADIUS is enabled.

• SNMP users are not authenticated by RADIUS.

• RADIUS functionality can be used regardless of whether the NE is in encrypted or

normal mode.

• A login by the Service user is never authenticated using RADIUS for any user

interfaces (CLI or WebUI). The authentication for the Service user is always local.

Security administration Authentication

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




RADIUS attributes

The NE supports configuring the following general RADIUS attributes:

• Timeout: This is the timeout (in seconds) for the NE to wait for a response from the

RADIUS server. A failure is declared after the timeout is elapsed. The supported value

range for timeout is 1 to 1000. The default value is 5.

• Retries: This is the number of attempts that the NE will try to contact the specified

RADIUS server that has failed to respond during the previous request(s). If there is no

response from the server after the specified tries, then the NE will try to contact the

second RADIUS server if one is provisioned. The supported value range for retries is

1 to 100. The default value is 3.

The NE supports the following RADIUS server attributes. The RADIUS attributes can be

configured, edited, deleted, and retrieved by a user with appropriate administrative

privilege. The "sharedSecret" parameter cannot be retrieved.

• ServerNum: This is the AID for the RADIUS server. The acceptable values are RAD1

and RAD2.

• IPAddr: This is the IP address of the specified RADIUS server.

• Port: This is the authentication port of the RADIUS server. The valid value is from 1

to 65000. The default port value is 1812.

• sharedSecret: This is the shared secret key between the NE and the target RADIUS

server. This key is an ascii string between 5 to 32 characters.

• Status: This is RADIUS server status. The valid values are the following

– Enabled - The RADIUS server is online. This is the default value.

– Disabled - The RADIUS server is offline.

The NE supports configuring the following authentication ordering behavior options that

can be configured and retrieved by a user with appropriate administrative privilege.

• LOCAL: Authentication is based on the local NE's security database. This is the

default.

• RADIUS: Authentication is based on the RADIUS server's database.

• RADIUS-THEN-LOCAL: The authentication is attempted first using the RADIUS

server's database. If the RADIUS server is not reachable then authentication is based

on local NE's security database.

Note: If the RADIUS server is reachable and the user profile does not exist in

RADIUS server's database, then the authentication fails and the user is denied access.

Local NE authentication

Local NE Authentication is accomplished via the UID and PID pair created and stored on

the local NE.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




5-21

Note: The access to the database (for authentication) of the NE where user profiles

are stored, is allowed only on a local connection. This is for the Service user to access

locally via connection to RS232 or local CIT port.

SNMP authentication

The local NE can authenticate and authorize users based on SNMP. SNMP provides for

both security versions and security levels. A security version is an authentication strategy

that is set up for a user and the group in which the user resides. A security level is the

permitted level of security within a security version. A combination of a security version

and a security level will determine which security mechanism is employed when handling

an SNMP packet. Three security versions are available: SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, and

SNMPv3.

The following applies to SNMP:

• The NE supports separate DB records for SNMPv3 users. SNMPv3 users are different

from the other users. SNMPv3 users can be provisioned via WebUI.

• The system supports creation of a default SNMP user at initial startup with a known

password. This known password permits 1354RM-PhM to perform auto-discovery of

NEs. The default SNMP user cannot be deleted. It can only be disabled.

• The NE supports changing SNMPv3 users' authentication (auth) and privacy (priv)

passwords.

• The system supports enabling and disabling SNMP users.

• The NE supports sending Authentication Failure traps and supports enabling and

disabling the sending of Authentication Failure Traps.

• The system allows a new SNMP user to be created from an administrator account.

• Even if RADIUS authentication is enabled on the system, login access to the NE via

SNMP is always based on the UID and PID pair resident on the NE.

SNMP trap destinations

The system supports editing and retrieval of SNMP trap destinations. Trap destinations

are SNMP managers provisioned to listen to traps coming from the NE. These SNMP

managers may or may not also be actively managing the NE.

The following SNMP trap server attributes are supported:

• SNMPTrapID - this is the ID of the SNMP trap server. The system supports up to 5

remote trap servers. This value is required to discern which trap server the user is

addressing. Possible values are 1 thru 5.

• IPAddr - this is the IP address of the SNMP trap server. Specifies the IP address of the

server that serves as the trap destination.

• String - this is the community string sent to the SNMP trap server. It is an ascii string

from 1 to 32 characters.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




• IPaddress Port - this is the (IP address) port of the SNMP trap server. Specifies the IP

address port of the server that serves as the trap destination.

• Timeout - Specifies the time (round trip), in hundreths of a second, after which the

connection times out if no reply is received. Following a timeout, a retry is attempted,

up to the number of retries specified by the retry variable.

• Retry Count - Specifies an integer value for the number of times the network element

will attempt to retry the connection in the event of a timeout.

• SNMP version - the SNMP version to use when formatting the trap. Valid versions are

v1, v2c, and v3.

• NMS Station Group ID - Specifies an integer value that uniquely identifies the NMS

workstation serving as the trap destination. (Use 0 for all third party SNMP trap

servers).

Note: Traps are sent in SNMPv2 or SNMPv3 format, depending on the security level

of the NE. If the NE is encrypted, then all traps are encrypted, so the traps will be in

v3 format. All SNMPv3 traps are sent with the SNMPv3 default user. In normal

mode, the version can be v2 or v3.

SNMP community strings

The system supports creation, editing, deletion, and retrieval of SNMP community

strings. Community strings are necessary for authentication (e.g. if the manager comes

into the NE via SNMPv2). Provisioning of these tasks is accomplished via CLI, WebUI,

and SNMP.

Note: If the NE is in encrypted mode, the user can still configure these community

strings, but the remote SNMP manager will connect via SNMPv3.

The following SNMP community attributes are supported:

• SNMPComID – this is the ID of the SNMP community. The system supports up to 5

pre-configured communities, one for each of the user privilege classes. Possible

values are: admin, provisioner, observer, nms, and 3rdpnms. This parameter requires a

value.

• String – this is the community string sent from the SNMP manager to the NE. It is an

ascii string from 1 to 32 characters. Based on the string and the privilege level

inherited from the SNMPComID, the NE will either process or deny the SNMP

request. The string must be unique (there cannot be duplicate strings) and the string

cannot start or end with a blank space.

The SNMP string is checked every time an SNMP request is processed by the NE. If

there is a match, then the NE will further check the privilege level of that string to

ensure that the request can be granted given the command privilege level. If the string

does not match any string defined in the NE, the request fails and the NE returns a

failure message. If the privilege level is inadequate for the request being asked, then

the NE returns a failure message, otherwise, the request is processed.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




5-23

Procedure 5-3: RADIUS server procedures

Create RADIUS server

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 In the WebUI, select Security > RADIUS > Servers

Result: The RADIUS Servers screen is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click Create.

Result: The Create RADIUS Server screen is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter parameters and click Apply.

Delete RADIUS server

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the RADIUS server and click Delete.

View RADIUS server

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the RADIUS server and click Details.

Result: The RADIUS server details are displayed.

Security administration Procedure 5-3: RADIUS server procedures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Provision RADIUS properties

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 In the WebUI, select Security > RADIUS > Properties

Result: The RADIUS Properties screen is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Security administration Procedure 5-3: RADIUS server procedures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




5-25

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 5-4: SNMP procedures

Create trap destinations

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 In the WebUI, select Administration > SNMP > Trap Destinations

Result: The SNMP Trap Destinations screen is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click Create.

Result: The Create SNMP Trap Destinations screen is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Delete trap destinations

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the Trap Destination and click Delete.

View trap destinations

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the trap destination and click Details.

Result: The Trap Destination details are displayed.

Security administration Procedure 5-4: SNMP procedures

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

View / modify community strings

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 In the WebUI, select Administration > SNMP > Community Strings

Result: The SNMP Community Strings are displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 To modify Community Strings, enter appropriate values in the respective fields and click

Apply.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




5-27

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6 6Alarm List

Overview

Purpose

This chapter contains the alarm list and alarm descriptions for 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge

Device. Procedures for clearing these alarms are detailed in Chapter 7, “Alarm Clearing

Procedures”.

The following information is provided for each condition:

• a description of the condition that includes the possible root cause

• the condition severity

• whether or not the condition is service-affecting

• the cards or systems to which the condition applies

Contents

BDI 6-4

BDIODU 6-5

CARDINIT 6-6

CONTCOM 6-7

DATAFLT 6-8

DBFL 6-9

DBFT 6-10

DBINVALID 6-11

DEG 6-12

EQPT 6-13

ETR-MISMATCH (card) 6-14

FACTERM-DEV 6-15

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-1

FELANLOS 6-16

FELANLSS 6-17

FELOS 6-18

FEPORTMISMATCH 6-19

FRCDWKSWBK 6-20

FRCDWKSWPR 6-21

INTTEMP [over] 6-22

INTTEMP [under] 6-23

LANLOS 6-24

LANLSS 6-25

LCK 6-26

LFD 6-27

LINKDOWN 6-28

LOCKOUTOFPR 6-29

LOF 6-30

LOFEGR 6-32

LOM 6-33

LOS 6-34

LOS-P 6-35

LPBKLINE 6-36

LPBKTERM 6-37

MAN 6-38

MANWKSWBK 6-40

MANWKSWPR 6-41

MISMATCH 6-42

NET 6-43

OCI 6-44

PLM 6-45

PRCDRERR-TOPO 6-46

PWR 6-47

REPLUNITMISS 6-48

REPLUNITMISSMOD 6-49

SSF 6-50

Alarm List Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




SSFODU 6-51

SWFTDWN 6-52

SWUPGFAIL 6-53

TIM 6-54

TIMODU 6-55

TRMT 6-56

UNKNOWN 6-57

UPM 6-59

USALS 6-60

VOLTAGE[high] 6-61

VOLTAGE[low] 6-62

WKSWPR 6-63

Alarm List Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-3

BDI

Description

Alarm Data Value/Meaning

Severity Level Not reported

AID PSS1MD4-1-8-{L1,L2}

Date Month/day/year that the condition

was detected

Time Hour:minute:second that the condition

was detected

Probable Cause • An improperly connected,

damaged or dirty fiber on the trail

between the local OTUk port

transmitter and the far end receive

• OTS/OMS layer failure on the

OCh trail

• The received power may not be

within the acceptable range on the

Far end input

Effect on Service NSA

Alarm Entity Type OTU1

Description Backward Defect Indication - OTU

Likely cause

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “BDI” (p. 7-4)

Alarm List BDI

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




BDIODU

Description


Severity Level Not reported

AID PSS1MD4-1-8-{L1,L2}


was detected


was detected

Probable Cause • An improperly connected,


between the local OTUk port

transmitter and the far end receive


OCh trail



Far end input


Alarm Entity Type ODU1

Description Backward Defect Indication - ODU

Likely cause

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “BDIODU” (p. 7-5)

Alarm List BDIODU

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-5

CARDINIT

Description


Severity Levels CR

AID PSS1MD4-1-8, PSS1P21-1-7


was detected


was detected

Effect on Service SA

Alarm Entity Type EQPT

Description Card initializing

Likely cause The card is in the process of

initializing.

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “CARDINIT” (p. 7-6)

Alarm List CARDINIT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




CONTCOM

Description


Severity Levels CR

AID FAN-1-6, PF-1-{2,3}, SFC-1-{4,5},

PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}


was detected


was detected



Description Card failure - communication

Likely cause See listing in “CONTCOM” (p. 7-7)

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “CONTCOM” (p. 7-7)

Alarm List CONTCOM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-7

DATAFLT

Description


Severity Levels MJ

AID EC-1-1, PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}


was detected


was detected



Description Card provisioning failure

Likely cause

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “DATAFLT” (p. 7-9)

Alarm List DATAFLT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




DBFL

Description


Severity Levels MN

AID System


was detected


was detected


Alarm Entity Type COM

Description DB Failure Local - copy creation of

processing failure

Likely cause

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “DBFL” (p. 7-11)

Alarm List DBFL

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-9

DBFT

Description


Severity Levels MN

AID System


was detected


was detected



Description DB Failure Transport - file transport

failure

Likely cause File transfer of database to RFS was

unsuccessful

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “DBFT” (p. 7-12)

Alarm List DBFT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




DBINVALID

Description


Severity Levels MJ

AID System


was detected


was detected



Description Database invalid

Likely cause

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “DBINVALID” (p. 7-13)

Alarm List DBINVALID

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-11

DEG

Description


Severity Levels MJ

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{L1,L2}


was detected


was detected



Description Signal Degrade - ODU

Likely cause See “DEG” (p. 7-15) for possible

causes.

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “DEG” (p. 7-15).

Alarm List DEG

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




EQPT

Description


Severity Levels CR

AID FAN-1-6, PF-1-{2,3},

PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}


was detected


was detected



Description Card-Failure Device

Likely cause

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “EQPT” (p. 7-17)

Alarm List EQPT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-13

ETR-MISMATCH (card)

Description


Severity Levels MJ

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}, FAN-1-6,

EC-1-1, PF-1-{2,3}, SFC-1-{4,5},


was detected


was detected



Description Extended temperature range violation:

non-ETR card.

Likely cause A non-ETR card is present in a

chassis that is provisioned for ETR

operation.

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “ETR-MISMATCH

(card)” (p. 7-19)

Alarm List ETR-MISMATCH (card)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




FACTERM-DEV

Description


Severity Levels MJ

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4, L1,L2}


was detected


was detected



Description SFP SEEP failure

Likely cause System cannot communicate with

SFP

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “FACTERM-DEV”

(p. 7-21)

Alarm List FACTERM-DEV

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-15

FELANLOS

Description


Severity Levels Not Alarmed

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}-{C1-C4}


was detected


was detected


Alarm Entity Type 1GbE

Description Far End Loss of Signal

Likely cause

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “FELANLOS” (p. 7-23)

Alarm List FELANLOS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




FELANLSS

Description



AID PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}-{C1-C4}


was detected


was detected


Alarm Entity Type 1GbE, FC100, FC200

Description Far End Loss of Synchronization.

Likely cause

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “FELANLSS” (p. 7-24)

Alarm List FELANLSS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-17

FELOS

Description



AID PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}-{C1-C4}


was detected


was detected


Alarm Entity Type CBRAR

Description Far End Loss of Signal

Likely cause

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “FELOS” (p. 7-25)

Alarm List FELOS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




FEPORTMISMATCH

Description


Severity Levels CR

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}-{C1-C4}


was detected


was detected


Alarm Entity Type 1GbE, FC100, FC200, OC3, OC12,

OC48, STM1, STM4, STM16,

CBRAR

Description Far End Port Mapping Mismatch

Likely cause

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “FEPORTMISMATCH”

(p. 7-26)

Alarm List FEPORTMISMATCH

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-19

FRCDWKSWBK

Description


Severity Levels NA

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-C{1-4}


was detected


was detected


Alarm Entity Type 1GbE; FC100; FC200; OC3; OC12;

OC48; STM1; STM4; STM16;

CBRAR

Description Forced switch to working

Likely cause A manual forced switch to “working”

has occurred.

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “FRCDWKSWBK”

(p. 7-27).

Alarm List FRCDWKSWBK

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




FRCDWKSWPR

Description


Severity Levels NA

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-C{1-4}


was detected


was detected



OC48; STM1; STM4;STM16;

CBRAR

Description Forced switch to protection

Likely cause A manual forced switch to

“protection” has occurred.

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “FRCDWKSWPR”

(p. 7-28).

Alarm List FRCDWKSWPR

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-21

INTTEMP [over]

Description


Severity Levels MN

AID EC-1-1, PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}

Date Month/day/year that the condition was

detected


was detected



Description Card over temperature

Likely cause

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “INTEMP [over]” (p. 7-29)

Alarm List INTTEMP [over]

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




INTTEMP [under]

Description


Severity Levels MN

AID EC-1-1, PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}


was detected


was detected



Description Card under temperature

Likely cause

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “INTEMP [under]”

(p. 7-31)

Alarm List INTTEMP [under]

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-23

LANLOS

Description


Severity Levels CR

AIDPSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-C{1-4}


was detected


was detected


Alarm Entity Type 1GbE; FC100; FC200; FC400;

CBRAR

Description LAN Loss of Signal

Likely cause • Damaged, cut or dirty fiber

connected to the local receiver

• Received power may not be

within the acceptable range on

local port input

• Damaged or dirty transmitter

inside pluggable module

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “LANLOS” (p. 7-32)

Alarm List LANLOS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




LANLSS

Description


Severity Levels CR

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4}


was detected


was detected


Alarm Entity Type 1GbE; FC100; FC200; Fc400

Description Loss of Synchronization

Likely cause • dirty fiber

• wrong signal from upstream

equipment

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “LANLSS” (p. 7-33)

Alarm List LANLSS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-25

LCK

Description


Severity Levels CR

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{L1,L2}


was detected


was detected



Description Locked - ODU

Likely cause

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “LCK” (p. 7-34).

Alarm List LCK

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




LFD

Description


Severity Levels CR

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4}


was detected


was detected



Description GFP Loss of Frame Delineation

Likely cause

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “LFD” (p. 7-35).

Alarm List LFD

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-27

LINKDOWN

Description


Severity Levels CR

AID FAN-1-6-CIT


was detected


was detected


Alarm Entity Type PLK

Description Link Down

Likely cause

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “LINKDOWN” (p. 7-36)

Alarm List LINKDOWN

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




LOCKOUTOFPR

Description


Severity Levels Not alarmed

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-C{1-4}


was detected


was detected



OC48; STM1; STM4; STM16;

CBRAR

Description Lockout of protection

Likely cause A user-initiated lockout switch request

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “LOCKOUTOFPR”

(p. 7-39).

Alarm List LOCKOUTOFPR

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-29

LOF

Description (line ports)


Severity Levels CR

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{L1,L2}


was detected


was detected


Alarm Entity Type OTU1, OC3, OC12, OC48, STM1,

STM4, STM16

Description Loss of Frame

Likely cause • an improperly connected,

damaged or dirty fiber

• the received power may not be

within the acceptable range

• the data rate may be inconsistent

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “LOF” (p. 7-41)

Description (client ports)


Severity Levels CR

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4}


was detected


was detected


Alarm Entity Type OC3; OC12; OC48; STM1; STM4;

STM16

Description Loss of Frame

Alarm List LOF

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Likely cause • an improperly connected,

damaged or dirty fiber

• the received power may not be



Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “LOF” (p. 7-41)

Alarm List LOF

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-31

LOFEGR

Description


Severity Levels MJ

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4}


was detected


was detected


Alarm Entity Type OC3, OC12, OC48, STM1, STM4,

STM16

Description Loss of Frame Egress

Likely cause

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “LOFEGR” (p. 7-45).

Alarm List LOFEGR

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




LOM

Description


Severity Levels MJ

AID PSS1MD4-{1}-{7,8}-{L1,L2}


was detected


was detected



Description Loss of Multiframe - OTU

Likely cause • Damaged or dirty fiber connected

to the far-end receiver

• Received power may not be

within the acceptable range on

OT port input

• Damaged or dirty transmitter

inside pluggable module on the

OT

• Problem at the upstream OT

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “LOM” (p. 7-46).

Alarm List LOM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-33

LOS

Description


Severity Levels CR

AID SFC-1-{4, 5}-OMD

PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}-{C1-C4}


was detected


was detected


Alarm Entity Type OTS, OC3, OC12, OC48, STM1,

STM4, STM16

Description Loss of Signal

Likely cause • An improperly connected,

damaged, or dirty fiber



Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “LOS” (p. 7-48)

Alarm List LOS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




LOS-P

Description


Severity Levels CR

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{L1,L2}


was detected


was detected



Description Loss of Signal - OTU

Likely cause

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “LOS-P” (p. 7-54)

Alarm List LOS-P

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-35

LPBKLINE

Description


Severity Levels NA

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4,L1,L2}


was detected


was detected



Description Facility loop active

Likely cause

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “LPBKLINE” (p. 7-56)

Alarm List LPBKLINE

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




LPBKTERM

Description


Severity Levels NA

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4,L1,L2}


was detected


was detected



Description Terminal loop active

Likely cause A terminal loopback is active

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “LPBKTERM” (p. 7-57)

Alarm List LPBKTERM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-37

MAN

Description (card)


Severity Levels N/A

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}, SFC-1-{4, 5}


was detected


was detected

Effect on Service N/A


Description Manually caused abnormal condition

- card in maintenance

Likely cause Card purposefully provisioned to

maintenance state

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “MAN (Manually caused

abnormal condition - card in

maintenance)” (p. 7-58)

Description (port)


Severity Levels N/A

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4},

SFC-1-{4, 5}-{OMD}


was detected


was detected



Description Manually caused abnormal condition

- port in maintenance

Alarm List MAN

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Likely cause Port purposefully provisioned to

maintenance state

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “MAN (Manually caused

abnormal condition - port in

maintenance)” (p. 7-59)

Alarm List MAN

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-39

MANWKSWBK

Description



AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-C{1-4}


was detected


was detected




CBRAR

Description Manual switch to working

Likely cause A manual switch to the working

facility is active

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “MANWKSWBK”

(p. 7-60).

Alarm List MANWKSWBK

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




MANWKSWPR

Description



AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-C{1-4}


was detected


was detected




CBRAR

Description Manual switch to protection

Likely cause A manual switch to a protection

facility is active

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “MANWKSWPR”

(p. 7-61).

Alarm List MANWKSWPR

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-41

MISMATCH

Description


Severity Levels CR

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4, L1,L2}


was detected


was detected



Description SFP mismatch

Likely cause SFP plugged in does not match

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “MISMATCH” (p. 7-62)

Alarm List MISMATCH

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




NET

Description


Severity Levels MN

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-C{1-4},

FAN-1-6-LAN1


was detected


was detected


Alarm Entity Type PLK

Description Link down

Likely cause Ethernet link connectivity lost

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “NET” (p. 7-64).

Alarm List NET

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-43

OCI

Description


Severity Levels CR

AID PSS1MD4-{1}-{7,8}-{L1,L2}


was detected


was detected



Description Open Connection Indication - ODU

Likely cause Network operator in external OTN

has deleted or not yet provisioned a

connection on OTN switched network

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “OCI” (p. 7-65).

Alarm List OCI

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




PLM

Description


Severity Levels CR

AID PSS1MD4-{1}-{7,8}-{L1,L2}


was detected


was detected



Description Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU

Likely cause Incoming 10G LAN signal not

provisioned correctly

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “PLM” (p. 7-66)

Alarm List PLM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-45

PRCDRERR-TOPO

Description


Severity Levels MN

AID System


was detected


was detected



Description Invalid topology

Likely cause A software upgrade has occurred and

cross connects from the previous

software release do not adhere to the

rules of the new release.

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “PRCDRERR-TOPO”

(p. 7-67)

Alarm List PRCDRERR-TOPO

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




PWR

Description


Severity Levels CR

AID PF-1-{2,3}


was detected


was detected



Description Battery off or power filter off

Likely cause

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “PWR” (p. 7-69)

Alarm List PWR

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-47

REPLUNITMISS

Description


Severity Levels CR

AID FAN-1-6, PF-1-(2,3), SFC-1-{4,5}


was detected


was detected



Description Card missing

Likely cause

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “REPLUNTMISS”

(p. 7-71)

Alarm List REPLUNITMISS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




REPLUNITMISSMOD

Description


Severity Levels CR

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4, L1,L2}


was detected


was detected



Description SFP or XFP missing

Likely cause The provisioned slot does not have

SFP inserted, or an in-service SFP has

been removed.

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “REPLUNITMISSMOD”

(p. 7-73)

Alarm List REPLUNITMISSMOD

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-49

SSF

Description


Severity Levels NR

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{L1,L2}


was detected


was detected



Description Server Signal Failure - OTU



between the local OTUk receive

port and the far end transmitter


OCh trail



Far end input

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “SSF” (p. 7-75).

Alarm List SSF

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




SSFODU

Description


Severity Levels NR

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{L1,L2}


was detected


was detected



Description Server Signal Failure - ODU



between the local OTUk receive



OCh trail



Far end input

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “SSFODU” (p. 7-77).

Alarm List SSFODU

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-51

SWFTDWN

Description

Indicates that a software upgrade is currently in progress on the NE. This alarm is active

if the NE is being upgraded, or has finished upgrading and is waiting for a command to

commit or to back-out of the upgraded software release.


Severity Levels MN

AID SYSTEM; PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}


was detected


was detected



Description Software Upgrade in Progress

Likely cause Download of upgrade software in

progress

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “SWFTDWN” (p. 7-79)

Alarm List SWFTDWN

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




SWUPGFAIL

Description


Severity Levels MN

AID SYSTEM; PSS1MD4-1-7


was detected


was detected



Description Software Upgrade Failed

Likely cause NE or specific card fails to upgrade to

designated software load

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “SWUPGFAIL” (p. 7-80)

Alarm List SWUPGFAIL

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-53

TIM

Description


Severity Levels MN

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{L1,L2}


was detected


was detected



Description Trace Identifier Mismatch - OTU

Likely cause • There is an error in the

configuration of the trace at the

transmit or receive end (TIM)

• There is an error in the fibering of

compatible SOET sources (TIM

or TTI Mismatch)

• The trace is not being generated

(TIM or TTI Mismatch)

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “TIM” (p. 7-85).

Alarm List TIM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




TIMODU

Description


Severity Levels CR

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{L1,L2}


was detected


was detected



Description Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU

Likely cause • Incoming optical channel trail

trace message doesn't match the

expected optical channel trail

trace message

• Mis-fibering

• Improper provisioning

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “TIMODU” (p. 7-88).

Alarm List TIMODU

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-55

TRMT

Description


Severity Levels CR

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4, L1,L2}


was detected


was detected



Description SFP transmit failure

Likely cause SFP fault at transmit port, or SFP

hardware failure

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “TRMT” (p. 7-90)

Alarm List TRMT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




UNKNOWN

UNKNOWN (card)


Severity Levels CR

AID FAN-1-6, PF-1-{2,3}, SFC-1-{4,5},

PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}


was detected


was detected



Description Card unknown

Likely cause

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “UNKNOWN” (p. 7-92)

Unknown SFP


Severity Levels CR (MN if protected or inactive)

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4, L1,L2}


was detected


was detected

Effect on Service SA (NSA if protected or inactive)


Description SFP unknown

Likely cause • SFP is of type not recognized

• Damaged SFP

• Damage to card holding SFP

Visible Indication

Alarm List UNKNOWN

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-57

Action Proceed to “UNKNOWN” (p. 7-92)

Alarm List UNKNOWN

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




UPM

Description


Severity Levels CR

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}-{C1-C4}


was detected


was detected



Description GFP User Payload Mismatch

Likely cause

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “UPM” (p. 7-95).

Alarm List UPM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-59

USALS

Description


Severity Levels NA

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4}


was detected


was detected


Alarm Entity Type 1GbE, FC100, FC200, FC400, OC3,

OC12, OC48, STM1, STM4, STM16,

CBRAR

Description Auto laser off (client port) due to

upstream condition

Likely cause • Network port has optical LOS

• Corresponding client port at far

end of this service has fault

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “USALS” (p. 7-96).

Alarm List USALS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




VOLTAGE[high]

Description


Severity Levels CR

AID EC-1-1, PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}


was detected


was detected



Description High Input Voltage Defect

Likely cause The voltage level of the external DC

supply is too high.

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “VOLTAGE[high]”

(p. 7-98).

Alarm List VOLTAGE[high]

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-61

VOLTAGE[low]

Description


Severity Levels CR

AID EC-1-1, PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}


was detected


was detected



Description Low Input Voltage Defect

Likely cause The voltage level of the external DC

supply is too low or the breaker

switch has been turned off.

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “VOLTAGE[low]”

(p. 7-99).

Alarm List VOLTAGE[low]

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




WKSWPR

Description


Severity Levels TC

AID PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}-{C1-C4}


was detected


was detected




CBRAR

Description Automatic switch to protection

Likely cause A protection switch has occurred and

reversion is enabled.

Visible Indication

Action Proceed to “WKSWPR” (p. 7-100).

Alarm List WKSWPR

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




6-63

Alarm List WKSWPR

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7 7Alarm Clearing Procedures

Overview

Purpose

This chapter contains the trouble-clearing procedures required to clear the conditions for

the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device

Before you begin

Disconnecting cables and/or replacing circuit packs may disrupt service.

Before taking action, determine the extent of service disruption caused by disconnecting

cables or replacing a circuit pack. Then, perform the action(s) deemed appropriate in

light of the traffic being carried and the nature of the failure.

Many trouble-clearing procedures require actions that are service affecting. These actions

are indicated by a caution message indicating the extent of the service disruption as

shown above.

Contents

BDI 7-4

BDIODU 7-5

CARDINIT 7-6

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-1

CONTCOM 7-7

DATAFLT 7-9

DBFL 7-11

DBFT 7-12

DBINVALID 7-13

DEG 7-15

EQPT 7-17

ETR-MISMATCH (card) 7-19

FACTERM-DEV 7-21

FELANLOS 7-23

FELANLSS 7-24

FELOS 7-25

FEPORTMISMATCH 7-26

FRCDWKSWBK 7-27

FRCDWKSWPR 7-28

INTEMP [over] 7-29

INTEMP [under] 7-31

LANLOS 7-32

LANLSS 7-33

LCK 7-34

LFD 7-35

LINKDOWN 7-36

LOCKOUTOFPR 7-39

LOF 7-41

LOFEGR 7-45

LOM 7-46

LOS 7-48

LOS-P 7-54

LPBKLINE 7-56

LPBKTERM 7-57

MAN 7-58

MANWKSWBK 7-60

MANWKSWPR 7-61

Alarm Clearing Procedures Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




MISMATCH 7-62

NET 7-64

OCI 7-65

PLM 7-66

PRCDRERR-TOPO 7-67

PWR 7-69

REPLUNTMISS 7-71

REPLUNITMISSMOD 7-73

SSF 7-75

SSFODU 7-77

SWFTDWN 7-79

SWUPGFAIL 7-80

TIM 7-85

TIMODU 7-88

TRMT 7-90

UNKNOWN 7-92

UPM 7-95

USALS 7-96

VOLTAGE[high] 7-98

VOLTAGE[low] 7-99

WKSWPR 7-100

Alarm Clearing Procedures Overview

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-3

BDI

Backward Defect Indication (BDI) - OTU

The OT port has detected a Backward Defect Indication at the OTUk Section layer. This

defect indicates that the peer OTUk port has detected a condition that is treated as Server

Signal Failure (conditions such as LOS, LOF or LOM would contribute to SSF)

This may be caused by the following reasons:

• An improperly connected, damaged or dirty fiber on the trail between the local OTUk

port transmitter and the far end receiver

• OTS/OMS layer failure on the OCh trail

• The received power may not be within the acceptable range on the Far end input

Severity Not reported

Service affecting? No

Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{L1,L2}

This procedure details the corrective action for a BDI against the OT port.

At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Check the alarms/conditions along the OCh trail.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Identify the farthest upstream alarm/condition relative to the far end OTUk port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Follow the procedure for clearing the identified alarm/condition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If the peer OTUk port is in a client domain (this would be the case when BDI is detected

on a client OT port provisioned as OTU1), request corrective action by client operators.

Alarm Clearing Procedures BDI

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

BDIODU

Backward Defect Indication (BDI) - ODU

The OT port has detected a Backward Defect Indication at the ODUk Path layer. This

defect indicates that the peer OTUk port has detected condition that is treated as Server

Signal Failure (conditions such as LOS, LOF, LOM, TIM, ODU-AIS, ODU-OCI or

ODU-LCK would contribute to SSF).



port transmitter and the far end receiver






This procedure details the corrective action for a BDI against the OT port.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Check the alarms/conditions along the OCh trail.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Identify the farthest upstream alarm/condition relative to the far end OTUk port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Follow the procedure for clearing the identified alarm/condition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If the peer OTUk port is in a client domain (this would be the case when BDI is detected

on a client OT port provisioned as OTU1), request corrective action by client operators.

Alarm Clearing Procedures BDIODU

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-5

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

CARDINIT

CARDINIT (Card Initializing)

The card is in the process of initializing:

Severity CR

Service affecting? Yes

Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}

This condition should clear by itself, or be replaced by another card alarm.

No corrective action is required.

Alarm Clearing Procedures CARDINIT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




CONTCOM

CONTCOM (Card Failure - Communication)

The NE has detected the presence of a card, but is unable to establish internal

communications with it. Possible causes for this alarm are:

• a faulty card

• a problem with the backplane

• a cable has been cut or disconnected from one end or the other

• the sub-tended shelf has been turned off

• the alarm panel on the sub-tended shelf has been extracted

• Fan, PPS: card not communicating with the controller hardware

• loss of power to 1/2 the shelf

This condition may be accompanied by system timing-related or card sanity conditions.

Severity Critical (Minor if inactive protected card)


Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}, FAN-1-6, PF-1-{2,3},

SFC-1-{4,5}

Note: If this alarm is present on a card when the master shelf controller hardware

undergoes a reset or a switch of activity, this alarm reappears as a Card missing alarm.

Refer to “REPLUNTMISS (Card Missing)” .

The NE has detected the presence of a card, but the card does not exhibit minimal

functionality. This alarm is raised when the integrated control hardware has detected an

indication on the backplane of card failure.

This alarm may be raised for the following reasons:

• Bent or broken pins on the backplane slot or on the card’s backplane connector



Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}, FAN-1-6

Alarm Clearing Procedures CONTCOM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-7

At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it doesn’t, go to the next step.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Remove the alarmed card completely from the shelf and examine the connector on the

backplane where the card was inserted to make sure there are no bent or broken pins.

Reinsert the card into its original slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Replace the card with a new one of the same type in the same slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Perform either a warm reset or a cold reset of the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device.

If the alarm is not cleared, contact your service representative.

Alarm Clearing Procedures CONTCOM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

DATAFLT

DATAFLT (Card Provisioning Failure)

The Card Provisioning Failure may be raised if a card rejects the provisioning parameters

given to it by the integrated control hardware upon a reset or due to a user provisioning

action. This may indicate a discrepancy on the database of the control hardware or may

indicate a problem with the software.

The card, against which the DATAFLT condition is raised, may not be able to provide

services since some or all of the provisioning parameters were rejected.

Severity Major


Applicability PSS1MD4-1-7, PF-1-(2,3), SFC-1-(4,5), EC-1-1


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Determine if there is a software mismatch on the NE. If so, resolve the software issue

first. The NE should be running with a committed software load.

CLI show software upgrade status alm

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Perform a warm reset on the card that has the DATAFLT condition raised against it:

CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset warm

Alarm Clearing Procedures DATAFLT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-9

Alarm Clearing Procedures DATAFLT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

DBFL

DBFL (DB Failure Local - copy creation of processing failure)

A download of a database backup from the remote file server (part of the database restore

process) will fail if there is not enough free space on the Active Main Equipment

Controller’s flash memory, and a database failure condition-local will be raised (DBFL).

If the temporary database cannot be read (meaning that the database cannot be transported

to the RFS), a database failure condition-local is set.

Severity Minor


Applicability SYSTEM

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Retry the database backup.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Contact your next level of support.

Alarm Clearing Procedures DBFL

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-11

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

DBFT

DBFT (DB Failure Transport - file transport failure)

If the file transfer of the database to the remote file server does not succeed, a database

failure condition-transport is set.

Severity Minor



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Retry the database backup.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Contact your next level of support.

Alarm Clearing Procedures DBFT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

DBINVALID

DBINVALID (Database invalid)

The DBINVALID condition may be raised as a result of the following:

• The serial number in the database does not match that of the NE because the PSS-1

unit was replaced.

• A downgrade of NE software has occurred.

• The database audit failed indicating some type of corruption of the database.

Severity Major




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 If this is a result of a downgrade, then follow the appropriate procedure in the

Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 User Provisioning Guide to restore the pre-upgrade database.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 If the DBINVALID condition is present as a result of the replacement of the unit, then

follow the appropriate procedure in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 User Provisioning

Guide to restore the database to a Control Card (control hardware integrated into the

PSS-1 unit).

Note: It is crucial to have the backup database be a duplicate of the one running on

the NE prior to replacement. Any data not backed up will be lost and may result in

lost services and interruption in traffic.

Alarm Clearing Procedures DBINVALID

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-13

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Review of the NE logs may provide an indication of the corruption of the database via a

failed audit function resulting in CRC errors. If the DBINVALID condition is present due

to a corruption of the database, then follow the appropriate procedure in the

Alcatel-Lucent User Provisioning Guide to restore the database to the unit from a valid

database backup file.

Alarm Clearing Procedures DBINVALID

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

DEG

DEG (Signal Degrade - ODU)

The OT port has detected a Signal Degrade Path layer. This defect indicates that local

OTUk port has detected Path layer BER which exceeds 10-6

.


• Damaged or dirty fiber connected to the local receiver

• The received power may not be within the acceptable range on local port input

• Power level out of range on the associated OCh trail

• Damaged or dirty receiver inside pluggable module

Severity Major



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Retrieve power level reading on the local port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 If power level is low on the DWDM facing port, identify the associated OCh trail and

verify the power levels along the OCh trail.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Identify the farthest upstream point relative to the far end OTUk port at which power

level falls within the expected range.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Check the alarms/conditions on the node located in Step 3 or the node immediately

upstream from point identified in Step 3.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Correct the problem identified in Step 4.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 If all power levels along the OCh trails fall within the target range, locate the fiber

connected directly to receiver of the port which detects DEG condition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Clean the fiber.

Alarm Clearing Procedures DEG

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-15

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 If cleaning the fiber does not clear the problem, replace the fiber.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 If the problem is detected on the client port of the OT, and the power level is within the

operating range, check for pluggable module alarms.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Replace the pluggable module.

Alarm Clearing Procedures DEG

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

EQPT

EQPT (Card Failure - Device)

The Card Failure - Device alarm text for the EQPT condition indicates a fault on the card

that has caused the system to declare a hardware failure. This condition may be declared

due to a failure in the SEEP or other unknown hardware failures depending on the card

type the alarm is raised against. This is a critical service affecting alarm for cards carrying

traffic and affects the traffic currently flowing through the failed device

The Port Failure - Device alarm text indicates a port initialization failure on the network

ports (10G ports).

Severity Control card (integrated into PSS-1 shelf)- Major. All other

cards - Critical

Service affecting? Control card (integrated)- No. All other cards - Yes

Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}, FAN-1-6, PF-1-(2,3), SFC-1-(4,5)

At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step. If this

condition is raised against the alarm panel or a fan tray, then after each step perform a

warm reset of the unit.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Perform a card warm reset.

CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset

warm

Alarm Clearing Procedures EQPT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-17

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Perform a card cold reset.

Note: Refer to Caution at the beginning of this procedure.

CLI config card <card_type> <shelf/slot> reset cold

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 If the alarm is against:

• A replaceable card — Replace the card. Follow the return and repair process to return

the faulty card to an authorized repair center for replacement. Go to Step 7.

• PSS1GBE, PSS1MD4, PSS1MSAH, or PSS1AHP card types —

Failure may be caused by a defective SFP or XFP, remove the SFP and XFP modules

and go to Step 2 to reset the shelf. If the removal and reset clears the EQPT condition

replace the defective SFP or XFP. Go to Step 7.

If removing the SFP or XFP modules and reseting does not clear the condition

replacement of the entire Edge Device is required. Proceed to the following steps for

the Unit Replacement procedure.

• EC card types — Replacement of the entire Edge Device is required. Proceed to the

following steps for the Unit Replacement procedure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Complete Procedure 3-1: “Vertical installation of 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device”

(p. 3-6) through Procedure 3-13: “Set the network element date and time” (p. 3-40) in

Chapter 3, “Installation and System turn up” in this document.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Configure and fiber the edge device to the original configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Follow the database restore procedure in the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 User

Provisioning Guide document using the FORCE option.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Stop. You have completed this procedure.

Alarm Clearing Procedures EQPT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

ETR-MISMATCH (card)

A card that does not support ETR operation is installed in a chassis that is provisioned for

ETR operation.

Note: Operation of non-ETR capable cards or SFPs in an ETR environment can result

in hardware damage.

Severity Major


Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}, FAN-1-6, EC-1-1, PF-1-{2,3},

SFC-1-{4,5},


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Verify that the PSS-1 unit has been provisioned for ETR status appropriate for the

environment (ETR for ETR environment - non-ETR for non-ETR environment).

If configured ETR in non-ETR environment. Disable ETR configuration with the “config

general” command and go to Step 5.

Note: If ETR provisioning is disabled, there will be no ETR-MISMATCH alarms for

non-ETR hardware in an ETR environment. It is then possible for hardware damage

to occur, even though there are no alarms.

If configured non-ETR in an ETR environment. Reconfigure for ETR operation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Verify that the alarm has been raised by a replaceable card. If so, proceed to the next step.

Alarm Clearing Procedures ETR-MISMATCH (card)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-19

If the alarm has been raised by a non-replaceable unit (PSS-1 OT or EC), replace the

entire PSS-1 unit and go to Step 5.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Verify the card that is currently installed is not capable of supporting ETR operation.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Remove the card and replace it with one that is ETR-capable.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Alarm Clearing Procedures ETR-MISMATCH (card)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

FACTERM-DEV

FACTERM-DEV (SFP SEEP Failure)

The SFP SEEP Failure condition is raised when the system cannot communicate with the

SFP to determine such information as power level and laser types. This condition is

equivalent to a port degrade, and service is not impacted until/unless a subsequent reset

occurs.

Severity Major


Applicability PSS1MD4-1-7


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Carefully remove and re-seat the SFP that is reporting the FACTERM-DEV condition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Remove and cap the fiber jumpers connected to the SFP unit and replace the SFP with

another unit of the same type. Reconnect the fiber jumpers as they were before.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Alarm Clearing Procedures FACTERM-DEV

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-21



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Replace the unit. Follow the return and repair process to return the unit to an authorized

repair center for replacement.

Alarm Clearing Procedures FACTERM-DEV

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

FELANLOS

FELANLOS (Far End Loss of Signal)

The Far End OT port has detected LAN LOS at its input.


• Damaged or dirty fiber connected to the far-end receiver

• Received power may not be within the acceptable range on far-end port input

• Damaged or dirty transmitter inside pluggable module on the far end

• Problem at the client equipment connected to the far-end OT

Severity Not Alarmed


Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4}

This procedure details the corrective action for clearing FELALOS against the OT port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Locate far end client OT.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Perform the steps in the procedure “LANLOS” (p. 7-32).

Alarm Clearing Procedures FELANLOS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-23

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

FELANLSS

FELANLSS (Far End Loss of Synchronization)

Far End OT port has detected LA Loss of 64B/66B block synchronization at its input.









This procedure details the corrective action for clearing FELANLSS against the OT port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Perform the steps in the procedure “LANLSS” (p. 7-33).

Alarm Clearing Procedures FELANLSS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

FELOS

FELOS (Far End Loss of Signal)

The Far End OT port has detected a CBRAR signal (e.g. FE or HD-DSI LOS) at a client

port input.









This procedure details the corrective action for clearing FELOS against the OT port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Perform the steps in the procedure “LANLOS” (p. 7-32).

Alarm Clearing Procedures FELOS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-25

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

FEPORTMISMATCH

FEPORTMISMATCH (Far End Port Mapping Mismatch)

The Far End Port Mapping Mismatch alarm text for the FEPORTMISMATCH condition

indicates two client ports assigned to a protection group are not provisioned the same.

Time slot assignments are wrong, such that a service does not appear on the same client

ports at the two ends of a point-to-point link. Or corresponding ports at the two ends are

not provisioned for the same signal rate and format. The condition is listed against the

near end port.

Severity Critical




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Identify the two ports in the protection group at the near end, and the two ports at the far

end.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Provision the near end and far end ports with the same signal rate and format. When client

signals are not GBE, the ODU0INTERWK parameter must be set to DISABLE. ODU0

interworking is only valid for GbE traffic.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Provision the timeslot assignments so that the same ports are used at both ends. For

example, the near end port C3 must be connected to far end port C3.

Alarm Clearing Procedures FEPORTMISMATCH

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

FRCDWKSWBK

FRCDWKSWBK (Forced switch to working)

This is a standing condition indicating that a forced switch back to the working is active.

The forced switch of working back to working condition occurs when a user initiates a

forced switch to work request within a protection group. A forced switch to working

forces traffic onto the working facility/equipment unless the working facility is in the

Signal-Fail state.

Clearing the manual switch clears the condition. In the absence of other outstanding

requests, a cleared forced switch back to work leaves the switch position on work.

Severity Not alarmed


Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-C{1-4}


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Display the protection group for the associated shelf/slot/port.

CLI show aps group <group> detail

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Clear the forced switch.

CLI config aps group <group> clearSwitch

Alarm Clearing Procedures FRCDWKSWBK

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-27

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

FRCDWKSWPR

FRCDWKSWPR (Forced switch to protection)

This is a standing condition indicating a forced switch to protect is active.

The forced switch of working facility/equipment to protection condition is raised when a

user initiates a forced switch to protect request within a protection group. A forced switch

to protect forces traffic onto the protect facility/equipment unless the protect facility is in

the signal fail state. A forced switch to protect also prevents reversion to the working path

from occurring. Clearing the forced switch clears the condition.

If reversion is enabled, a switch occurs to the work facility immediately after the forced

switch has cleared.





...................................................................................................................................................................................................


CLI config aps group <group> detail

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Clear the forced switch.


Alarm Clearing Procedures FRCDWKSWPR

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

INTEMP [over]

INTEMP (Card over temperature)

A high temperature threshold on a card has been exceeded. There may be a fan failure,

fan blockage, site climate control failure, lack of filler cards in empty slots, or a failed

sensor. This alarm is raised when a card is over the specified operating temperature

(measured by temperature sensors on the card).

Severity Minor



Note: It may take many minutes for any corrective actions to lower the temperature.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Verify that no fan alarms. Correct any faults found.

CLI show fan * alm

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Use the 1354RM-PhM or web interface to verify the speed of each of the fans in the shelf.

Normal fan speed is between 3000 and 3500 RPM; in the event of a temperature fault or

fan failure the remaining fan speeds will automatically increase to over 4000 RPM. If the

fan speed is in the normal range while the high temperature alarm is active, contact your

service representative.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Visually inspect the shelf to confirm that all filler cards are installed in all empty slots in

the unit. This helps ensure proper airflow.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Check for a dirty air filter. Replace it as necessary. Do not clean or wash the filter; use a

new one. Contact your service representative for replacement filters.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Use a thermometer to measure the ambient air temperature at the intake of the fans. Verify

that the ambient temperature is not abnormally high. If the ambient temperature is too

high, the NE may require additional cooling to bring it back to an acceptable operating

temperature.

Alarm Clearing Procedures INTEMP [over]

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-29

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Verify if other cards in the shelf report temperatures near their upper limit (within 10°C).

CLI show card <sh/sl>

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 If the alarm cannot be cleared, replace the unit.

Alarm Clearing Procedures INTEMP [over]

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

INTEMP [under]

INTEMP (Card under temperature)

The card temperature is below operational limits. There may be a climate control or

sensor failure. This alarm is raised when the card is under the specified operating

temperature (measured by temperature sensors on the card). The network element

requires additional heating to bring it back to an acceptable operating temperature.

Severity Minor




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Ensure that no environmental issues are present where the network element resides.

Resolve any existing issues.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Verify if other cards in the shelf report temperatures near their lower limit (within 10° C).

CLI show card <sh/sl>

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 If the alarm cannot be cleared, replace the unit.

Alarm Clearing Procedures INTEMP [under]

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-31

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

LANLOS

LANLOS (LAN port LOS)

OT port has detected LOS on Ethernet LAN or Fibre Channel facility. This defect

indicates loss of optical power at the input of the local LAN port.

These conditions may be caused by the following reasons:

• Damaged, cut or dirty fiber connected to the local receiver

• Received power may not be within the acceptable range on local port input

• Damaged or dirty transmitter inside pluggable module

Severity Critical



This procedure details the corrective action for clearing a LANLOS condition on an OT

port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Examine fiber and connector to the local port input.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Clean the fiber.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 If fiber is damaged or cleaning the fiber does not clear the problem, replace the fiber.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If there is a pluggable module alarm present on the local port follow procedure for

detected alarm.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Alarm Clearing Procedures LANLOS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

LANLSS

LANLSS (Loss of Synchronization)

LAN LSS is caused by dirty fiber or wrong signal feed into the GbE port (e.g., OC192).

Severity Critical



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 To clear it, one should clean the fiber or correct the signal sent from upstream equipment.

Alarm Clearing Procedures LANLSS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-33

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

LCK

LCK (Locked - OTU)

OT port has detected Locked condition at ODUk Path layer. This defect indicates that

network operator in an external multi-vendor OTN network has locked the ODUk

payload by user command. LCK maintenance signal is not sourced by 1830 PSS network.

This may be caused if the network operator in external OTN network has caused insertion

of LCK maintenance signal.

Severity Critical


Applicability

This procedure details the corrective action for clearing an LCK condition declared on an

OT port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Contact network operator(s) responsible for equipment that sources OTM-0.2 signal to

11STAR1 client port to clear the LCK maintenance signal.

Alarm Clearing Procedures LCK

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

LFD

LFD (GFP Loss of Frame Delineation)

An OT port has detected a Loss of GFP frame Delineation. This defect indicates that the

bit stream in the payload area used for GFP transport has degraded to the point where the

boundaries of GFP frames can no longer be reliably detected.


• A failure in the OCh trail used for transporting GFP layer

• A malfunction of the source or sync. GFP function

Severity SA


Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}-{C1-C4}

This procedure details the corrective action for clearing an LCK condition declared on an

OT port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Inspect the OCh trail which is used as a server transport layer for GFP stream.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 If any alarms are detected on OCh trail, locate the farthest upstream point and follow the

procedure for clearing this alarm.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Locate the far end OT that sources the GFP stream.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Perform a soft reset of both local and far-end OT.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 If Step 4 does not clear the problem replace far-end OT.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 If Step 5 does not clear the problem replace the local OT.

Alarm Clearing Procedures LFD

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-35

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

LINKDOWN

LINKDOWN (Link down)

The Ethernet link between devices is out of service. This alarm is raised in the following

conditions:

• On Ethernet ports with auto-negotiation enabled when the Ethernet link is down.

Severity Control card (integrated): Not alarmed

10GigE: Critical

Service affecting? Control card (integrated): No

10GigE: Yes

Applicability PSS1MD4-{1}-{7,8}-{C1-C4}, EC-1-1, FAN-1-6-LAN1


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Trace the source of the LINKDOWN condition to the associated card and port upstream.

Verify that the source is operationally up by checking the Admin state. If the Admin state

is Up, then toggle the administrative state from UP->DOWN->UP.

EMS Double-click the NE and then on the alarmed card’s

client receive port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Remove the fiber from the port where the LINKDOWN condition is raised and clean the

fiber and the bulkhead connector.

Alarm Clearing Procedures LINKDOWN

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Repeat Step 2 for the other end of the fiber and port where it is connected.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Replace the fiber jumper with a new one.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Perform a warm reset on the card that is the source of the Ethernet signal.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Perform a warm reset on the card where the LINKDOWN condition is raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Perform a cold reset on the card that is the source of the Ethernet signal.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Perform a cold reset on the card where the LINKDOWN condition is raised.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Re-seat the card that is the source of the Ethernet signal.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Re-seat the card where the LINKDOWN condition is present

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Replace the card that is the source of the Ethernet signal.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

12 Replace the card where the LINKDOWN condition is present

Tips to perform the Corrective action


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Check that the source is operational up.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Check that the cable/fibre is plugged in correctly.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Check that the other end is plugged into a matching Ethernet source.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-37

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Check that cable/fibre is the correct type for the Ethernet port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 If a cable/fibre tester is available check that the cable/fibre is correct, otherwise try

another cable/fibre.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Replace the unit.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

LOCKOUTOFPR

LOCKOUTOFPR (Lockout of protection)

The Lockout Of Protection condition occurs when a user initiates a lockout switch request

within a protection group.

A lockout forces traffic onto the working facility/equipment and prevents protection

switching from occurring. Clearing the lockout will again allow protection switching to

take place and will result in the lockout condition being cleared.




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Observe from the condition statement the location of the protection group member that

has the active condition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Login to the near end NE and perform the procedure “Determining the far end of a

service” (p. 8-2) to determine the NE and card that link directly to the (near-end) card

reporting the LOCKOUTOFPR alarm.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Open a new window and log into the far-end NE identified in Step 2.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Enter the following commands on both the near-end and far-end NEs to determine the

identity of the protection group involved in the active condition.

CLI show aps group *

Note the APS group ID / AIDs of the APS group.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Enter the following command on both the near-end and far-end NEs and verify that the

protection path is alarm free. Use the group ID/AID identified in Step 4.

CLI show aps group <x>

Alarm Clearing Procedures LOCKOUTOFPR

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-39

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Determine if there are any outstanding alarms on the system pertaining to the service.

CLI alm

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Clear all of the active alarms.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Clear the lockout request.

CLI config aps group [x] clear

Alarm Clearing Procedures LOCKOUTOFPR

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

LOF

LOF (Loss Of Frame)

A receive port on one of the optical cards has detected a Loss Of Frame. The LOF alarm

is raised if:

• the SONET framer detects framing errors in the A1/A2 overhead bytes as per the

SONET specification

• the OTN framer detects corruption in the Framing Alignment Signal (FAS) bytes.


• an improperly connected, damaged or dirty fiber

• the received power may not be within the acceptable range


Severity Critical


Applicability PSS1MD4-{1}-{7,8}-{C1-C4,L1,L2}

Use the following procedure for a Client Port LOF:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Query for the optical receive power on the port where the LOF condition is present.

CLI show interface shelf slot port

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Ensure that the source is compatible with the port that it is connected to. Check that the

source is a compatible type with the same line rate as expected at the receive port. Also

verify that the fiber is the correct type (multi-mode / single mode) and that the other end

of the fiber is connected properly.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Query the source of the signal for a reading of its output power (refer to the source

equipment manufacturer's procedures). If this is not possible, carefully remove the fiber

from the transmit port of the source card and verify the output power using an optical

power meter. If the output power is within acceptable limits, continue with Step 4. If the

output power is not within acceptable limits, the problem is with the source. Follow the

instructions on debugging from the source equipment manufacturer.

Alarm Clearing Procedures LOF

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-41

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Ensure that the administrative state of the port is Admin Up. If it is Up, then toggle the

administrative state from UP-->DOWN-->UP.

CLI config interface OT_pack shelf slot port state

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Remove the fiber from the receive port where the LOF is raised and measure the optical

power.

If... Then...

the optical power is below the required

threshold,

using standard optical fiber jumper cleaning

procedure, clean the fiber, and measure the

power again.

the optical power is within the required

limits,

clean the receive connector on the card.

If the LOF condition is still present, the problem may be with the card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Perform a card warm reset of the OT exhibiting the Loss of Frame.

CLI config card card_type shelf slot reset warm

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 If the client port has an SFP or XFP installed, verify the SFP or XFP (this includes

checking the SFP or XFP and replacing if necessary; do this before cold reset or re-seat as

it does not affect other client signals).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Perform a cold reset of the OT exhibiting the Loss of Frame.


CLI config card card_type shelf slot reset cold

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Replace the unit.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Use the following procedure for a Network LOF:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Perform the procedure “Path power trace” (p. 8-4) to identify the probable network

trouble-point for the light-path. The procedure guides the user through the investigation

and resolution of the problem tracing back through to the source of the light path.

If the problem is the head end of the path (the transponder card at the source) then:

1. Check the add E for conditions against the OT port and resolve any issues.

2. Verify that the source card network-facing port is administratively UP and

transmitting.

3. Verify that the add path is correctly fibered. If the add element has no transponder,

verify that the light source is compatible.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Verify that the far end transponder port to which the alarmed port is connected is of the

same type, and that the configuration of both ports is the same (for example, that the

encapsulation mode is the same for both).

CLI show interface shelf slot port (perform at both the near and far ends)

If encapsulation does not match, then configure the incorrect side to match up.

CLI config interface PSS1MD4 shelf slot

shelf slot/C1 tengige encmode [ cbrlan11.049 | cbrlan11.096 | gfp-f | gfp-p ]

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Ensure that there are no channel alarms or conditions for this channel on the near-end E.

If there are, clear them.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Query for the optical receive power on the network port where the LOF condition is

present.

CLI sh int shelf slot port

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 If... Then...


threshold,



power again.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-43

If... Then...

the optical power is within the required limits, clean the receive connector on the card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Confirm that the drop path is fibered correctly:

1. Confirm that the network port of the transponder is fibered to the appropriate port on

the appropriate OT.

2. Confirm that the mux port of the OT is fibered to the appropriate port on the

appropriate CWR8.

3. Verify that there is a fiber properly plugged into the alarmed port.

4. Verify that the fiber is the correct type (multi-mode / single mode) and that the other

end of the fiber is connected properly.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Perform a line loopback on the far end network port. If this resolves the local (near-end)

alarm then the problem is associated with the far end card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Perform a card warm reset of the transponder card.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Perform a card cold reset of the transponder card.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Replace the unit.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

LOFEGR

LOFEGR (Loss of Frame Egress)

An OT port has detected Loss of Frame on CBR2G5 (transparent OC48/STM16) or

CBR10G (transparent STM64) service transported over OTUk in transmit direction.



• Received power may not be within the acceptable range on far-end port input.

• Damaged or dirty transmitter inside pluggable module on the far end.

Severity NA



This procedure details the corrective action for clearing LOFEGR declared on an OT port.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Locate far end OT.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Perform the steps in the procedure “LOF” (p. 7-41) on the far end port.

Alarm Clearing Procedures LOFEGR

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-45

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

LOM

LOM (Loss of Multiframe - OTU)

This alarm is raised at an OT port when the OT receiver cannot synchronize to a

multiframe indicator of an incoming OTUk bit stream.



• Received power may not be within the acceptable range on OT port input

• Damaged or dirty transmitter inside pluggable module on the OT

• Problem at the upstream OT

Severity Major


Applicability PSS1MD4-{1}-{7,8}-{L1,L2}

NOTICE

Service-disruption hazard

A cold reset is service impacting if the unit is currently carrying services.

If there are services currently carried over the unit, it may be best to wait for a

maintenance window before resetting or replacing the unit.

This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the LOM declared on an OT port.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Query the receive power on the port where the LOM condition is present.

CLI show interface <shelf/slot/port>

If the power is below a minimum threshold, the problem may be upstream from that port.

Visually inspect the OT port connection. Ensure that there are no loose fibers. If so,

connect the fiber properly.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Check the immediate upstream OT for any alarm conditions. If there are any, clear the

failures.

Alarm Clearing Procedures LOM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Perform a card warm reset of the card exhibiting the LOM.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Perform a card cold reset of the card exhibiting the LOM.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Replace the OT. Follow the return and repair process to return the unit to an authorized

repair

Alarm Clearing Procedures LOM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-47

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

LOS

LOS (Loss of signal)

The corrective actions for the loss of signal condition are dependent upon the AID where

the condition is raised. The procedure addresses each of these.

The LOS can be against a client or network port. The following procedures address both

possibilities.

• LOS against a Network Port

• LOS against a Client Port

Severity Critical


Applicability EC-1-1

SFC-1-{4, 5}-OMD

PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}-{C1-C4}

PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{L1,L2}

LOS against a Client Port:


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Query the optical receive power on the port where the LOS condition is present.

CLI show int<shelf/slot/port>

Alarm Clearing Procedures LOS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 If... Then...

the power is below the minimum threshold, the problem is upstream from that port.


the power is within acceptable limits, the problem is with the card itself. Proceed to

Step 5.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Ensure that the source is compatible with the port and that it is on. Check that the source

is a compatible type (for example, if you are expecting a single-mode fiber signal (either

1310 or 155x nm), check that the source is not a multi-mode fiber signal (typically 850

nm).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Note: Query the source of the signal for a reading of its output power (please refer to

source equipment manufacturer’s procedures). If this is not possible, carefully remove

the fiber from the transmit port of the source card and verify the output power using

an optical power meter.

If... Then...

the output power is within

acceptable limits,

continue with Step 5.

the output power is not within

acceptable limits,

the problem is with the source. Follow the instructions on

debugging from the source equipment manufacturer.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Ensure that the administrative state of the port is admin up. If it is up, then toggle the



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Note: Remove the fiber from the receive port where the LOS is raised and measure

the optical power.

If... Then...


threshold,



power again.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-49

If... Then...

the optical power is within the required limits, clean the receive connector on the unit.

If the LOS condition is still present, the problem may be with the unit.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Perform a warm reset of the unit exhibiting the Loss of Signal.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Remove the SFP from the port on the unit in which it is inserted. Examine the connector

on the SFP and the receptacle connector on the unit where the SFP plugs into for any

damage. If no damage is seen, reinsert the SFP into its port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Remove and replace the SFP with another unit of the same type, being careful with the

connected fiber jumpers.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Perform a cold reset.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 Replace the unit. Follow the return and repair process to return the faulty unit to an

authorized repair center for replacement.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

LOS against a Network Port:


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Perform the “Path power trace” (p. 8-4) procedure to identify the probable network

trouble-point for the light-path. If after investigating, the source of the problem is the

head end of the path (the transponder at the source) then:

1. Check the Add NE for conditions against the SFC-OMD port and resolve any issues.

2. Verify that the source network-facing port is administratively UP and transmitting.

3. Verify that the add path is correctly fibered. If the add element has no transponder,

verify that the light source is compatible.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Verify that the far end transponder port to which the alarmed port is connected is of the

same type, and that the configuration of both ports is the same (for example, that the

encapsulation mode is the same for both).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Query the source of the signal for a reading of its output power (please refer to source

equipment manufacturer’s procedures). If this is not possible, carefully remove the fiber

from the transmit port of the source and verify the output power using an optical power

meter. If the output power is within acceptable limits, continue with Step 4. If the output

power is not within acceptable limits, the problem is with the source. Follow the

instructions on debugging from the source equipment manufacturer.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-51

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Ensure that the administrative state of the port is admin up. If it is up, then toggle the



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Remove the fiber from the receive port where the LOS is raised and measure the optical

power. If the optical power is below the required threshold, clean the fiber, and measure

the power again. If the optical power is within the required limits, clean the receive

connector on the unit. If the LOS condition is still present, the problem is in the unit.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Perform a warm reset of the head end transponder and source exhibiting the Loss of

Signal.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Remove the SFP from the port on the card in which it is inserted. Examine the connector

on the SFP and the receptacle connector on the card where the SFP plugs into for any

damage. If no damage is seen, reinsert the SFP into its port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Remove and replace the SFP with another unit of the same type, being careful with the

connected fiber jumpers.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Note: Refer to the caution at the beginning of the procedure.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


repair center for replacement.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


• A misconnected, damaged or dirty fiber

• The received power may not be within the acceptable range


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-53

LOS-P

LOS-P (Loss of Signal - OTU)

The OT port has detected an Optical Channel Loss of Signal Failure.


• A misconnected, damaged or dirty fiber on the trail between the local OTUk receive




Note: When a cross-connect is added, the LOS-P alarm is raised for ports A and B,

and then clears after a few seconds.

Severity Critical



Corrective action

This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the LOS-P declared on an OT

port. At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Retrieve power level reading on the local OT port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


connected directly to receiver of the port which detects SSF condition.

Alarm Clearing Procedures LOS-P

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Clean the fiber.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Alarm Clearing Procedures LOS-P

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-55

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

LPBKLINE

LPBKLINE (Line (Facility) Loopback Active)

A line loopback is active on the specified port. Loopbacks are user-initiated and may only

be cleared by manually removing them from the port.



Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4,L1,L2}, EC-1-1


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Remove the loopback from the port.

CLI config interface [shelf/slot/port] loopback line disabled

Alarm Clearing Procedures LPBKLINE

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

LPBKTERM

LPBKTERM (Diagnostic (Terminal) loopback active)

A terminal loopback is active on the specified port. Loopbacks are user-initiated and may

only be cleared by manually removing them from the port.



Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4, L1,L2}


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Remove the loopback from the port.

CLI config interface [shelf/slot/port] loopback

terminal disabled

Alarm Clearing Procedures LPBKTERM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-57

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

MAN

MAN (Manually caused abnormal condition - card in maintenance)

The MAN (card in maintenance) condition is raised on a card when the user has

purposefully placed the card into the maintenance state. Entities in maintenance still

provide service but don’t report alarms. They monitor for faults and raise non-reported

conditions. The maintenance state provides access to service affecting commands like

port loopbacks.



Applicability PSS1MD4-1-(7,8), FAN-1-6 , SFC-1-(4,5), EC-1-1

PSS1AHP-{1-8}-7, FAN-1-6, EC-1-1


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Manually place the card in service using the following command:

CLI config slot<shelf/slot> state up

Alarm Clearing Procedures MAN

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

MAN (Manually caused abnormal condition - port in maintenance)

The MAN (port in maintenance) condition is raised on a specific port on a card when the

user has purposefully placed the port into the maintenance state.



Applicability PSS1MD4-1-(7,8)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Manually place the port in service using the following command:

CLI config interface <shelf/slot/port> state up

Alarm Clearing Procedures MAN

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-59

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

MANWKSWBK

MANWKSWBK (Manual switch to working)

This is a standing condition indicating that a manual switch back to the working is active.

The manual switch of working back to working condition occurs when a user initiates a

manual switch to work request within a protection group. A manual switch to working

forces traffic onto the working facility/equipment unless the working facility is in the

Signal-Fail or Signal-Degrade state.

Clearing the manual switch will clear the condition. In the absence of other outstanding

requests, a cleared manual switch back to work will leave the switch position on work.



Applicability PSS1MD4-1-(7,8)-C{1-4}


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Clear the manual switch.


Alarm Clearing Procedures MANWKSWBK

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

MANWKSWPR

MANWKSWPR (Manual switch to protection)

This is a standing condition indicating a manual switch to protect is active.

The manual switch of working facility/equipment to protection condition is raised when a

user initiates a manual switch to protect request within a protection group. A manual

switch to protect forces traffic onto the protect facility/equipment unless the protect

facility is in the signal fail or signal degrade state. A manual switch to protect also

prevents reversion to the working path from occurring. Clearing the manual switch will

clear the condition.

If reversion is enabled, a switch will occur to the work facility immediately after the

manual switch has cleared.



Applicability PSS1MD4-1-(7,8)-C{1-4}


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................



Alarm Clearing Procedures MANWKSWPR

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-61

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

MISMATCH

MISMATCH (SFP Mismatch)

The SFP mismatch alarm is raised when the SFP unit inserted into a transponder card is of

a different type that is not a match for the card.

Severity Critical


Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4, L1, L2}


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Note: Verify the type of SFP that is currently inserted into the alarmed card.

If... Then...

the inserted SFP module is the incorrect type, remove the module and insert one that matches

the card type.

the inserted SFP module is the correct type, remove the module and re-seat it back into the

card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Remove the SFP and replace it with another SFP of the same type.

Alarm Clearing Procedures MISMATCH

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................


repair

Alarm Clearing Procedures MISMATCH

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-63

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

NET

NET (Link Down)

The 1830 Edge Device reports this condition against the FAN port, LAN1. The NET

condition is raised when the Ethernet port has been administratively enabled and Ethernet

Link connectivity is lost.

Severity MN


Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}-C{1-4}, FAN-1-6-LAN1


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Verify provisioned servers are valid and reachable. If not, consult network engineering for

correct server addresses.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Perform a warm reset on the unit.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Perform a cold reset on the unit.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Replace the PSS-1 unit with the integrated controller that is raising the NTPOOSYNC

condition. Follow the return and repair process to return the unit to an authorized repair

center for replacement.

Alarm Clearing Procedures NET

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

OCI

Open Connection Indication - ODU

OT port has detected Open Connection Indication condition at ODUk Path layer. This

defect indicates that network operator in an external multi-vendor OTN network has not

provisioned at least one ODUk connection in an OTN switched network. OCI

maintenance signal is not sourced by 1830 PSS network.

This may be caused if the network operator in external OTN network has deleted or not

yet provisioned a connection in OTN switched network.

Severity Critical



This procedure details the corrective action for clearing an OCI condition declared on an

OT port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Contact network operator(s) responsible for equipment that sources OTM-0.2 signal to

11STAR1 client port to clear the OCI.

Alarm Clearing Procedures OCI

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-65

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PLM

PLM (Payload Mismatch Indication - ODU)

PLM(ODU) won't happen within 1830-to-1830 NE connections (PSS-1 and/or PSS-32).

However, it could happen when a non-1830 NE's 10G LAN signal is connected to an

1830 NE, and is not configured correctly.

Severity Critical



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 To correct this, make sure the other NE sends out an OTU1 signal with PSI byte set to

0x80.

Alarm Clearing Procedures PLM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRCDRERR-TOPO

PRCDRERR (Invalid topology)

In this release, the system enforces a rule that a valid cross connect must terminate on one

of the following endpoints:

• a port marked as “External”

• a port marked as “No-connect”

• a transponder network port

In prior releases, there were no checks in place to prevent cross connects that do not

adhere to these rules. Therefore, if there are any cross connects already in place from a

previous release that do not adhere to the rules, this condition is raised on the NE in this

release after an upgrade from a previous release.

Services that are running over invalid cross connects may continue to operate, in which

case it may be best to wait for a maintenance window before performing this procedure,

or they may be interrupted, in which case a loss of service alarm is raised.

Severity Minor




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Examine the cross connects on the NE, and look for cross connects that do not conform to

the rules. These cross connects are considered invalid.

Alarm Clearing Procedures PRCDRERR-TOPO

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-67

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Delete the invalid connections. Any service that is running over an invalid cross connect

that is deleted is interrupted.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Recreate valid cross connects for the interrupted services.

Alarm Clearing Procedures PRCDRERR-TOPO

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

PWR

PWR (Battery off or power filter off)

Severity Critical


Applicability PF-1-{2,3}

Alarm Clearing Procedures PWR

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-69

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Plug in the power filter in the appropriate slot and turn on the power.

Alarm Clearing Procedures PWR

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

REPLUNTMISS

REPLUNTMISS (Card Missing)

The card missing condition is raised when a provisioned slot, that has both a programmed

card-type and an Admin state of In-Service, does not have a card in it. The slot has been

provisioned as such and no card has been inserted, or an inserted In-Service card has been

physically removed from that slot.

Severity Critical


Applicability FAN-1-6, PF-1-(2,3), SFC-1-{4,5}


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Verify that there is a card in the slot against which the alarm is raised. If no card is

present, insert a card of the provisioned type into the slot. To verify which card type has

been provisioned for the slot:

CLI show int<shelf/slot>

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 If... Then...

a card is present, remove the card and check for damage to the shelf’s backplane

pins and to the card’s backplane connector.

Alarm Clearing Procedures REPLUNTMISS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-71

If... Then...

damage is found on the

shelf’s backplane,

arrange for repair to the backplane. Do not attempt to reinsert

the card.

damage is found on the card,

but not on the backplane,

send the card for repair. Replace the damaged card with another

one of the same type, into the same slot.

no damage is found on either

the backplane or the card,

replace the card with another one of the same type into the

same slot. If the Card Missing alarm clears, send the original

card for repair.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 If the Card Missing alarm does not clear, remove the alarmed card and arrange for repair

to the backplane. Follow the return and repair process to return the damaged card or shelf

to an authorized repair center for replacement.

Alarm Clearing Procedures REPLUNTMISS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

REPLUNITMISSMOD

REPLUNITMISS (SFP/XFP Missing)

The optics module SFP/XFP for the port is missing or the card is not able to successfully

detect the presence of the module. The problem could be with the SFP/XFP or the card.

Typically, this alarm is raised if the SFP/XFP module is not installed or not properly

seated.

Severity Critical (Minor if protected or inactive)

Service affecting? Yes (No, if protected or inactive)

Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-{C1-C4, L1,L2}


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 If there is no SFP/XFP in the port where the SFP/XFP missing condition is raised, then

insert one that is appropriate for that transponder card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Remove the SFP/XFP from the port on the card it is inserted in. Examine the connector

on the SFP/XFP and the receptacle connector on the card where the SFP/XFP plugs into

for any damage. If no damage is seen, reinsert the SFP/XFP into its port.

Alarm Clearing Procedures REPLUNITMISSMOD

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-73

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Remove and replace the SFP/XFP with another unit of the same type, being careful with

the connected fiber jumpers.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Perform a card cold reset on the card where the SFP/XFP failure is raised.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Replace the unit.

Alarm Clearing Procedures REPLUNITMISSMOD

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

SSF

SSF (Server Signal Failure - OTU)

The OT port has detected an Optical Channel (Och) Server Signal Failure. A condition

that is treated as a Server Signal Failure (i.e., a Loss of Signal, LOS) was detected. Each

of the following conditions is treated as a Server Signal Failure:

• LOS-P (Loss of Signal – OTU)

• LOF (Loss of Frame – OTU)

• LOM (Loss of Multiframe – OTU)



receive port and the far end transmitter






This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the SSF declared on an OT port.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Alarm Clearing Procedures SSF

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-75

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


connected directly to receiver of the port which detects SSF condition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Clean the fiber.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 If the problem is detected on the client port of PSS1MD4 OT, and the power level is

within the operating range, check for pluggable module alarms.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Alarm Clearing Procedures SSF

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

SSFODU

SSFODU (Server Signal Failure - ODU)

The OT port has detected a Server Signal Failure at the ODUk level. Conditions that can

cause an SSFODU are:

• LOS-P (Loss of Signal – OTU)

• LOF (Loss of Frame – OTU)

• LOM (Loss of Multiframe – OTU)

• ODU-AIS



receive port and the far end transmitter






This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the SSFODU declared on an OT

port. At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Alarm Clearing Procedures SSFODU

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-77

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


connected directly to receiver of the port which detects SSFODU condition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Clean the fiber.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 If the problem is detected on the client port of the OT, and the power level is within the

operating range, check for pluggable module alarms.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Alarm Clearing Procedures SSFODU

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

SWFTDWN

SWFTDWN (Software Upgrade in Progress)

Indicates that a software upgrade is currently in progress on the E. This alarm is active if

the NE is being upgraded, or has finished upgrading and is waiting for a command to

commit or to back-out of the upgraded software release.

Severity Minor


Applicability SYSTEM; PSS1GBE-1-7

SYSTEM; PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}

Corrective Action

The corrective action depends on whether you want to commit the software upgrade, or

back out of the software upgrade. The alarm clears when a commit or a back out is issued

after the software upgrade is complete.

For more details on the upgrade process, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 User

Provisioning Guide .

Alarm Clearing Procedures SWFTDWN

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-79

SWUPGFAIL

SWUPGFAIL (Software Upgrade Failed)

The SWUPGFAIL alarm is applicable at the NE-level and/or the card-Level. This alarm is

raised when the NE or card fails to upgrade to the designated load.

Severity Minor


Applicability SYSTEM; PSS1MD4-1-7


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Determine the reason why the NE or card failed to upgrade.

CLI config software upgrade status

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Based on the information provided by the status, as listed in the following table,

determine the cause of the failure and resolve that issue first.

Table 7-1 Software upgrade status and actions

Upgrade status Action

Transfer failed This is an internal error indicating a failure between the

CC and another card. Retry the upgrade process.

Alarm Clearing Procedures SWUPGFAIL

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Table 7-1 Software upgrade status and actions (continued)

File access failed Problem accessing the load file on the CC disk. Retry the

upgrade process.

File corruption detected during

transfer

Retry the upgrade process.

Timeout The upgrade timed out. Retry the upgrade process.

Operation in progress No action required.

Install in progress No action required.

Transfer in progress Attempted to do an upgrade while SWL was busy.

1. Wait for the action to complete, or abort the current

action (config software abort).

2. Retry the upgrade process.

Card not found A card was removed while an upgrade was in progress.

Retry again (with or without the missing card).

Card type not found in catalog The software release does not contain a software load for

the card.

1. Check that you are upgrading to the correct software

load. Retry with the correct load.

2. If you are upgrading to the correct load, determine if

the card in question is required for normal operations.

3. If the card is not required, remove the card from the

system.

4. If the card is required for normal operation, contact

your service representative.

Lost communication with target The card experienced a temporary communications

problem. Retry the upgrade process.

Flash read failed The card has a problem with one or more of its flash

banks.


2. If the retry fails, then replace the card in question

Flash write failed The card has a problem with one or more of its flash

banks.


2. If the retry fails, then replace the card in question

Flash erase failed The card has a problem with one or more of its flash

banks.


2. If the retry fails, then replace the card in question.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-81


DB erase failed Retry the upgrade process.

DB read failed Retry the upgrade process.

DB write failed Database access failure.


2. If the retry fails, then replace the CC card in question.

TFTP server ip address not set Set the IP address of the TFTP server.

Failed to access catalog Retry the upgrade process.

TFTP server error Ensure that the server is up and running correctly.

TFTP network error There is a problem with the TFTP connectivity.

1. Check and correct TFTP server configuration.

2. Check and correct network connectivity.


TFTP timeout There is a problem with the TFTP connectivity.

1. Check and correct TFTP server configuration.

2. Check and correct network connectivity.


No upgrade path There was an attempt to upgrade to a release which is not

backwards compatible with the current release.

1. Upgrade to an intermediate release first.

2. Once the intermediate load is accomplished, retry the

upgrade process to the final upgrade release.

Operation aborted The upgrade was manually aborted. Retry the upgrade

process.

Invalid script The audit was unable to produce a valid upgrade script.


Load and bank are incompatible An attempt was made to load a boot load in an

application bank, or vice versa. This is an invalid

operation. Application loads can only be loaded into

application banks; boot loads can only be loaded into

boot banks. Perform the upgrade but this time specify the

correct bank.

Backup and restore host IP not set Set the backup and restore host IP address.

Database backup failed Retry the upgrade process.

Database restore failed Retry the upgrade process.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................





Couldn’t find database to restore There is a problem with the database backup server, or

the connectivity to the server or the database server

configuration.

1. Check and correct the database backup server

configuration.

2. Check and correct DCN network connectivity.

Confirm that the TFTP server can accept ping

commands (config tools ping <TFTP server>)

3. Check and correct the status of database server.

4. Retry the upgrade process once the previous steps are

complete.

Attempted activate before load Retry the upgrade process.

Bank is empty Retry the upgrade process.

Load not found on card An attempt was made to activate a bank with an incorrect

or missing software load.

1. Reload the software.

2. Activate the load.

Load file not found A software load file could not be found on the disk.

Repeat the upgrade to transfer the file from FTP to the

disk.

Load could not be activated The correct load could not be activated.


Operation interrupted by reset Card was reset while upgrade was underway.

1. Wait for the reset of card to complete.

2. Log into NE (if required).


Software version mismatch A commit failed because not all cards were running the

same software release. This error is not the cause of an

upgrade failure alarm.

Repeat the upgrade process.

Activity switch failed The CCs failed to switch activity, so the upgrade cannot

continue.

1. Resolve redundancy issues.



....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-83


Mate CC unable to take activity The inactive CC was unable to take activity, so the

upgrade cannot continue.

1. Resolve redundancy issues.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Perform a card warm reset on the card that failed to upgrade and try the upgrade

procedure again.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Perform a card cold reset on the card that failed to upgrade and try the upgrade procedure

again.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Replace the unit that failed to upgrade and try the upgrade procedure again. Follow the

return and repair process to return the faulty unit to an authorized repair center for

replacement.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Contact your service representative.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

TIM

TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch)

The TIM condition is typically raised when the received section trace does not match the

expected section trace. This may be caused by either an error in the provisioning of the

section trace, or an error in the fibering. For the Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch condition

(Network Ports) the cause would be an error in the fibering at the near end or the far end.

This alarm is raised if:

• There is an error in the configuration of the trace at the transmit or receive end (TIM)

• There is an error in the fibering of compatible SONET sources (TIM or TTI

Mismatch)

• The trace is not being generated (TIM or TTI Mismatch)

TIM (Client Ports)

Severity Minor



NOTICE


A cold reset or replacement of a the unit is service impacting if the unit is currently

carrying services.


maintenance window before resetting or replacing it.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Check that the section trace configuration of the client port is correct:

CLI show interface <card> <shelf/slot/port>

Alarm Clearing Procedures TIM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-85

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 If there are errors in the provisioned section trace correct them.

CLI config interface <card> <shelf/slot/port> sectTrace

expectedTrace

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Check the SONET device generating the section trace, connected to the client port that is

raising the TIMS alarm, and verify its configuration. If there are errors in the provisioning

of the section trace transmit state, mode or message, correct them. Refer to that device's

user manual.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Verify that the physical fibering between the client port and the SONET device is correct.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Perform a card warm reset of the card on which the TIMS condition is raised.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Perform a card cold reset of the card on which the TIMS condition is raised.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Replace the unit. Follow the return and repair process to return the faulty card to an


Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch (Network Ports)

Severity Minor




....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

NOTICE


A cold reset or replacement of a unit is service impacting if the unit is currently carrying

services.


maintenance window before resetting or replacing it.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Verify that the physical fibering between the network receive port of the transponder and

the output port of the SFD5, SFD44, or SFC2/4/8 is correct.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Perform the procedure “Determining the far end of a service” (p. 8-2) to determine the

NE and location of the transponder at the other end of this service.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Verify that the physical fibering between the network transmit port of the transponder and

the input port of the SFD5, SFD44, or SFC2/4/8 is correct.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Perform a warm reset on the local unit where the TIM condition is raised. If the problem

does not clear then perform a warm reset on the far-end card associated with the local unit

raising the TIM condition.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Perform a cold reset on the local unit where the TIM condition is raised. If the problem

does not clear then perform a cold reset on the far-end card associated with the local unit

raising the TIM condition.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Replace the alarmed unit. If the problem does not clear then replace the associated far-end

card. Follow the return and repair process to return the faulty unit to an authorized repair

center for replacement.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-87

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

TIMODU

TIMODU (Trace Identifier Mismatch - ODU)

This alarm is raised when the incoming optical channel trail trace message does not match

the expected incoming optical channel trail trace message.


• Mis-fibering

• Improper provisioning

Severity Critical



NOTICE


Failure to follow instructions in this step could result in SERVICE INTERRUPTION.

Notify the person in charge of the optical line so that traffic can be re-routed.

This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the TIMODU alarm declared on

an OT port.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Examine the NE alarm list. Determine the AID of the OT reporting this alarm condition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Check the local office records. Determine if the correct expected ODU trail trace message

for this signal matches the data in the expected incoming ODU trail trace message listed

for the report.

If... Then...

the correct expected ODU trail trace message

for this signal matches the data in the expected

incoming ODU trail trace message listed for

the report


Alarm Clearing Procedures TIMODU

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




If... Then...

the correct expected ODU trail trace message

for this signal does not match the data in the

expected incoming ODU trail trace message

listed for the report

Proceed to Step 6.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 At the user interface, obtain an updated alarm report.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Trace the fiber jumper connected to the line port of the OT identified in the AID, back to

the source OT. If the jumper fiber is connected to the correct source, go to Step 6.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Use local procedures to connect the fiber jumper to the correct source.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 If the alarm is still listed in the NE alarm list, then at the user interface, enter the correct

expected incoming ODU trail trace message. The TIMODU alarm should clear.

Alarm Clearing Procedures TIMODU

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-89

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

TRMT

TRMT (SFP or XFP Transmit Failure)

The SFP or XFP Failure condition is raised at the SFP or XFP equipment and indicates a

fault on the transmit port of the SFP or XFP. This is usually a laser failure where light is

not detected at the transmit port.

Severity Critical.

Service affecting? Yes.

Applicability PSS1MD4-1-7, EC-1-1


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Remove the SFP or XFP from the port on the card in which it is inserted. Examine the

connector on the SFP or XFP and the receptacle connector on the card where the SFP or

XFP plugs into for any damage. If no damage is seen, reinsert the SFP or XFP into its

port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Remove and replace the SFP or XFP with another unit of the same type, being careful

with the connected fiber jumpers.

Alarm Clearing Procedures TRMT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Perform a card cold reset on the card where the SFP or XFP failure is raised.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Replace the unit.

Alarm Clearing Procedures TRMT

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-91

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

UNKNOWN

UNKNOWN (Card Unknown)

The system does not recognize the inserted card. An unsupported card type, or faulty card

is present. This alarm is raised when a card has been inserted but never establishes

communications with the controller.

Severity Critical


Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}, FAN-1-6, PF-1-(2,3), SFC-1-(4,5)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Verify if the inserted card is supported for the current running release.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 If the card is not yet supported in this release and the card is a required type for the NE,

verify that the correct release is running on the NE. Upgrade the NE to the correct release

if it is not to support this card type.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 If the NE is running the correct release but the card is not yet supported in that release,

remove the card and replace it with one that is supported by the software running on the

NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If the card is supported and the NE is running the correct release, the problem may be

with the card itself.

Alarm Clearing Procedures UNKNOWN

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................


repair

UNKNOWN (SFP/XFP Unknown)

The optics module SFP/XFP inserted in the port is of a type that is not recognized and the

system cannot obtain manufacturing information on the unit. There is a possibility that the

SFP/XFP is damaged and the card is not able to correctly identify the module or that there

is damage on the card preventing correct identification of the SFP/XFP.

Severity Critical (Minor if protected or inactive)

Service affecting? Yes (No, if protected or inactive)

Applicability PSS1MD4-1-7, EC-1-1


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-93

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Remove the SFP/XFP from the port on the card in which it is inserted. Examine the

connector on the SFP/XFP and the receptacle connector on the card where the SFP/XFP

plugs into for any damage. If no damage exists, reinsert the SFP/XFP into its port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Remove and replace the SFP/XFP with another unit of the same type. Take special care

when handling the connected fiber jumpers.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Perform a card cold reset on the card where the SFP/XFP defect is raised.



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Replace the unit.


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

UPM

UPM (GFP User Payload Mismatch)

The OT has detected a GFP User Payload Mismatch. This condition is raised when the

encapsulation mode provisioning for the two OTs on opposite ends of an optical link do

not match.

Severity Critical



This procedure details the corrective action for clearing the GFP User Payload Mismatch

on an OT port. At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next

step.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Locate the OT with the UPM defect. Verify the encapsulation mode value.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Locate the OT at the opposite end of the link. Ensure that the provisioning for the

encapsulation mode parameter is the same for each OT.

Alarm Clearing Procedures UPM

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-95

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

USALS

USALS (Auto Laser Shutoff due to Upstream Fault)

USALS is raised when the client port laser is turned off either because the network port of

this card has an optical LOS, or the corresponding client port at the far end of the service

has a fault.



Applicability PSS1MD4-1-{7,8}-C{1,4}

NOTICE


A cold reset or replacement of a unit is service impacting if the unit is currently carrying

services.


maintenance window before resetting, replacing, or re-seating it.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Determine which network port on the near-end card is associated with the client port that

has raised the USALS condition. Network ports for this product are usually port 1. Look

for LOS, LOC or LOF at the network port or Out of Service type alarms at the associated

client port(s).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Using the applicable procedure for the fault detected in Step 1, clear the fault.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 If the desired behavior at the near end client port is to inject an Alarm Indication Signal

(AIS), idle frames, or an invalid signal and not to shut the laser off in reaction to the

upstream fault, issue the following command at the near end to change the LOSProp

(LOS Propagation) setting.

CLI config interface [shelf/slot/port] losprop [injectAISL

| idleFrames | invalidSig]

Alarm Clearing Procedures USALS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Using the procedure “Determining the far end of a service” (p. 8-2), determine the nature

of the fault at the far end. Look for LOS or Out of Service type alarms at the associated

client port(s).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Using the applicable procedure for the fault detected in Step 4, clear the fault.

If the condition does not clear, perform the following steps on the near end card.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Replace the unit. Follow the return and repair process to return the faulty card to an


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Repeat Step 6 to Step 8 for the associated card at the far-end of the service.

Alarm Clearing Procedures USALS

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-97

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

VOLTAGE[high]

VOLTAGE[high] (high input voltage defect)

The voltage level of the external DC supply is high. This alarm is raised if there is too

much voltage going to the breaker feed or the voltage is above the threshold. This could

be due to a problem with the power feed to the breaker card.

Severity Critical


Applicability EC-1-1, PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}

At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it not, go to the next step.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Using a DC voltmeter, measure the power going to the shelf and verify that it is within

the accepted limits for proper operation (see “Power filter input” (p. 2-77)).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Perform a warm reset on the unit that is raising the PWR condition.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Perform a cold reset on the unit that is raising the PWR condition.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Replace the unit that is raising the PWR condition. Follow the return and repair process to

return the unit to an authorized repair center for replacement.

Alarm Clearing Procedures VOLTAGE[high]

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

VOLTAGE[low]

VOLTAGE [low] (low input voltage defect)

Either the voltage level of the external DC supply is low or the breaker switch has been

turned off. This alarm is raised if there is no voltage going to the breaker feed or the

voltage is below the threshold. This could be due to the breaker being shut off, or due to a

problem with the power feed to the breaker card.

Severity Critical


Applicability EC-1-1, PSS1MD4-1-{7, 8}

At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If it not, go to the next step.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Check the breakers for the alarmed shelf and verify that they are ON.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Using a DC voltmeter, measure the power going to the shelf and verify that it is within

the accepted limits for proper operation (-48 to -52 volts).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Perform a warm reset on the unit that is raising the PWR condition.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Perform a cold reset on the unit that is raising the PWR condition.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Replace the unit that is raising the PWR condition. Follow the return and repair process to

return the unit to an authorized repair center for replacement.

Alarm Clearing Procedures VOLTAGE[low]

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-99

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

WKSWPR

WKSWPR (Automatic switch to protection)

This is a standing condition indicating that the protection facility/equipment is active.

This condition is raised only when reversion is enabled.

If the working facility/equipment is error-free then the condition automatically clears

once the wait-to-restore timer has expired.




The action required to clear this condition depends on whether or not there are

outstanding problems against the working facility/equipment.

At the end of each step wait to see if the fault clears. If not, go to the next step. If there

are no faults against working facility/equipment:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Wait for the wait-to-restore timer to expire.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Initiate a manual switch to work.

CLI config aps group <group> manualSwitchtoWorking

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



If there are faults against working facility/equipment:


Alarm Clearing Procedures WKSWPR

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Resolve the fault(s) against working facility/equipment.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Initiate a lockout of protect.

CLI config aps group <group> lockout

Note: This results in a standing condition for the lockout itself (LOCKOUTOFPR).


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




7-101

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




8 8Supporting Procedures

Overview

Purpose

This chapter lists the following troubleshooting procedures for the 1830 PSS-1 MD4H

Edge Device that are used in more than one trouble-clearing procedure.

Contents

Determining the far end of a service 8-2

Performing loopbacks 8-3

Path power trace 8-4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




8-1

Determining the far end of a service

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Check the OCh Trail name for the near end of the service.

CLI show xc brief

Search for the <shelf/slot/port> corresponding to the card and port in question. This will

provide the information required to proceed to Step 2.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Perform a trace to determine the far end of the OChTrail.

CLI show interface <shelf/slot port> srvcActivity detail

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Examine the output of Step 2 to determine the far end of the service.

Supporting Procedures Determining the far end of a service

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Performing loopbacks

For information and illustrations of loopbacks refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic

Service Switch 32/16 (PSS-32/PSS-16) Release 3.0.0 Product Information and Planning

Guide.

The following table lists the loopbacks that can be performed:

Card Loopbacks

PSS1MD4 • client port facility loopback

• client port terminal loopback

• network port facility loopback

• network port terminal loopback

Note: To create a loopback on a card using the CLI, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830


Attention: Loopbacks may experience packet loss during a warm or cold reset of the

card.

Supporting Procedures Performing loopbacks

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




8-3

Path power trace

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Perform a power trace of any affected paths.

CLI alm

sh condition

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Locate the first point along the path at which power out of range or absent is observed, or

there is a significant difference between expected and observed power. This point is

referred to as the "First point of concern" in this procedure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Examine the alarms close to the first point of concern.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Troubleshoot the alarms, concentrating on the points adjacent to the first point of concern.

The problem is most likely located between the first point of concern and the detection

point immediately upstream from it.

Note: It may take several seconds after corrective actions have been applied for

channel missing, channel absent, and power out of range alarms to clear.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Ensure that the relevant connection exists and is administratively up at the first point of

concern and at the point immediately upstream from it.

CLI show xc brief

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Examine the output for the connection of the appropriate band and channel. If the

connection exists then check the admin states of the connection and associated ports.

CLI show xc <shelf/slot/port> <shelf/slot/port> <band>

<channel> trace

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 If the connection or ports are admin down then the entities must be brought admin up in

order to clear the alarm(s).

Supporting Procedures Path power trace

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




To bring a connection admin up:

CLI config xc <shelf/slot/port> <shelf/slot/port> <band>

<channel> state up

If this clears the problem, go to Step 12

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 If this connection terminates on a transponder then confirm that the associated client port

is administratively up.

CLI show interface <shelf/slot/ClientPort>

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 If the client port is admin down then it must be brought admin up in order to clear the

alarm(s).

CLI config interface <shelf/slot/ClientPort> state up

If this clears the problem, go to Step 12

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Check that the programmed topology matches the actual topology.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

11 If there are multiple alarms at the same point of interest, attempt to resolve the amplifier

alarms first.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




8-5

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A access identifier (AID)

A unique identifier used to address equipment slots and ports, as well as facility tributaries, that

are defined for the system architecture.

add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing (ADM)

A high-speed multiplexing function offered by SONET that allows lower-level signals to be added

to or dropped from an optical carrier channel. The connection to the add/drop multiplexer is

through a tributary channel at a lower SONET carrier rate or a specific digital speed (for example,

DS3 or DS1).

ADM

See “add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing” (p. GL-1) for definition.

AHPHG

High Power High Gain DWDM Amplifier. See “ALPHG” (p. GL-2) for related term.

AID

See “access identifier ” (p. GL-1) for definition.

AIM

See “alarm indication message” (p. GL-1) for definition.

AINS

Automatic in-service.

AIS

See “alarm indication signal” (p. GL-1) for definition.

alarm

External notification or display of a failure condition. The indication of failure is towards an

external system interface or via audible or visible indicators.

alarm indication message (AIM)

A return message sent from one network element (NE) to another NE that indicates it has received

a signal that is so degraded that it is raising an alarm.

alarm indication signal (AIS)

A signal sent downstream by an NE to indicate that its incoming signal has failed.

alarm list

A status report that lists active alarms on the NE.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




GL-1

alarm log

A history of setting and clearing system alarms on the NE.

alarm severity

An attribute that defines the priority of the alarm message. The method in which alarms are

processed depends on their severity.

ALPHG

Low Power High Gain DWDM Amplifier. See “AHPHG ” (p. GL-1) for related term.

American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

A United States standards body that accredits standards for programming languages,

communications, and networking. ANSI is the U.S. representative in the International

Organization for Standards (ISO).

amplified spontaneous emission (ASE)

Optical noise generated in an erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) with and without signal input

power.

ANSI

See “American National Standards Institute” (p. GL-2) for definition.

APD

See “avalanche photodiode” (p. GL-3) for definition.

APS

See “automatic protection switching” (p. GL-3) for definition.

APSD

See “automatic power shutdown” (p. GL-3) for definition.

ASE

See “amplified spontaneous emission” (p. GL-2) for definition.

asynchronous

Data that is transmitted without an associated clock signal.

asynchronous transfer mode (ATM)

A fast-packet, connection-oriented, cell-switching technology for broadband signals. ATM is

designed to accommodate any form of data, including voice, facsimile, computer data, video,

image, and multimedia, whether compressed or uncompressed, whether real-time or non-real-time

in nature, and with guaranteed quality of service (QoS).

ATM networks will accept or reject connections based on a user's average and peak bandwidth

requirements, providing flexible and efficient service for LAN-to-LAN, compressed video, and

other applications that involve variable bit rate (VBR) traffic.

ATM

See “asynchronous transfer mode” (p. GL-2) for definition.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-2 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H



attenuation

The decrease in signal strength along a fiber optic waveguide caused by absorption and scattering.

Attenuation is usually expressed as dB/km.

attenuator

A passive device that reduces the amplitude of a signal without distorting the waveform.

automatic power shutdown (APSD)

A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of optical amplifiers to

avoid exposure to hazardous levels.

automatic protection switching (APS)

A network survivability method in which traffic is automatically switched to a protection route

when a failure is detected on a working route.

autonomous message

Message sent by the system to the CIT to notify it of any state change in the system. Autonomous

messages are not responses to a CIT-initiated command. Examples of these messages include

alarms, events (non-alarmed condition), notification of connections that are added or deleted, and

changes in the system database.

avalanche photodiode (APD)

A photodetector that can be regarded as the semiconductor analog to photomultipliers. By

applying a high reverse bias voltage (typically 100-200 V in silicon), an APD shows an internal

current gain effect (around 100) due to impact ionization (avalanche effect).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

B back reflection

See “Fresnel reflection” (p. GL-12).

background block errors (BBE)

Errors identified through OTN performance monitoring.

backward defect indication (BDI)

The OT port has detected a Backward Defect Indication at the ODUk Path layer. This defect

indicates that the peer OTUk port has detected condition that is treated as Server Signal Failure.

band optical filter (BOF)

A band-dependent optical card.

bay

An aluminum steel enclosure for rack-mounted equipment. Also know as a rack.

BB

See “broadband” (p. GL-4) for definition.

BBA

See “broadband amplifier” (p. GL-4) for definition.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




GL-3

BBE

See “background block errors” (p. GL-3) for definition.

BDI

See “backward defect indication” (p. GL-3) for definition.

BER

See “bit error rate” (p. GL-4) for definition.

bidirectional line switched ring (BLSR)

A survivable SONET transport architecture that protects against cable cuts and node failures by

providing duplicate, geographically diverse paths for each service. Network elements are

interconnected in a closed fiber loop (four fibers for a four-fiber BLSR architecture or two fibers

for a two-fiber BLSR). A service can reach its destination by traveling in either direction around

the ring. Exactly one-half of the bandwidth available between adjacent nodes in each direction is

used for working traffic, with the remaining bandwidth available for protection.

bit error rate (BER)

BER measures how accurately a bitstream is transmitted through a system. It measures how many

bits are received in error, compared to how many bits are sent.

BLSR

See “bidirectional line switched ring” (p. GL-4) for definition.

BOF

See “band optical filter” (p. GL-3) for definition.

broadband (BB)

A technology that refers to the always-open gateway to Internet-connected services delivered at

lightning-fast speeds.

broadband amplifier (BBA)

Optical amplifier that supports broadband technology.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

C CAD

See “channel add/drop card” (p. GL-5) for definition.

central office (CO)

A CO can be a building, a switch, or collection of switches where subscriber lines are joined to

switching equipment that connects the subscribers to each other, other subscribers, and/or long

distance subscribers.

CFR

Code of Federal Regulations.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




channel

A communications path or the signal sent over that path.

channel add/drop card (CAD)

Used with automatic power management; allows setpoints for a manual transmission line.

channel optical filter (COF)

COF cards facilitate the WaveKey encoding function, employed at service endpoints.

chromatic dispersion

The effect describing the velocity dependence of light travelling through a medium, depending on

its wavelength. For optical telecommunication signals, this effect causes the light pulses to spread

out and the resulting distortion in pulse shape degrades the signal quality.

CIDR

See “classless inter-domain routing” (p. GL-5) for definition.

CIT

See “craft interface terminal” (p. GL-6) for definition.

cladding

Material that surrounds the core of an optical fiber that has a lower index of refraction compared

to that of the core. The lower index of refraction causes the transmitted light to travel down the

core.

classless inter-domain routing (CIDR)

Routing for networks of variable sizes, defined by a variable-length subnet mask. By using subnet

mask values other than 255 (all ones) for a particular octet, the bits in the network address that are

not 'covered' by the subnet mask can be sized to create networks that do not conform to the

original Class A, B, and C subnet definitions.

CLEI

See “common language element identifier” (p. GL-6) for definition.

CN

See “control network” (p. GL-6) for definition.

CO

See “central office” (p. GL-4) for definition.

coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM)

CWDM is the method of combining multiple signals on laser beams at various wavelengths for

transmission along fiber optic cables. The number of channels is fewer than in dense wavelength

division multiplexing (DWDM), but more than in standard wavelength division multiplexing

(WDM).

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




GL-5

COF

See “channel optical filter” (p. GL-5) for definition.

common language element identifier (CLEI)

CLEI codes enable you to clearly and consistently identify and track virtually every type of

telecommunications equipment. In the United States, these codes are assigned by Telecordia, and

are 10 bytes long.

connector

A mechanical or optical device that provides a demountable connection between two fibers or a

fiber and a source or detector.

connector variation

The maximum value in dB of the difference in insertion loss between mating optical connectors

(for example, with re-mating and temperature cycling). Also called optical connector variation.

control network (CN)

The portion of the network that carries control and management traffic (for example,

communications between the NEs and between the NEs and the EMS). The control network does

not carry user traffic. The control communications use the SNMP protocol.

core

The central portion of the fiber that transmits light. It is composed of material with a higher index

of refraction than the cladding.

coupler

An optical device that combines or splits power from optical fibers.

coupling ratio/loss (CR)

The ratio/loss of optical power from one output port to the total output power, expressed as a

percentage.

CPE

See “customer premises equipment” (p. GL-6) for definition.

CR

See “coupling ratio/loss” (p. GL-6) for definition.

craft interface terminal (CIT)

A local interface between humans and a NE. It is used to issue commands to the local system or,

by way of a remote login, to another system on the same fiber as the local system.

customer premises equipment (CPE)

Terminal and associated equipment and inside wiring located at a subscriber's premises. The

equipment is connected with the carrier's communication network at the demarcation point.

CWDM

See “coarse wavelength division multiplexing” (p. GL-5) for definition.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

D data communication network (DCN)

DCN supports communications between network elements (NEs) and the network management

system (NMS).

DCM

See “dispersion compensation module” (p. GL-7) for definition.

DCN

See “data communication network” (p. GL-7) for definition.

dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM)

A multiplexing technique that uses close spectral spacing of individual optical carrier wavelengths

to reduce the total number of fibers needed to provide a given amount of information-carrying

capacity. The technique takes advantage of desirable transmission characteristics (for example,

minimum dispersion or attenuation) within a given fiber.

DGEF

See “dynamic gain equalization filter” (p. GL-7) for definition.

DHCP

See “dynamic host configuration protocol” (p. GL-7) for definition.

dispersion

The temporal spreading of a light signal in an optical waveguide caused by light signals traveling

at different speeds through a fiber either due to modal or chromatic effects.

dispersion compensation module (DCM)

Spooled fiber used to control excess dispersion found in certain fiber types at pre- and

post-amplification.

distortion

The difference in value between two measurements of a signal (transmitted and received).

DS3

Standard for digital transmission (American National Standard for telecommunications -

Carrier-to-Customer Installation - DS3 Metallic Interface, ANSI T1.404- 1989).

DWDM

See “dense wavelength division multiplexing” (p. GL-7) for definition.

dynamic gain equalization filter (DGEF)

A filter that equalizes the gain of an optical signal.

dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP)

DHCP allows a DHCP server to automatically assign an IP address to a computer's TCP/IP stack

software. The number is taken from a defined range of numbers for a given network.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




GL-7

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E earth

The European term for electrical ground.

EC

See “equipment controller” (p. GL-9) for definition.

EDFA

See “erbium-doped fiber amplifier” (p. GL-9) for definition.

edge node

A node that connects to external network or customer equipment, as opposed to providing an

interconnection point between other nodes. It is located at the "edge" of the network.

egress

Traffic leaving a network

EIA

See “Electronic Industries Alliance” (p. GL-8) for definition.

electrical variable optical attentuator (eVOA)

Works with the Tap module to provide input for Wavelength Tracker modulation and provides

optical tap for feedback signal to the Wavelength Tracker.

electromagnetic capability (EMC)

EMC is the ability of a device or system to function without error in its intended electromagnetic

environment

electromagnetic interference (EMI)

EMI refers to the emissions (high-energy, electrically induced magnetic fields) from a device or

system that interfere with the normal operation of another device or system.

Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)

Group that specifies electrical transmission standards. The EIA and TIA have developed

numerous well-known communications standards, including EIA/TIA-232 and EIA/TIA-449.

electrostatic discharge (ESD)

Static electrical energy potentially harmful to circuit packs and humans.

Element Management System (EMS)

The EMS provides an efficient means of managing the equipment and services within a network,

including creating new services, diagnosing faults, and planning for growth. It includes interfaces

to external systems to allow functions such as billing, service orders, and service level agreement

(SLA) management.

EMC

See “electromagnetic capability” (p. GL-8) for definition.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




EMI

See “electromagnetic interference” (p. GL-8) for definition.

EMS

See “Element Management System” (p. GL-8) for definition.

EN

European Norm; a German acronym that stands for “Europaïsche Norm.”

Engineering rules

A set of rules that determine the system configuration possibilities based on fiber type, OA, rate,

and number of wavelengths. These rules also determine the maximum loss per span that can be

tolerated, the maximum distance between spans allowed, and the maximum number of spans that

can be supported.

equipment controller (EC)

EC is the equipment controller card˙, in a chassis with replaceable controllers, or it is the

integrated control hardware in a PSS-1.

erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA)

A type of amplifier with a short length of fiber that has been doped with erbium and spliced into

the operating single-mode fiber (SMF) . A three-port wavelength division multiplexer (WDM) is

used, with one incoming port connected to the operating fiber carrying the primary signal in the

1550-nm window, one incoming port attached to a pump laser operating at 980 nm or 1480 nm,

and the one outgoing port connected to the operating fiber.

ESD

See “electrostatic discharge” (p. GL-8) for definition.

Ethernet LAN

A LAN conformant to the 802.3 IEEE standard. This standard supports communications over

shared media where only one device can transmit while all other devices listen. A collision

detection and handling mechanism is incorporated into the standard. Devices on the LAN

communicate by sending Ethernet packets containing a Media Access Control (MAC) address for

the source and destination. Setting the destination MAC address to all ones supports packet

broadcast to all devices on the LAN.

ETSI

See “European Telecommunications Standards Institute” (p. GL-9) for definition.

European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI)

Located in Sophia-Antipolis, France, ETSI is the European counterpart to ANSI. Its task is to

pave the way for telecommunications integration in the European community as part of the single

European market program. It establishes telecommunication standards for the European

community.

eVOA

See “electrical variable optical attentuator” (p. GL-8) for definition.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




GL-9

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

F failure

Occurs when a fault cause persists for a certain period of time.

failure in time (FIT)

A unit of failure rate in reliability analysis. One FIT is equivalent to one failure per one billion

operating hours.

failure rate

The number of failures of a device per unit of time.

FC

See “fiber optic connector” (p. GL-10) for definition.

FCC

See “Federal Communications Commission” (p. GL-10) for definition.

FCS

See “frame check sequence” (p. GL-12) for definition.

FDA

See “Food and Drug Administration” (p. GL-11) for definition.

FDDI

See “fiber distributed data interface” (p. GL-10) for definition.

FDI

See “forward defect indicator” (p. GL-11) for definition.

FEC

See “forward error correction” (p. GL-11) for definition.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

The U.S. federal regulatory agency responsible for the regulation of interstate and international

communications by radio, television, wire, satellite, and cable.

Ferrule

A rigid tube that confines or holds a fiber as part of a connector assembly.

fiber distributed data interface (FDDI)

A set of ANSI protocols used for sending digital data over fiber optic cable. FDDI networks are

token-passing networks and support data rates of up to 100 Mbps.

fiber optic cable

A cable containing one or more optical fibers.

fiber optic connector (FC)

A threaded optical connector for single-mode or multimode fiber and applications requiring low

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




back reflection.

field-programmable gate array (FPGA)

General purpose integrated chip; chip's functions can be programmed by software. FPGAs are

mostly used for rapid development and small or medium quantities production.

file transfer protocol (FTP)

A protocol used for exchanging files over the Internet. FTP uses the Internet's TCP/IP protocols to

enable data transfer. FTP is most commonly used to download/upload a file to/from a server using

the Internet.

FIT

See “failure in time” (p. GL-10) for definition.

FIT rate

The number of device failures in one billion device hours.

flash disk memory module (FMM)

A nonvolatile memory device used to store the installation software generic or the NE database.

flow

Usually refers to the movement of packets within the network (that is, packet flow).

FMM

See “flash disk memory module” (p. GL-11) for definition.

FOADM

Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing.

Food and Drug Administration (FDA)

An agency of the United States Department of Health and Human Services and is responsible for

the safety regulation of most types of foods, dietary supplements, drugs, vaccines, biological

medical products, blood products, medical devices, radiation-emitting devices, veterinary

products, and cosmetics.

forward defect indicator (FDI)

An automatic and fully distributed capability which indicates a failure in a server networking

layer (e.g., Physical Layer). When used with other mechanisms such as CV (Connectivity

Verification), it can indicate defects such as misbranching of LSPs and errors in swapping LSP

label.

forward error correction (FEC)

A technique used for error detection and correction in which the transmitting host computer

includes some number of redundant bits in the payload (data field) of a block or frame of data.

The receiving device uses those bits to detect, isolate and correct any errors created in

transmission. FEC avoids having to retransmit information which incurred errors in network

transit.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




GL-11

FPGA

See “field-programmable gate array” (p. GL-11) for definition.

frame check sequence (FCS)

Extra characters added to a frame for error control purposes. Used in HDLC, Frame Relay, and

other data link layer protocols.

Fresnel reflection

A reflection of light that occurs at the air-glass interface at the ends of an optical fiber. See “back

reflection” (p. GL-3) for related term.

FTP

See “file transfer protocol” (p. GL-11) for definition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

G gain

The increase in power and magnitude of a signal.

gateway network element (GNE)

A system node that has a physical attachment to the management system to support the access of

the remote NE. The number of remote NEs a GNE can serve is specified in terms of the number

of OSI stack associations that the GNE can support without running out of local resources.

GbE

See “Gigabit Ethernet” (p. GL-12) for definition.

generic framing protocol (GFP)

Provides a generic mechanism to adapt traffic from higher-layer client signals over an

octet-synchronous transport network. Client signals may be PDU oriented (e.g., PPP/IP or

Ethernet MAC), block oriented (e.g., Fiber Channel or ESCON) or a Constant Bit Rate (CBR)

stream.

GFP

See “generic framing protocol” (p. GL-12) for definition.

Gigabit Ethernet (GBE)

A transmission technology based on the Ethernet frame format and protocol used in local area

networks (LANs) that provides a data rate of one billion bits (one gigabit) per second. Gigabit

Ethernet is defined in the IEEE 802.3 standard and is currently used as the backbone in many

enterprise networks.

glass through-connection

A pair of optical connections between two segments that terminate on the same site.

GNE

See “gateway network element” (p. GL-12) for definition.

graphical user interface (GUI)

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




A program interface that takes advantage of the computer's graphics capabilities to make the

program easier to use.

grooming

Consolidating or segregating traffic.

grooming node

A node on which incoming signals of lower rates are added (or aggregated) into a higher-rate

signal for more efficient transport.

ground

The North American term for electrical earth.

GUI

See “graphical user interface” (p. GL-12) for definition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

I ILA

See “in-line amplifier” (p. GL-13) for definition.

in-line amplifier (ILA)

A repeater used in WDM technology. See “repeater” (p. GL-23) for related term.

ingress

Traffic entering a network.

insertion loss

The loss of power that results from inserting a component, such as a connector or splice, into a

previously continuous path.

International Standards Organization (ISO)

A United Nations agency concerned with international standardization in a broad range of

industrial and technical fields.

International Telecommunications Union (ITU)

An international civil organization established to promote standardized telecommunications on a

worldwide basis.

Internet protocol (IP)

A standard protocol designed for use in interconnected systems of packet-switched computer

communication networks. The Internet Protocol provides for transmitting blocks of data called

datagrams from sources to destinations, where sources and destinations are hosts identified by

fixed-length addresses. The Internet Protocol also provides for fragmentation and reassembly of

long datagrams, if necessary, for transmission through small-packet networks.

Internet protocol security (IPsec)

A developing standard for security at the network or packet processing layer of network

communication. Earlier security approaches have inserted security at the application layer of the

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




GL-13

communications model. IPsec is especially useful for implementing virtual private networks and

for remote user access through dial-up connection to private networks.

Internet service provider (ISP)

A company that provides individuals and other companies access to the Internet and other related

services, such as Web site building and virtual hosting.

IP

See “Internet protocol” (p. GL-13) for definition.

IPsec (Internet Protocol Security)

See “Internet protocol security” (p. GL-13) for definition.

ISO

See “International Standards Organization” (p. GL-13) for definition.

ISP

See “Internet service provider” (p. GL-14) for definition.

ITU

See “International Telecommunications Union” (p. GL-13) for definition

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

J jacket

The outer, protective covering of the cable.

jitter

Small and rapid variations in the timing of a waveform due to noise, changes in component

characteristics, supply voltages, or imperfect synchronizing circuits.

jumper

A short fiber optic cable with connectors on both ends.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

L lambda (λ)

The eleventh letter in the Greek alphabet. In optical fiber networking, the term lambda refers to an

individual optical wavelength. See “wavelength” (p. GL-32) for related term.

laser bias current (LBC)

Current that runs through the laser to make it work. LBC is monitored by performance

monitoring. If the current goes beyond a certain threshold, the circuit pack must be replaced.

LBC

See “laser bias current” (p. GL-14) for definition.

LBO

See “line build out” (p. GL-15) for definition.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




LC

See “Lucent connector” (p. GL-15) for definition.

LD

See “line driver” (p. GL-15) for definition.

LGX

A SONET device that contains ports for optical fiber connections to an optical network element

(NE). An LGX is used to make and change connections to an NE without changing the cabling on

the NE itself.

line build out (LBO)

Attenuation used to simulate a load.

line driver (LD)

An amplifier used to improve the strength of a signal at its source by driving the input of the

transmission line with an amplified signal.

link state advertisement (LSA)

A broadcast message that advertises a link's current status.

LOF

See “loss of frame” (p. GL-15) for definition.

long reach (LR)

An optic standard that constrains the output power of transmitters and the sensitivity of receivers

for long-haul applications (up to 80 km) without the need for regeneration.

LOS

See “loss of service/loss of signal” (p. GL-15) for definition.

loss

The amount of a signal's power, expressed in dB, that is lost in connectors, splices, or fiber

defects.

loss of frame (LOF)

Loss of frame is detected when the OOF (out-of-frame) anomaly persists for a certain time.

loss of service/loss of signal (LOS)

A condition where the optical input power falls below a certain threshold.

LR

See “long reach” (p. GL-15) for definition.

LSA

See “link state advertisement” (p. GL-15) for definition.

Lucent connector (LC)

Designation for a small-form-factor (SFF) design based on a proven 1.25-mm ceramic ferrule.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




GL-15

This connector uses RJ-style latching. It facilitates high-speed applications with lower power

requirements due to lower insertion loss (0.1 dB typical) and higher return loss (55-dB single

mode).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

M MAC

See “media access control” (p. GL-16) for definition.

management information base (MIB)

A formal description of a set of network objects that can be managed using the Simple Network

Management Protocol (SNMP). The information is represented in a tree format.

margin

The allowance for attenuation in addition to that explicitly accounted for in system design.

master controller (MC)

The system's master controller (MC) card.

MC

See “master controller” (p. GL-16) for definition.

MD4H

A PSS-1 Multiservice Dual module unit with 4 client ports per module, which is temperature

Hardened.

mean time between failures (MTBF)

The expected average time between failures usually expressed in hours.

mean time to repair (MTTR)

The average time that it takes until a failure is repaired. MTTR is usually expressed in hours.

media access control (MAC)

The MAC address is a computer's unique hardware number. The MAC address is used by the

media access control sublayer of the data link layer of telecommunications protocols.

mesh

A type of network configuration that combines ROADMs to support mesh channel connectivity

between the ROADMs without O-E-O for transmission. It is operated as a single NE with as

many as four degrees (bidirectional DWDM interfaces) that comprise two lines for the east and

two for the west.

MIB

See “management information base” (p. GL-16) for definition.

mid-stage access amplifier (MSA)

An MSA has two amplifier stages between which can be fibered a DCM/DCF card or an external

dispersion compensation unit.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




modulation

A process that modifies the characteristic of one wave (the carrier) by another wave (the signal).

Examples include amplitude modulation (AM), frequency modulation (FM), and pulse-coded

modulation (PCM).

MSA

See “mid-stage access amplifier” (p. GL-16) for definition.

MTBF

See “mean time between failures” (p. GL-16) for definition.

MTTR

See “mean time to repair” (p. GL-16) for definition.

multimode fiber

An optical fiber that has a core large enough to propagate more than one mode of light. The

typical diameter is 62.5 micrometers.

multiplexer (MUX)

A device that combines two or more signals into a single output.

multiplexing

The process that transmits two or more signals over a single communications channel. Examples

include time-division multiplexing and wavelength-division multiplexing.

MUX

See “multiplexer” (p. GL-17) for definition.

muxponder

A networking device that multiplexes and transponds GbE signals.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

N NE

See “network element” (p. GL-17) for definition.

NEBS

See “Network Equipment Building System requirements” (p. GL-18) for definition.

network element (NE)

Processor-controlled entity of a telecommunications network that primarily provides switching

and transport network functions and contains network operations functions.

For 1830 PSS, a configuration of 1830 PSS equipment at a single site, addressed as a single entity,

and under the control of a single controller (NE). The types of NEs are ILA (in-line amplifier) and

ADM (add/drop multiplexer).

Network Element Management System (NMS)

The NMS provides an efficient means of managing the equipment and services within a network,

including creating new services, diagnosing faults, and planning for growth. It has interfaces to

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




GL-17

external systems to allow functions such as billing, service orders, and service level agreement

(SLA) management.

Network Equipment Building System requirements (NEBS)

Developed by Telcordia, standards that vendors must adhere to if they want to sell equipment to

the Regional Bell Operating Companies (RBOCs) and the Competitive Local Exchange Carriers

(CLECs).

network services

Services that the network provider creates only as infrastructure to support user services. For

example, a VPN network service is used to implement an Ethernet service.

network time protocol (NTP)

Internet protocol used to synchronize time between network equipment.

NMS

See “Network Element Management System” (p. GL-17) for definition.

node

A node (or network element) is a set of one or more 1830 PSS-32 shelves that are viewed as a

single entity by the Network Management System. A node can be any of the following:

• up to two single optical shelves

• a single electrical shelf

• a single electrical shelf and one or more optical shelves

non-service affecting (NSA)

Refers to a condition that does not impact or interfere with network service.

NSA

See “non-service affecting” (p. GL-18) for definition.

NTP

See “network time protocol” (p. GL-18) for definition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

O OA

See “optical amplifier” (p. GL-19) for definition.

OAMP

Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning.

OC-n

See “optical carrier level-n” (p. GL-19) for definition.

Occupational Safety and Health Administration) (OSHA)

OSHA is the main American federal agency charged with the enforcement of safety and health

legislation.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




OCHAN or OCh

See “optical channel” (p. GL-19) for definition.

ODU

See “optical demultiplexer” (p. GL-20) for definition.

ODU-k

An optical logical connection with a specific rate. The rate can be either ODU-10G or ODU-40G.

OEO

See “optical-electrical-optical conversion” (p. GL-20) for definition.

OOF

See “out of frame” (p. GL-21) for definition.

Open Systems Interconnection reference model (OSI)

A seven-layer model that pertains to the logical structure for communications networks

standardized by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). Adherence to the

standard enables any OSI-compliant system to communicate with any other OSI-compliant

system.

Operations Support System (OSS)

A management system supporting a specific management function, such as alarm surveillance or

provisioning, in a carrier network. Many OSSs are large centralized systems running on

mainframes or minicomputers.

OPR

See “optical path restoration” (p. GL-20) for definition.

OPS

See “optical protection switch” (p. GL-20) for definition.

optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM)

An OADM is a network element which allows a WDM transmission link to add or drop optical

signals, without converting the photonic stream into an electrical signal. Insertion and extraction

are done using optical filters or demultiplexers. An OADM can be either non-reconfigurable or

reconfigurable; in the latter case, optical switches need to be used.

optical amplifier (OA)

A device that amplifies an input optical signal without converting it into electrical form.

optical carrier level-n (OC-n)

A carrier rate specified in the SONET standard, where n is a numeric.

optical cell

A number of nodes connected by fiber in a predefined manner to provide route diversity to each

node. The simplest form of optical cell is a ring. Statically allocated wavelengths are assigned

within the context of one cell.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




GL-19

optical channel (OCHAN, Och)

An optical wavelength band for WDM optical communications.

optical demultiplexer (ODU)

Value/indicator used for an optical demultiplexer.

optical path protection (OPP)

A protection path is defined when the connection is set up. When a fault is detected on the path,

there is a switch-over from the working path to the protection path to restore the traffic.

optical path restoration (OPR)

A recovery scheme that dynamically finds a protection path when a fault is detected. This method

is usually not capable of matching SDH/SONET recovery time periods (for example, 50 ms).

optical power meter

An instrument that measures the amount of optical power present at the end of a fiber or cable.

optical protection switch (OPS)

An optical circuit pack that provides WDM protection.

optical signal to noise ratio (OSNR)

The ratio between the optical signal power of the data signal and the power of the optical noise

signal.

optical supervisory channel (OSC)

A designated optical channel used to carry communications related to maintenance and

operational functions of the network rather than customer traffic.

The OSC supports the following communications: node-to-node, interworking, client LAN, and

orderwire communication.

optical transponder (OT)

An OT is a circuit pack that performs optical-to-electrical to optical (OEO) conversion.

OTs perform frequency adaptation between 1830 PSS equipment and external equipment that is

not optically compatible with 1830 PSS Transport. OTs also provide 3R functionality (retiming,

reshaping, reamplification) and perform fault management and performance monitoring

(non-intrusive monitoring) on the SONET/SDH and WaveWrapper signal.

optical transport network (OTN)

A fiber-optic network designed to transport customer traffic, such as an SDH or SONET network.

See “Synchronous Digital Hierarchy” (p. GL-28) and “Synchronous Optical Network”

(p. GL-28) for examples.

optical-electrical-optical conversion (OEO)

The process of converting an optical signal to an electrical equivalent and then back to optical

data.

orderwire

A section of the supervisory signal that is used for communication between sites.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




OSC

See “optical supervisory channel” (p. GL-20) for definition.

OSHA

See “Occupational Safety and Health Administration)” (p. GL-18) for definition.

OSI

See “Open Systems Interconnection reference model” (p. GL-19) for definition.

OSNR

See “optical signal to noise ratio” (p. GL-20) for definition.

OSP

See “outside plant” (p. GL-21) for definition.

OSS

See “Operations Support System” (p. GL-19) for definition.

OT

See “optical transponder” (p. GL-20) for definition.

OTN

See “optical transport network” (p. GL-20) for definition.

out of frame (OOF)

A state in which the frame alignment sequence of an SDH/SONET frame has not been found for

several consecutive frames.

outside plant (OSP)

Refers to outside the central office/building premises.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

P PCS

See “physical coding sublayer” (p. GL-22) for definition.

PDL

See “polarization dependent loss” (p. GL-22) for definition.

PDU

See “protocol data unit” (p. GL-22) for definition.

performance monitoring (PM)

Measures the quality of service and identifies any degrading or marginally operating systems

(before an alarm would be generated).

photonic cross-connect (PXC)

A fiber cross-connect that operates without optical-electrical-optical conversion. It can have one

or more wavelengths on each fiber or port.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




GL-21

photonic protection switch (PPS)

By provisioning of PPS cards (or optical splitters), automatic protection switch (APS) are

automatically created.

physical coding sublayer (PCS)

PCS layer monitoring used for Ethernet/FC ports.

PM

See “performance monitoring” (p. GL-21) for definition.

PMD

See “polarization mode dispersion” (p. GL-22) for definition.

point-to-point transmission

The transmission between two designated stations.

polarization dependent loss (PDL)

Loss of optical power that occurs during the polarization process. Polarized light waves are light

waves in which the vibrations occur in a single plane. The process of transforming unpolarized

light into polarized light is known as polarization (the orientation of the electric and magnetic

field vectors of a propagating electro-magnetic wave).

polarization mode dispersion (PMD)

PMD is an inherent property of all optical media. It is caused by the difference in the propagation

velocities of light in the orthogonal principal polarization states of the transmission medium. The

net effect is that if an optical pulse contains both polarization components, then the different

polarization components will travel at different speeds and arrive at different times, smearing the

received optical signal.

PPS

See “photonic protection switch” (p. GL-21) for definition.

protocol data unit (PDU)

A device used for the information exchange between equal protocol layers.

provisioning

Placing and configuring hardware and software required to activate a telecommunications service

for a customer. If the equipment is in place, provisioning may consist of creating or modifying a

customer record in a database to activate the services.

PXC

See “photonic cross-connect” (p. GL-21) for definition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Q QoS

See “quality of service” (p. GL-22) for definition.

quality of service (QoS)

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




A set of performance parameters that characterize the transmission quality over a given virtual

connection.

QoS can be quantitatively indicated by channel or system performance parameters, such as

signal-to-noise ratio, bit error ratio, message throughput rate, and call blocking probability.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

R rack

A rack is the standardized physical framework on which network equipment such as 1830 PSS-32

shelves are mounted. A rack can contain more than one shelf. Also called bay frames.

random jitter (RJ)

Random jitter is caused by thermal noise and may be modeled as a Gaussian process. The

peak-to-peak value of RJ is of a probabilistic nature, and thus any specific value requires an

associated probability.

receiver

A terminal device that includes a detector and signal processing electronics. It functions as an

optical-to-electrical converter.

receiver sensitivity

The minimum optical power required at a receiver to deliver traffic at a guaranteed bit error rate

(BER). This parameter is specified back-to-back (without the effects of chromatic dispersion or

OSNR degradation).

reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM)

An optical network element with a configuration that can be changed remotely. The main benefit

of this remote reconfigurability is that it reduces Operating Expenditures (OPEX) when operating

a DWDM network. OPEX is reduced because the ROADM eases network provisioning and line

tuning at both the initial installation and any upgrades (to increase the capacity or re-allocate

resources to a new demand matrix).

regeneration

Electrical signal regeneration. Typically, OTUk Section regeneration and ODUk transparency is

implied in this context.

remote network monitoring (RMON)

Provides statistics for remote performance monitoring. Defined in standard RFC 2819.

repeater

A receiver and transmitter set designed to amplify attenuated signals. Repeaters are used to extend

operating range. See “in-line amplifier” (p. GL-13) for related term.

request for comment (RFC)

A document that describes the specifications of a technology. RFCs are used by the Internet

Engineering Task Force (IETF) and other standards bodies.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




GL-23

restoration domain

A part of the network where traffic restoration is provided in isolation from the rest of the

network.

RFC

See “request for comment” (p. GL-23) for definition.

RIP

See “routing information protocol” (p. GL-24) for definition.

RJ

See “random jitter” (p. GL-23) for definition.

RMON

See “remote network monitoring” (p. GL-23) for definition.

ROADM

See “reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer” (p. GL-23) for definition.

routing information protocol (RIP)

RIP is an interior gateway protocol defined by the IETF (RIPv1 - RFC 1058 and RIPv2 - 2453)

that specifies how routers exchange routing table information. RIP is a routing protocol based on

the distance vector algorithm. With RIP, routers periodically exchange entire tables.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

S SA

See “service affecting” (p. GL-25) for definition.

SAN

See “storage area network” (p. GL-27) for definition.

SC

See “shelf controller” (p. GL-25) for definition.

scattering

The change of direction of light rays or photons after striking small particles. It may also be

regarded as the diffusion of a light beam caused by the inhomogeneity of the transmitting

material.

SCOT

See “software control of transmission” (p. GL-26) for definition.

SDH

See “Synchronous Digital Hierarchy” (p. GL-28) for definition.

secure shell (SSH)

An encrypted method of transmitting data.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




segment

A pair of OSP fibers connecting two sites.

SELV

Safety extra low voltage.

service affecting (SA)

Refers to a condition that impacts or interferes with network service.

Service Level Agreement (SLA)

A contract between a network service provider and a customer that specifies, usually in

measurable terms, what services the network service provider will provide.

services

Within the 1830 PSS-32 system, services can be offered directly to end customers or be used

internally to a network as transport infrastructure.

SFC

See “static filter, CWDM” (p. GL-27) for definition.

SFD

See “static filter, DWDM” (p. GL-27) for definition.

SFP

See “small form-factor pluggable module” (p. GL-26) for definition.

shared risk group (SRG)

A shared risk group is a group of items that are likely to be affected by a single fault. The items

therefore share the risk of experiencing the fault.

shelf

A shelf is a mechanical facility that is in general a housing for circuit packs. Shelves are housed in

Bays.

An 1830 PSS-32 node consists of one or more physical shelves equipped with cards. The shelf

provides a chassis or cage with a backplane that can contain multiple cards. The shelf is mounted

in a rack. Each shelf has a shelf controller card, plus its redundant mate. Every node has one shelf

that has its shelf controllers designated as the master controller for the node. The node appears as

a single point in the network topology to the network management system. Connections between

nodes use network links. See “node” (p. GL-18) for related term.

shelf controller (SC)

The SC card in a 1830 PSS-32 shelf.

signaling transfer point (STP)

A node in a common channel signalling network with the function of transferring messages from

one signalling link to another and considered exclusively from the viewpoint of the transfer

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




GL-25

SNMP is the protocol used to communicate between the 1830 PSS-32 nodes and the NMS. The

SNMP traffic is carried over the 1830 PSS-32 control network.

simplex

A single element (for example, a simplex connector is a single-fiber connector).

single-mode fiber (SMF)

A type of fiber which is very small in diameter and allows the light to be reflected in a single way

along the lightguide such that there is coherence in the arrival of the light signal.

site

The termination location of OSP cables. Each site can contain one or more NEs and one or more

glass-through connections.

SLA

See “Service Level Agreement” (p. GL-25) for definition.

small form-factor pluggable module (SFP)

An optical modular, hot-pluggable transceiver (compatible with IEEE-802.3z) designed for use

with small form factor (SFF) connectors, offering high speed and physical compactness. SFP

transceivers perform at data speeds of up to 5 gigabits per second, and possibly higher.

The SFP modules can be easily interchanged, therefore, electro-optical or fiber optic networks can

be upgraded and maintained more conveniently than has been the case with traditional soldered-in

modules. Rather than replacing an entire circuit board containing several soldered-in modules, a

single module can be removed and replaced for repair or upgrading. This can result in a

substantial cost savings, both in maintenance and in upgrading efforts.

SMF

See “single-mode fiber” (p. GL-26) for definition.

SNCP

See “Sub-Network Connection Protocol” (p. GL-28) for definition.

SNMP

See “Simple Network Management Protocol” (p. GL-25) for definition.

software control of transmission (SCOT)

System software that controls the settings of EDFA pumps, VOAs, Raman pumps, DCM pumps,

DGEFs, and blockers in the ROADM NEs.

software generic (SW generic)

The whole software and (static) data associated with a particular NE release.

SONET

See “Synchronous Optical Network” (p. GL-28) for definition.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




SONET wavelength service

The SONET wavelength service provides transport of SONET signals through the 1830 PSS-32

network.

span

A fiber link between NEs that can be unidirectional or bidirectional, depending on the network

design. Multiple segments in tandem are connected by glass-through connections.

span loss

Loss (in dB) of optical power due to the span transmission medium (includes fiber loss and splice

losses).

splice

A permanent connection of two optical fibers through fusion or mechanical means.

SRG

See “shared risk group” (p. GL-25) for definition.

SSH

See “secure shell” (p. GL-24) for definition.

SSMF

See “standard single-mode fiber” (p. GL-27) for definition.

ST

See “straight-tip connector” (p. GL-27) for definition.

standard single-mode fiber (SSMF)

This is the most common type of fiber deployed. This fiber was designed to provide zero

chromatic dispersion at 1310 nm, to support the early long-haul transmission systems operating at

this wavelength. It has a chromatic dispersion of at most 20 ps/(nm*km) in the 1550 nm

wavelength range and usually around 17 ps/(nm*km).

static filter, CWDM (SFC)

A static filter card used with a CWDM circuit pack.

static filter, DWDM (SFD)

A static filter card used with a DWDM circuit pack.

storage area network (SAN)

A high-speed special-purpose network (or subnetwork) that interconnects different kinds of data

storage devices with associated data servers on behalf of a larger network of users.

STP

See “signaling transfer point” (p. GL-25) for definition.

straight-tip connector (ST)

Fiber optic connector that uses a bayonet-style coupling rather than a screw-on coupling.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




GL-27

STS, STS-n

See “synchronous transport signal-n” (p. GL-28) for definition.

Sub-Network Connection Protocol (SNCP)

An SDH version of UPSR. See SDH and UPSR.

SW generic

See “software generic” (p. GL-26) for definition.

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

A family of digital transmission rates used outside of the U.S. and Japan from 51.84 Mb/s to 40

Gb/s that allows the interconnection of transmission products around the world.

SDH is the standard technology for synchronous data transmission on optical media. It is the

international equivalent of Synchronous Optical Network (SONET). Both SDH and SONET

technologies provide faster and less costly network interconnection than traditional

Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) equipment.

Synchronous Optical Network (SONET)

A North-American standard developed by Telecordia and adapted by ANSI for the optical

long-distance networks.

SONET is the interface standard for synchronous optical-fiber transmission, applicable to the

physical layer of the OSI reference model. SONET has a basic bit rate of 51.840 mB/s, called

OC-1, that is used to define higher rates (OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, and so on) carried as a channel on

an optical fiber.

synchronous signal

A data signal that is sent along with a clock signal.

synchronous transport signal-n (STS, STS-n)

The basic logical building block signal with a rate of 51.840 Mb/s for an STS-1 signal and a rate

of n times 51.840 Mb/s for an STS-n signal (where n is a numeric).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

T tap

The entry point into a system module.

target identifier (TID)

A provisionable parameter used to identify an NE within a TL1 command.

TCA

See “threshold crossing alert” (p. GL-29) for definition.

TCP

See “Transmission Control Protocol” (p. GL-29) for definition.

TCP/IP

A suite of several networking protocols developed for the Internet that provides communication

across interconnected networks, between computers with diverse hardware architectures and

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




various operating systems. Some examples are FTP, SMTP, and SNMP.

TDM

See “time-division multiplexing” (p. GL-29) for definition.

Telecommunications Management Network (TMN)

A network that interfaces with a telecommunications network at several points to receive

information from, and to control the operation of, the telecommunications network.

thermal noise

Noise resulting from thermally induced random fluctuation in the receiver's load resistance

current.

threshold crossing alert (TCA)

A condition set when a counter exceeds a user-selected high or low threshold. A TCA does not

generate an alarm but is available on demand through the CIT.

TID

See “target identifier” (p. GL-28) for definition.

time-division multiplexing (TDM)

A multiplexing technique whereby two or more channels are derived from a transmission medium

by dividing access to the medium into sequential intervals. Each channel has access to the entire

bandwidth of the medium during its interval. This implies that one transmitter uses one channel to

send several bit streams of information.

TL1 (Transaction language 1)

An OS/NE machine-to-machine language. TL1 messages are expressed as ASCII strings. TL1

messages and syntax are defined by Telecordia.

TMN

See “Telecommunications Management Network” (p. GL-29) for definition.

TOADM

See “tunable optical add/drop multiplexer” (p. GL-30) for definition.

topology

The pattern of interconnections between nodes in a network, such as a ring or hub. A network

topology database contains information regarding each link in the network.

traffic grooming

Traffic can be consolidated, aggregated, or separated to achieve efficiencies of routing.

Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)

A protocol used with the Internet Protocol to send data in the form of message units between

computers over the Internet. While IP handles the actual delivery of the data, TCP keeps track of

the individual units of data (called packets) that a message is divided into for efficient routing

through the Internet.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




GL-29

traps (SNMP)

SNMP traps are unacknowledged events sent from an agent to a manager. In a 1830 PSS-32

network, the agent is the node and the manager is EMS.

tunable optical add/drop multiplexer (TOADM)

A tunable ROADM that yields the ultimate in operational flexibility, especially when used in

conjunction with transponders with tunable wavelength lasers.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

U UDP

See “user datagram protocol” (p. GL-30) for definition.

UL

See “Underwriters Laboratories” (p. GL-30) for definition.

Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

A U.S. non-profit privately owned and operated product safety testing and certification

organization. Develops standards and test procedures for products, materials, components,

assemblies, tools and equipment, chiefly dealing with product safety.

unidirectional path-switched ring (UPSR)

A survivable, closed loop transport architecture that protects against cable cuts and node failures

by providing duplicate, geographically diverse paths for each service. Adjacent nodes on the ring

are interconnected using a single pair of optical fibers. One fiber transports traffic in one direction

(for example, clockwise), while the second fiber transports traffic in the opposite direction (for

example, counterclockwise). In a UPSR, the source node bridges its outgoing traffic along

opposite directions around the ring (on paths provided by SONET synchronous transport

channels). In contrast to BLSR, a UPSR:

• is path-specific as opposed to line specific

• does not allow extra traffic (because traffic is bridged)

• requires less coordination from source to destination (because the destination network

element can make all its decisions without involving the source)

UPSR

See “unidirectional path-switched ring” (p. GL-30) for definition.

user datagram protocol (UDP)

A minimal, datagram-oriented, transport network protocol above the IP network layer that does

not guarantee data ordering or delivery. Because it is datagram-oriented, each send operation by

the application results in the transmission of a single IP datagram. This contrasts with the

Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) which is byte stream oriented and guarantees the delivery

and ordering of the bytes sent. Because it is a byte stream oriented, a single send operation may

result in a no IP datagrams (buffering), a single IP datagram, or multiple IP datagrams.

user services

Services that the network provider can sell to their customers, such as Ethernet service.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




UTC

Coordinated universal time.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

V variable optical attenuator (VOA)

A device used to set the attenuation of the power received over a fiber to a level required by the

receiving equipment.

VCAT

See “virtual concatenation” (p. GL-31) for definition.

very short reach (VSR)

A SONET/SDH interface that provides a low-cost interconnection solution of less than 300

meters between routers, switches, and DWDM systems.

virtual concatenation (VCAT)

Defines an inverse multiplexing procedure whereby the contiguous bandwidth is broken into

individual Virtual Containers (VC) at the source transmitter and logically represented in a Virtual

Concatenation Group (VCG). VCG members are transported as individual VCs across the

SONET/SDH network and recombined at the destination VCG receiver. While contiguous

concatenation requires concatenation functionality at each network element, virtual concatenation

do not.

virtual time-slot (VTS)

1830 PSS-1 GBEH Edge Device has a fixed assignment of 10 Virtual Time Slots to each line port.

VOA

See “variable optical attenuator” (p. GL-31) for definition.

VSR

See “very short reach” (p. GL-31) for definition.

VTS

See “virtual time-slot” (p. GL-31) for definition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

W wave division multiplexing (WDM)

WDM merges optical traffic onto one common fiber, sending several signals through one fiber

with different wavelengths of light. WDM allows flexibility in expanding bandwidth. It reduces

costly mux/demux function, and it reuses existing optical signals.See dense wave division

multiplexing (DWDM).

wave key

A component of the Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability that is used to identify individual

wavelengths through the network.

A wave key is a number between 1 and 2048. Each WDM wavelength in a 1830 PSS-32 network

is uniquely identified by a pair of wave keys.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




GL-31

waveguide

A material medium that confines and guides a propagating electromagnetic wave.

waveguide coupler

A coupler that transfers light between planar waveguides.

wavelength

The distance between points of corresponding phase of two consecutive cycles of a wave,

typically measured in nanometers (nm). The wavelength is related to the propagation velocity and

the frequency. (Also called lambda.)

wavelength growth

A type of growth in which all eight wavelengths are added to a single line before more lines are

added.

Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability

Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability is a patented feature of 1830 PSS-32 which allows for

the tracking of wavelengths through the 1830 PSS-32 network, and for the measuring of the

wavelengths' optical power levels at certain points along their paths.

WaveWrapper

WaveWrapper provides network management functions such as optical-layer performance

monitoring, error correction, and ring protection on a per-wavelength basis.

WDM

See “wave division multiplexing” (p. GL-31) for definition.

WDM demand

The termination points and signal type of a service that is to be carried by the WDM network.

WDM line

A contiguous series of spans terminated by a ROADM at each end. A WDM line can be a single

span or a series of spans joined by the in-line amplifiers (ILAs).

Web user interface (WebUI)

A computer interface that provides web-based access to the network element (NE).

WebUI

See “Web user interface” (p. GL-32) for definition.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

X XFP (10-gigabit small form factor pluggable module)

A pluggable optical transceiver module that combines transmitter and receiver functions in one

compact, flexible, and low cost package format. Up to sixteen XFP modules can be arranged on a

typical rack card, allowing for an unprecedented level of data density. XFP is protocol

independent, are can support OC-192/STM-64, 10 Gigabit Ethernet, 10 Gigabit Fibre Channel,

and G.709 data streams in routers, switches and network cards. Reaches ranging from Very Short

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Reach (VSR) to Long Reach (LR) can also be supported.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Y Y-coupler

A coupler that has three waveguide legs joined at the center in a "Y" shape which connects an

input port to two output ports or two input ports to a single output port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Z ZIC (zero installation craft)

An NE-imbedded graphical user interface (GUI) application for local operation and maintenance.

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




GL-33

Glossary

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Index

B barred-hand symbol, 1-12

Battery off or power filter off,

6-47

BDI, 6-4

Backward Defect Indication,

7-4

BDI-ODU

Backward Defect Indication

ODU, 7-5

BDIODU, 6-5

Before you begin, 3-3

.............................................................

C Card failure

communication, 6-7

Card initializing, 6-6

Card missing, 6-48

Card over temperature, 6-22

Card provisioning

failure, 6-8

Card under temperature, 6-23

Card-Failure Device, 6-13

CARDINIT

Card Initializing, 7-6

Cleaning optical connectors, 4-15

Cleaning other optical

components, 4-19

CLI access, 3-29

configure GNE for management

system access, 3-43

configure system properties, 3-42

configure topological links, 3-50

Connect to Network Element

Web user interface (WebUI)/

CLI, 4-2

CONTCOM

Card Failure - Communication,

7-7

.............................................................

D danger, potential sources of, 1-4

Database invalid, 6-11

DATAFLT

Card Provisioning Failure, 7-9

DB Failure Local

copy creation of processing

failure, 6-9

DB Failure Transport

file transport failure, 6-10

DBFL

DB Failure Local - copy

creation of processing failure,

7-11

DBFT

DB Failure Transport - file

transport failure, 7-12

DBINVALID

Database invalid, 7-13

DEG

Signal Degrade - ODU, 6-12,

7-15

Design, 2-4

Determining the far end of a

service, 8-2

.............................................................

E Electrical Sub-Network

Connection Protection (ESCNP)

Provision, 4-6

electrostatic discharge, 1-4, 1-11

EQPT

Card Failure - Device, 7-17

ESD, 1-11

ETR setting, 4-14

ETR-MISMATCH

card, 6-14, 7-19

example configuration of ftp

server, 3-52

.............................................................

F Facility loop active, 6-36

FACTERM-DEV

SFP SEEP Failure, 7-21

Feature, 2-12

FELANLOS, 6-16, 7-23

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




IN-1

FELANLSS, 6-17, 7-24

FELOS, 6-18, 7-25

FEPORTMISMATCH, 6-19, 7-26

Fiber cleaning, 4-15

FRCDWKSWBK, 6-20, 7-27

FRCDWKSWPR, 6-21, 7-28

.............................................................

G GCC network setup, 4-11

Glossary, GL-1

ground strap, ESD, 1-11

.............................................................

H High Input Voltage Defect, 6-61

.............................................................

I in-service fan replacement, 4-20

initialize database, 3-24

Inspecting optical connectors, 4-18

Installation and Provisioning of

1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge Device,

3-6, 3-11, 3-12

installation and seat packs, 3-23

INTEMP

over, 7-29

under, 7-31

Introduction, 2-2

Invalid topology, 6-46

.............................................................

L LAN1 Ethernet, 3-39

LANLOS, 6-24, 7-32

LANLSS, 6-25, 7-33

lasers

classes, 1-7

eye damage, 1-7

safety, 1-6

warning labels, 1-9

LC fiber removal, 3-22

LCK, 6-26

LFD, 6-27

Link Down, 6-28

LINKDOWN, 7-36

LOCKOUTOFPR, 6-29, 7-39

LOF, 6-30

Loss Of Frame, 7-41

LOFEGR, 6-32, 7-45

LOM, 6-33

Loss of Multiframe - OTU,

7-46

loopback IP address, 3-38

Loopbacks, 2-38

LOS

Loss of signal, 7-48, 7-54

OMD, 6-34

OTU, 6-35

Low Input Voltage Defect, 6-62

LPBKLINE

Line (Facility), 7-56

LPBKTERM

Diagnostic (Terminal), 7-57

.............................................................

M MAN

card in maintenance, 6-38,

7-58

port in maintenance, 6-38, 7-58

MANWKSWBK, 6-40, 7-60

MANWKSWPR, 6-41, 7-61

MISMATCH

SFP Mismatch, 7-62

multiservice muxponder, 2-18

.............................................................

N NE date and time, 3-40

NET, 6-43, 7-64

.............................................................

O OCI, 6-44

Open Connection Indication -

ODU, 7-65

Ordering, 2-63

.............................................................

P path power trace, 8-4

PC setup and provisioning, 4-4

Performance monitoring, 2-41

Performing loopbacks, 8-3

PLM, 6-45, 7-66

Port Provisioning, 4-9

potential sources of danger, 1-4

PRCDRERR-TOPO, 7-67

Protection

E-SNCP, 2-33

PWR

Battery off or power filter off,

7-69

.............................................................

R Reliability program, 2-49

REPLUNTMISS

Card Missing, 7-71

REPLUNTMISSMOD

missing module, 7-73

.............................................................

S safety instructions

electrostatic discharge, 1-11

general notes, 1-4

important, 1-13

laser, 1-6, 1-9

Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

IN-2 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H



special, 1-4

safety precautions (enclosed

systems), 1-8

SDH mode, 3-37

SFP

SEEP failure, 6-15

transmit failure, 6-56

SFP module extraction, 3-20

SFP/XFP

mismatch, 6-42

missing module, 6-49

software environment, 3-31

Software installation, 4-5

Software Upgrade

Failed, 6-53

in Progress, 6-52

SSF, 6-50

Server Signal Failure - OTU,

7-75

SSFODU, 6-51

Server Signal Failure - ODU,

7-77

Status Retrieval, 2-45

SWFTDWN

Software Upgrade in Progress,

7-79

SWUPGFAIL

Software Upgrade Failed, 7-80

Synchronization, 2-47

System access, 2-46

.............................................................

T TCA profiles, 4-12

Technical specifications, 2-77

Terminal

loop active, 6-37

TIM, 6-54, 7-85

TIMODU, 6-55, 7-88

topologies, 2-27

TRMT

sfp, 6-56

SFP Transmit Failure, 7-90

.............................................................

U UNKNOWN

Card, 7-92

card unknown, 6-57

sfp/xfp unknown, 6-57

update firmware, 3-41

UPM, 6-59, 7-95

USALS, 6-60, 7-96

.............................................................

V verify system provisioning, 3-51

VOLTAGE

high input defect, 7-98

low input defect, 7-99

.............................................................

W warning labels, laser, 1-9

WKSWPR, 6-63, 7-100

Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




IN-3

Index

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

IN-4 Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H



alcatel-lucent 1830 photonic service switch 1 … · title page alcatel-lucent1830 photonic service...

Documents